Configuration Guide - Ethernet (V100R006C01 - 01)

Quidway S3700 Series Ethernet Switches
V100R006C01
Configuration Guide - Ethernet
Issue 01
Date 2011-10-26
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 01 (2011-10-26) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
Intended Audience
This document provides the basic concepts, configuration procedures, and configuration
examples in different application scenarios of the Ethernet feature supported by the S3700
device.
This document describes how to configure the Ethernet feature.
This document is intended for:
l Data configuration engineers
l Commissioning engineers
l Network monitoring engineers
l System maintenance engineers
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not
avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which
if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not
avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement
important points of the main text.

Configuration Guide - Ethernet About This Document
ii
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical
bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical
bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }
*
Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical
bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be
selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
*
Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical
bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
&<1-n> The parameter before the & sign can be repeated 1 to n times.
# A line starting with the # sign is comments.

Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 01 (2011-10-26)
Initial commercial release.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet About This Document
iii
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Ethernet Interface Configuration...............................................................................................1
1.1 Introduction to Ethernet Interfaces.....................................................................................................................2
1.2 Ethernet Interface Features Supported by the S3700.........................................................................................2
1.3 Configuring Basic Attributes of the Ethernet Interface......................................................................................3
1.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.........................................................................................................3
1.3.2 (Optional) Configuring a Description for an Interface..............................................................................3
1.3.3 (Optional) Configuring the Cable Type on an Interface............................................................................4
1.3.4 (Optional) Setting the Duplex Mode.........................................................................................................5
1.3.5 (Optional) Setting the Rate of an Interface................................................................................................5
1.3.6 (Optional) Enabling Auto-Negotiation......................................................................................................6
1.3.7 (Optional) Switching Between Optical and Electrical Interfaces..............................................................6
1.3.8 Checking the Configuration.......................................................................................................................7
1.4 Configuring Advanced Attributes of an Ethernet Interface................................................................................7
1.4.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.........................................................................................................7
1.4.2 (Optional) Configuring Loopback on the Ethernet Interface....................................................................8
1.4.3 (Optional) Configuring the Interface Group..............................................................................................8
1.4.4 (Optional) Setting the Maximum Frame Length on the Ethernet Interface...............................................9
1.4.5 (Optional) Enabling Flow Control.............................................................................................................9
1.4.6 (Optional) Enabling Auto-Negotiation of Flow Control.........................................................................10
1.4.7 (Optional) Enabling Port Isolation..........................................................................................................10
1.4.8 (Optional) Performing a Cable Test on an Interface...............................................................................11
1.4.9 (Optional) Configuring a Loopback Test on an Interface.......................................................................12
1.4.10 Checking the Configuration...................................................................................................................12
1.5 Maintaining Ethernet Interfaces.......................................................................................................................13
1.5.1 Debugging Ethernet Interfaces................................................................................................................13
1.6 Configuration Examples...................................................................................................................................13
1.6.1 Example for Configuring Port Isolation..................................................................................................13
2 Link Aggregation Configuration..............................................................................................16
2.1 Introduction to Link Aggregation.....................................................................................................................17
2.2 Link Aggregation Supported by the S3700......................................................................................................17
2.3 Configuring Link Aggregation in Manual Load Balancing Mode...................................................................18
Configuration Guide - Ethernet Contents
iv
2.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.......................................................................................................18
2.3.2 Configuring the Eth-Trunk to Work in Manual Load Balancing Mode..................................................19
2.3.3 Adding Member Interfaces to an Eth-Trunk...........................................................................................20
2.3.4 (Optional) Configuring the Load Balancing Mode.................................................................................21
2.3.5 (Optional) Limiting the Number of Active Interfaces.............................................................................22
2.3.6 (Optional) Configuring the Load Balancing Mode for Unknown Unicast Traffic..................................23
2.3.7 Checking the Configuration.....................................................................................................................24
2.4 Configuring Link Aggregation in Static LACP Mode.....................................................................................24
2.4.2 Configuring the Eth-Trunk to Work in Static LACP Mode....................................................................25
2.4.3 Adding Member Interfaces to an Eth-Trunk...........................................................................................26
2.4.4 (Optional) Configuring the Load Balancing Mode.................................................................................27
2.4.5 (Optional) Limiting the Number of Active Interfaces.............................................................................28
2.4.6 (Optional) Setting the LACP Priority of the System...............................................................................29
2.4.7 (Optional) Setting the LACP Priority of an Interface..............................................................................29
2.4.8 (Optional) Enabling LACP Preemption and Setting the Delay for LACP Preemption...........................30
2.4.9 (Optional) Setting the Timeout Interval for Receiving LACP Packets...................................................31
2.4.10 (Optional) Configuring the Load Balancing Mode for Unknown Unicast Traffic................................32
2.5 Configuring an E-Trunk...................................................................................................................................32
2.5.2 Setting the LACP System ID and LACP Priority of an E-Trunk............................................................33
2.5.3 Creating an E-Trunk and Setting Its Priority...........................................................................................34
2.5.4 Configuring Local and Peer IP Addresses of an E-Trunk.......................................................................35
2.5.5 Binding an E-Trunk to a BFD Session....................................................................................................35
2.5.6 Adding an Eth-Trunk to an E-Trunk.......................................................................................................36
2.5.7 (Optional) Configuring the Working Mode of an Eth-Trunk in an E-Trunk..........................................37
2.5.8 (Optional) Setting the Password..............................................................................................................37
2.5.9 (Optional) Setting the Timeout of Hello Packets....................................................................................38
2.5.10 (Optional) Setting the Revertive Switching Delay................................................................................39
2.6 Maintaining Link Aggregation.........................................................................................................................40
2.6.1 Clearing Statistics of LACP Packets.......................................................................................................40
2.6.2 Debugging the Link Aggregation Group.................................................................................................40
2.6.3 Monitoring the Operation Status of the Link Aggregation Group..........................................................41
2.7 Configuration Examples...................................................................................................................................42
2.7.1 Example for Configuring Link Aggregation in Manual Load Balancing Mode.....................................42
2.7.2 Example for Configuring Link Aggregation in Static LACP Mode.......................................................44
3 VLAN Configuration..................................................................................................................48
3.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................................................50
3.2 VLAN Features Supported by the S3700.........................................................................................................57
3.3 Dividing a LAN into VLANs...........................................................................................................................61
v
3.3.2 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on Ports.........................................................................................64
3.3.3 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on MAC Addresses.......................................................................66
3.3.4 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on IP Subnets................................................................................67
3.3.5 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on Protocols..................................................................................69
3.3.6 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on Policies.....................................................................................71
3.4 Creating a VLANIF Interface...........................................................................................................................73
3.4.2 Creating a VLANIF Interface..................................................................................................................73
3.4.3 Assigning an IP Address to a VLANIF Interface....................................................................................74
3.4.4 (Optional) Setting a Delay After Which a VLANIF Interface Goes Down............................................74
3.4.5 (Optional) Setting the MTU of a VLANIF Interface...............................................................................75
3.5 Configuring Inter-VLAN Communication.......................................................................................................76
3.5.2 Configuring VLANIF Interfaces for Inter-VLAN Communication........................................................77
3.6 Configuring VLAN Aggregation to Save IP Addresses...................................................................................79
3.6.2 Creating a Sub-VLAN.............................................................................................................................80
3.6.3 Creating a Super-VLAN..........................................................................................................................81
3.6.4 Assigning an IP Address to the VLANIF Interface of a Super-VLAN...................................................82
3.6.5 (Optional) Enabling Proxy ARP on the VLANIF Interface of a Super-VLAN......................................82
3.7 Configuring a MUX VLAN to Separate Layer 2 Traffic.................................................................................84
3.7.2 Configuring a Principal VLAN for a MUX VLAN................................................................................85
3.7.3 Configuring a Group VLAN for a Subordinate VLAN...........................................................................86
3.7.4 Configuring a Separate VLAN for a Subordinate VLAN.......................................................................86
3.7.5 Enabling the MUX VLAN Function on a Port........................................................................................87
3.8 Configuring a Voice VLAN to Transmit Voice Data.......................................................................................88
3.8.2 Enabling the Voice VLAN Function.......................................................................................................90
3.8.3 Configuring an OUI for a Voice VLAN..................................................................................................91
3.8.4 (Optional) Setting an Aging Timer for a Voice VLAN...........................................................................91
3.8.5 (Optional) Configuring an 802.1p Priority and a DSCP Value for the Voice VLAN.............................92
3.8.6 (Optional) Configuring the Mode in Which Ports Are Added to a Voice VLAN...................................93
3.8.7 (Optional) Configuring the Working Mode for a Voice VLAN..............................................................94
3.8.8 (Optional) Configuring a Port to Communicate with a Voice Device of Another Vendor.....................95
vi
3.9 Configuring an mVLAN to Implement Integrated Management.....................................................................96
3.9.2 Configuring an mVLAN..........................................................................................................................97
3.9.3 Configuring a VLANIF Interface for an mVLAN..................................................................................97
3.10 Maintaining VLAN.........................................................................................................................................98
3.10.1 Clearing the Statistics of VLAN Packets..............................................................................................98
3.11 Configuration Examples.................................................................................................................................98
3.11.1 Example for Configuring Interface-based VLANs................................................................................98
3.11.2 Example for Configuring MAC Address-based VLAN Assignment..................................................101
3.11.3 Example for Configuring IP Subnet-based VLAN Assignment.........................................................103
3.11.4 Example for Configuring Protocol-based VLAN Assignment............................................................107
3.11.5 Example for Implementing Communication Between VLANs by Using VLANIF Interfaces...........110
3.11.6 Example for Configuring VLAN Aggregation....................................................................................112
3.11.7 Example for Configuring the MUX VLAN........................................................................................115
3.11.8 Example for Configuring a Voice VLAN in Auto Mode....................................................................118
3.11.9 Example for Configuring a Voice VLAN in Manual Mode................................................................120
4 VLAN Mapping Configuration..............................................................................................124
4.1 Introduction to VLAN Mapping.....................................................................................................................125
4.2 VLAN Mapping Features Supported by the S3700........................................................................................125
4.3 Configuring VLAN Mapping of Single VLAN Tag......................................................................................125
4.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task.....................................................................................................125
4.3.2 Replacing a Single Tag..........................................................................................................................126
4.4 Configuring VLAN Mapping of Double VLAN Tags...................................................................................127
4.4.2 Replacing the Outer VLAN Tag............................................................................................................128
4.5 Configuring Global VLAN Mapping.............................................................................................................129
4.5.2 Configuring Global VLAN Mapping....................................................................................................129
4.6.1 Example for Configuring Single-Tag VLAN Mapping........................................................................130
4.6.2 Example for Configuring N:1 VLAN Mapping....................................................................................134
4.6.3 Example for Configuring Global VLAN Mapping...............................................................................136
5 QinQ Configuration..................................................................................................................139
5.1 Concept of QinQ.............................................................................................................................................140
5.2 QinQ Features Supported by the S3700.........................................................................................................140
5.3 Configuring QinQ on an Interface..................................................................................................................140
5.3.2 Setting the Link Type of an Interface....................................................................................................141
vii
5.3.3 Specifying the Outer VLAN ID.............................................................................................................141
5.4 Configuring Selective QinQ...........................................................................................................................142
5.4.2 Setting the Link Type of an Interface....................................................................................................143
5.4.3 Adding an Outer VLAN Tag.................................................................................................................143
5.4.4 Configuring Selective QinQ..................................................................................................................144
5.5 Configuring QinQ Stacking on a VLANIF Interface.....................................................................................145
5.5.2 Configuring QinQ Stacking on a VLANIF Interface............................................................................146
5.6 Setting the Protocol Type in the Outer VLAN Tag........................................................................................147
5.6.2 Configuring the Type of an Interface....................................................................................................148
5.6.3 Setting the Protocol Type in the Outer VLAN Tag...............................................................................148
5.7.1 Example for Configuring QinQ on Interfaces.......................................................................................149
5.7.2 Example for Configuring Selective QinQ.............................................................................................152
5.7.3 Example for Configuring Selective QinQ with VLAN Mapping..........................................................155
5.7.4 Example for Configuring QinQ Stacking on the VLANIF Interface....................................................158
6 GVRP Configuration................................................................................................................162
6.1 GVRP Overview.............................................................................................................................................163
6.2 GVRP Features Supported by the S3700.......................................................................................................166
6.3 Configuring GVRP.........................................................................................................................................167
6.3.2 Enabling GVRP.....................................................................................................................................167
6.3.3 (Optional) Setting the Registration Mode of a GVRP Interface............................................................168
6.3.4 (Optional) Setting the GARP Timers....................................................................................................169
6.4 Maintaining GVRP.........................................................................................................................................170
6.4.1 Clearing GARP Statistics......................................................................................................................170
6.5.1 Example for Configuring GVRP...........................................................................................................171
7 MAC Address Table Configuration.......................................................................................175
7.1 MAC Address Table Overview......................................................................................................................177
7.2 MAC Address Features Supported by the S3700...........................................................................................178
7.3 Configuring a Static MAC Address Entry......................................................................................................180
7.4 Configuring a Blackhole MAC Address Entry...............................................................................................181
7.5 Setting the Aging Time of Dynamic MAC Address Entries..........................................................................182
7.6 Disabling MAC Address Learning.................................................................................................................183
viii
7.6.2 Disabling MAC Address Learning on an Interface...............................................................................184
7.6.3 Disabling MAC Address Learning in a VLAN.....................................................................................185
7.7 Limiting the Number of Learned MAC Addresses........................................................................................185
7.7.2 Limiting the Number of MAC Addresses Learned on an Interface......................................................187
7.7.3 Limiting the Number of MAC Addresses Learned in a VLAN............................................................188
7.8 Configuring Port Security...............................................................................................................................189
7.8.2 Configuring the Secure Dynamic MAC Function on an Interface........................................................190
7.8.3 Configuring the Sticky MAC Function on an Interface........................................................................191
7.9 Configuring MAC Address Anti-Flapping.....................................................................................................192
7.9.2 Setting the MAC Address Learning Priority of an Interface.................................................................193
7.9.3 Prohibiting MAC Address Flapping Between Interfaces with the Same Priority.................................194
7.10 Configuring MAC Address Flapping Detection...........................................................................................195
7.10.1 Establishing the Configuration Task...................................................................................................195
7.10.2 Configuring MAC Address Flapping Detection..................................................................................196
7.10.3 (Optional) Unblocking a Blocked Interface or MAC Address............................................................196
7.10.4 Checking the Configuration.................................................................................................................197
7.11 Enabling MAC Spoofing Defense................................................................................................................197
7.12 Configuring the S3700 to Discard Packets with an All-0 MAC Address....................................................198
7.13 Enabling MAC Address Triggered ARP Entry Update................................................................................199
7.14 Enabling Port Bridge....................................................................................................................................200
7.15 Configuration Examples...............................................................................................................................201
7.15.1 Example for Configuring the MAC Address Table.............................................................................201
7.15.2 Example for Configuring the Limitation on MAC Address Learning Based on VLANs...................204
7.15.3 Example for Configuring Interface Security.......................................................................................206
7.15.4 Example for Configuring MAC Address Anti-Flapping.....................................................................208
8 STP/RSTP Configuration.........................................................................................................210
8.1 STP/RSTP Overview......................................................................................................................................211
8.1.1 STP/RSTP Overview.............................................................................................................................211
8.1.2 STP/RSTP Features Supported by the S3700........................................................................................216
8.2 Configuring Basic STP/RSTP Functions.......................................................................................................218
8.2.2 Configuring the STP/RSTP Mode.........................................................................................................220
8.2.3 (Optional) Configuring Switching Device Priorities.............................................................................220
8.2.4 (Optional) Setting the Path Cost for a Port............................................................................................221
ix
8.2.5 (Optional) Configuring Port Priorities...................................................................................................222
8.2.6 Enabling STP/RSTP..............................................................................................................................223
8.3 Configuring STP/RSTP Parameters on an Interface......................................................................................224
8.3.2 Setting System Parameters....................................................................................................................227
8.3.3 Setting Port Parameters.........................................................................................................................228
8.4 Configuring RSTP Protection Functions........................................................................................................230
8.4.2 Configuring BPDU Protection on a Switching Device.........................................................................232
8.4.3 Configuring TC Protection on a Switching Device...............................................................................233
8.4.4 Configuring Root Protection on a Port..................................................................................................233
8.4.5 Configuring Loop Protection on a Port.................................................................................................234
8.5 Configuring STP/RSTP Interoperability Between Huawei Devices and Non-Huawei Devices....................235
8.5.2 Configuring the Proposal/Agreement Mechanism................................................................................236
8.6 Maintaining STP/RSTP..................................................................................................................................237
8.6.1 Clearing STP/RSTP Statistics...............................................................................................................238
8.7.1 Example for Configuring Basic STP Functions....................................................................................238
8.7.2 Example for Configuring Basic RSTP Functions..................................................................................243
9 MSTP Configuration.................................................................................................................248
9.1 MSTP Overview.............................................................................................................................................250
9.1.1 MSTP Introduction................................................................................................................................250
9.1.2 MSTP Features Supported by the S3700...............................................................................................258
9.2 Configuring Basic MSTP Functions...............................................................................................................262
9.2.2 Configuring the MSTP Mode................................................................................................................264
9.2.3 Configuring and Activating an MST Region........................................................................................265
9.2.4 (Optional) Setting a Priority for a Switching Device in an MSTI.........................................................266
9.2.5 (Optional) Setting a Path Cost of a Port in an MSTI.............................................................................267
9.2.6 (Optional) Setting a Port Priority in an MSTI.......................................................................................268
9.2.7 Enabling MSTP.....................................................................................................................................269
9.3 Configuring MSTP Multi-process..................................................................................................................270
9.3.2 Creating an MSTP Process....................................................................................................................271
9.3.3 Adding an Interface to an MSTP Process - Access Links.....................................................................272
9.3.4 Adding an Interface to an MSTP Process - Share Link.........................................................................272
x
9.3.5 Configuring Priorities and Root Protection in MSTP Multi-process....................................................273
9.3.6 Configuring TC Notification in MSTP Multi-process..........................................................................273
9.4 Configuring MSTP Parameters on an Interface.............................................................................................274
9.4.2 Configuring System Parameters............................................................................................................275
9.4.3 Configuring Port Parameters.................................................................................................................277
9.5 Configuring MSTP Protection Functions.......................................................................................................279
9.5.2 Configuring BPDU Protection on a Switching Device.........................................................................281
9.5.3 Configuring TC Protection on a Switching Device...............................................................................282
9.5.4 Configuring Root Protection on an Interface........................................................................................283
9.5.5 Configuring Loop Protection on an Interface........................................................................................283
9.5.6 Configuring Share-Link Protection on a Switching Device..................................................................284
9.6 Configuring MSTP Interoperability Between Huawei Devices and Non-Huawei Devices...........................285
9.6.2 Configuring a Proposal/Agreement Mechanism...................................................................................286
9.6.3 Configuring the MSTP Protocol Packet Format on an Interface...........................................................287
9.6.4 Enabling the Digest Snooping Function................................................................................................288
9.7 Maintaining MSTP.........................................................................................................................................289
9.7.1 Clearing MSTP Statistics.......................................................................................................................289
9.8.1 Example for Configuring Basic MSTP Functions.................................................................................290
9.8.2 Example for Configuring MSTP Multi-Process for Layer 2 Single-Access Rings and Layer 2 Multi-Access
Rings...............................................................................................................................................................297
10 SEP Configuration...................................................................................................................305
10.1 SEP Overview...............................................................................................................................................307
10.1.1 SEP Overview......................................................................................................................................307
10.1.2 SEP Features Supported by the S3700................................................................................................320
10.2 Configuring Basic SEP Functions................................................................................................................326
10.2.2 Configuring an SEP Segment..............................................................................................................327
10.2.3 Configuring a Control VLAN..............................................................................................................327
10.2.4 Creating a Protected Instance..............................................................................................................328
10.2.5 Adding a Layer 2 Interface to a SEP Segment and Configuring a Role for the Interface...................329
10.3 Specifying an Interface to Block..................................................................................................................331
10.3.2 Setting an Interface Blocking Mode....................................................................................................332
xi
10.3.3 Configuring the Preemption Mode......................................................................................................334
10.4 Configuring SEP Multi-Instance..................................................................................................................336
10.4.2 Configuring and Activating Mappings Between Protected Instances and VLANs.............................338
10.5 Configuring the Topology Change Notification Function...........................................................................339
10.5.2 Reporting Topology Changes of a Lower-Layer Network - SEP Topology Change Notification
........................................................................................................................................................................341
10.5.3 Reporting Topology Changes of a Lower-Layer Network - Enabling the Edge Devices in a SEP Segment
to Process SmartLink Flush Packets...............................................................................................................342
10.5.4 Reporting Topology Changes of an Upper-Layer Network - Configuring Association Between SEP and
CFM................................................................................................................................................................343
10.6 Maintaining SEP...........................................................................................................................................344
10.6.1 Clearing SEP Statistics........................................................................................................................344
10.6.2 Debugging SEP....................................................................................................................................344
10.7.1 Example for Configuring SEP on a Closed Ring Network.................................................................345
10.7.2 Example for Configuring SEP on a Multi-ring Network....................................................................351
10.7.3 Example for Configuring SEP on a Hybrid-ring Network..................................................................362
10.7.4 Example for Configuring a Hybrid SEP+RRPP Ring Network (Reporting the Topology Changes of a
Lower-Layer Network)...................................................................................................................................371
10.7.5 Example for Configuring SEP Multi-Instance on a Closed Ring Network.........................................383
11 Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission Configuration............................................392
11.1 Overview of Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission............................................................................394
11.2 Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission Features Supported by the S3700...........................................395
11.3 Configuring Interface-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission...................................................401
11.3.2 (Optional) Defining Characteristic Information About a Layer 2 Protocol........................................402
11.3.3 Configuring the Transparent Transmission Mode of Layer 2 Protocol Packets.................................403
11.3.4 Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission on an Interface...............................................404
11.3.5 Checking Configuration......................................................................................................................405
11.4 Configuring VLAN-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission......................................................405
11.4.4 Enabling VLAN-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission on an Interface.........................407
11.5 Configuring QinQ-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission........................................................409
xii
11.5.4 Enabling QinQ-based Layer 2 Transparent Transmission on an Interface..........................................411
11.6 Maintaining Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission............................................................................412
11.6.1 Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission.....................................................................413
11.7.1 Example for Configuring Interface-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission.....................413
11.7.2 Example for Configuring VLAN-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission........................420
11.7.3 Example for Configuring QinQ-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission..........................427
12 Loopback Detection Configuration.....................................................................................434
12.1 Loopback Detection Overview.....................................................................................................................435
12.2 Configuring Loopback Detection.................................................................................................................435
12.2.2 Enabling Loopback Detection.............................................................................................................437
12.2.3 Specifying VLAN IDs of Loopback Detection Packets......................................................................437
12.2.4 (Optional) Configuring an Action to Perform After a Loopback Is Detected.....................................438
12.2.5 (Optional) Setting the Interface Recovery Time After a Loop Is Removed........................................439
12.2.6 (Optional) Setting the Interval for Sending Loopback Detection Packets on an Interface.................440
12.3.1 Example for Configuring Loopback Detection...................................................................................440
xiii
1 Ethernet Interface Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the basic knowledge, methods, and examples for configuring the Ethernet
interface.
1.1 Introduction to Ethernet Interfaces
This section describes the Ethernet interfaces.
1.2 Ethernet Interface Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the Ethernet interface features supported by the S3700.
1.3 Configuring Basic Attributes of the Ethernet Interface
This section describes how to configure the description, cable type, duplex mode, rate, and auto-
negotiation an Ethernet interface, and switch between the optical and electrical interfaces.
1.4 Configuring Advanced Attributes of an Ethernet Interface
This section describes how to configure the loopback on the Ethernet Interface, port group,
maximum frame size, flow control, flow control auto-negotiation, cable test, loopback test, and
port isolation.
1.5 Maintaining Ethernet Interfaces
This section describes how to maintain Ethernet interfaces.
1.6 Configuration Examples
This section provides several configuration examples of Ethernet interfaces.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 1 Ethernet Interface Configuration
1
1.1 Introduction to Ethernet Interfaces
This section describes the Ethernet interfaces.
The Ethernet is flexible, simple, and easy to implement; therefore, it becomes an important local
area network (LAN) networking technology.
Ethernet interfaces are classified into Ethernet electrical interfaces and Ethernet optical
interfaces.
Table 1-1 shows the attributes of Ethernet electrical interfaces and Ethernet optical interfaces.
Table 1-1 Attributes of Ethernet interfaces
Interface
Type
Rate (Mbit/
s)
Auto-negotiation Non-negotiation
Full
Duplex
Half
Duplex
Full
Duplex
Half
Duplex
Ethernet
electrical
interface
10 Yes Yes Yes Yes
100 Yes Yes Yes Yes
1000 Yes No Yes No
Ethernet
optical
interface
100 No No Yes No
1000 Yes No Yes No

If the local interface works in auto-negotiation mode, the peer interface must also work in auto-
negotiation mode; otherwise, packet loss may occur.
1.2 Ethernet Interface Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the Ethernet interface features supported by the S3700.
Port Group
The port group function enables you to configure multiple interfaces at the same time. You can
run commands in the port group view to configure all the interfaces in the group.
Auto-Negotiation
The auto-negotiation function allows interfaces on both ends of a link to select the same operating
parameters by exchanging capability information. Each interface sends its capability information
to the remote end and checks capabilities of the remote end. After both interfaces receive the
capability information from each other, they adopt the highest capability they support to
communicate with each other.
The interfaces negotiate the duplex mode, speed, and flow control parameters. After a successful
negotiation, the interfaces use the same duplex mode, speed, and flow control parameters.
2
Port Isolation
The port isolation function isolates Layer 2 and Layer 3 communication between ports in the
same VLAN. This function restricts packet transmission between ports flexibly, providing a
secure and flexible network solution.
1.3 Configuring Basic Attributes of the Ethernet Interface
This section describes how to configure the description, cable type, duplex mode, rate, and auto-
negotiation an Ethernet interface, and switch between the optical and electrical interfaces.
1.3.1 Establishing the Configuration Task
Applicable Environment
The configuration task is applicable to the following situations:
l You can configure the description of interfaces to facilitate the identification, maintenance,
and configuration of the interfaces.
l By default, an FE electrical interface automatically identifies the network cable type. If the
interface cannot identify the cable type properly, set the cable type for the interface
manually.
l By default, an FE electrical interface negotiates the duplex mode and rate with the
equipment that is directly connected to the interface. If the connected equipment does not
have the auto-negotiation capability, set the duplex mode and rate for the FE interface
manually so that the interface can work with the connected equipment.
Pre-configuration Tasks
None
Data Preparation
To configure the basic functions of Ethernet interfaces, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number of an Ethernet interface
2 (Optional) Description of an interface
3 (Optional) Cable type of an ethernet electrical interface
4 (Optional) Duplex mode of an ethernet electrical interface
5 (Optional) Rate of an ethernet interface

1.3.2 (Optional) Configuring a Description for an Interface
3
Context
Perform the following steps on the S3700.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The system view is displayed.
Step 2 Run:
interface interface-type interface-number
The interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
description description
A description is configured for the interface.
By default, the description of an interface is "HUAWEI, Quidway Series, X interface". X
specifies the interface type and number.
----End
1.3.3 (Optional) Configuring the Cable Type on an Interface
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The Ethernet electrical interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
mdi { across | auto | normal }
The cable type is configured for the Ethernet electrical interface.
By default, an Ethernet electrical interface automatically identifies the cable type.
An electrical interface can use a crossover cable or a straight through cable. If across is specified,
the interface can use a crossover cable; if normal is specified, the interface can use a straight
through cable; if auto is specified, the interface can use both types of network cables.
----End
4
1.3.4 (Optional) Setting the Duplex Mode
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to set the duplex mode of interfaces.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The Ethernet electrical interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
undo negotiation auto
The auto-negotiation mode is disabled on the Ethernet electrical interface.
Step 4 Run:
duplex { full | half }
The duplex mode is set for the Ethernet electrical interface.
By default, the duplex mode of an Ethernet electrical interface is full-duplex when auto-
negotiation is disabled on the interface.
----End
1.3.5 (Optional) Setting the Rate of an Interface
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to set the rate of interfaces.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
undo negotiation auto
The auto-negotiation mode is disabled on the interface.
5
Step 4 Run:
speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 }
The rate is set for the interface.
By default, an Ethernet interface works at its maximum rate when auto-negotiation is disabled
on the interface.
----End
1.3.6 (Optional) Enabling Auto-Negotiation
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you want to enable auto-negotiation and on the switch
connected to this S3700.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
negotiation auto
Auto-negotiation is enabled on the interface.
By default, an interface works in auto-negotiation mode.
The local interface and peer interface must work in the same mode, that is, both in auto-
negotiation mode or not.
NOTE
100M optical interfaces do not support auto-negotiation.
----End
1.3.7 (Optional) Switching Between Optical and Electrical
Interfaces
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to switch between optical and electrical interfaces.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
6
system-view
Step 2 Run:
interface gigabitethernet interface-number
The GigabitEthernet interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
combo-port { auto | copper | fiber }
The interface is changed to an optical interface or an electrical interface.
By default, a combo port selects the working mode automatically.
----End
1.3.8 Checking the Configuration
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display interface [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ] command to display the
description, duplex mode, and rate of an Ethernet interface.
----End
1.4 Configuring Advanced Attributes of an Ethernet
Interface
This section describes how to configure the loopback on the Ethernet Interface, port group,
maximum frame size, flow control, flow control auto-negotiation, cable test, loopback test, and
port isolation.
The configuration task is applicable to the following situations:
l The S3700 provides the interface group function, which enables you to configure multiple
interfaces at the same time.
l If the traffic volume received on an interface of the S3700 may exceed the processing
capability of the interface and the directly connected interface supports traffic control,
enable the traffic control function on the interface. When the rate of received traffic reaches
the threshold, the interface sends a Pause frame (in full duplex mode) or sends a back
pressure signal (in half duplex mode) to notify the peer interface. If the peer interface
supports traffic control, it decreases the rate of at which it sends traffic so that the local
interface can properly process received traffic.
7
l Ports enabled with port isolation cannot communicate with each other so that ports on the
same VLAN can be isolated. Port isolation provides secure and flexible networking
schemes for customers.
None.
Data Preparation
To configure the advanced functions of Ethernet interfaces, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Interface number
2 (Optional) Maximum frame length allowed on the interface

1.4.2 (Optional) Configuring Loopback on the Ethernet Interface
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure the loopback.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
loopback internal
The loopback is configured on the Ethernet interface.
By default, loopback is not configured on an Ethernet interface.
----End
1.4.3 (Optional) Configuring the Interface Group
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure interface groups.
8
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
port-group port-group-name
The interface group view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
group-member interface-type interface-number
The Ethernet interface is added to the interface group.
----End
1.4.4 (Optional) Setting the Maximum Frame Length on the
Ethernet Interface
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to set the maximum frame length.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The Ethernet interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
jumboframe enable [ value ]
The maximum length of the frame is set on the Ethernet interface.
By default, the maximum frame length allowed by interfaces of the S3700EI and S3700SI is
1600 bytes, and the maximum frame length allowed by an interface of the S3700HI is 9216
bytes.
----End
1.4.5 (Optional) Enabling Flow Control
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to enable flow control.
9
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
flow-control
Flow control is enabled on the Ethernet interface.
By default, flow control is disabled on an Ethernet interface.
To implement flow control, you must enable this function on both the local interface and peer
interface.
----End
1.4.6 (Optional) Enabling Auto-Negotiation of Flow Control
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 whose interface needs to be configured with auto-negotiation of
flow control.
GE interfaces support auto-negotiation of flow control, but FE interfaces do not support this
function.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
interface gigabitethernet interface-number
The GE interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
flow-control negotiation
Auto-negotiation of flow control is enabled on the GE interface.
By default, auto-negotiation of flow control is disabled on a GE interface.
You also need to configure auto-negotiation of flow control on the peer interface.
----End
1.4.7 (Optional) Enabling Port Isolation
10
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to enable port isolation.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
port-isolate mode { l2 | all }
The port isolation mode is set.
By default, ports are isolated on Layer 2 but can communicate on Layer 3.
Step 3 Run:
Step 4 (Optional) Run:
am isolate interface-type interface-number [ to interface-number ]
The Ethernet interface is isolated from another interface unidirectionally.
NOTE
After interface A is isolated from interface B unidirectionally, packets sent by interface A cannot reach
interface B, whereas packets sent from interface B can reach interface A.
Step 5 Run:
port-isolate enable [ group group-id ]
Port isolation is enabled.
NOTE
Ports in a port isolation group are isolated from each other, and ports in different port isolation groups can
communicate with each other. If group-id is not specified, a port is added to port isolation group 1.
----End
1.4.8 (Optional) Performing a Cable Test on an Interface
Context
A cable test detects faults on the cable connected to an interface. If the cable is working properly,
the total length of the cable is displayed. If the cable cannot work properly, the distance between
the interface and the fault point is displayed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
11
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
virtual-cable-test
A cable test is performed on the interface.
NOTE
l The test result is only for reference.
l Running the virtual-cable-test command may affect services on the interface in a short period of time.
l Combo electrical interfaces support cable tests.
l Before performing a cable test, shut down the remote interface or remove the network cable from the
remote interface. Otherwise, signals from the remote interface may make the test result inaccurate.
----End
1.4.9 (Optional) Configuring a Loopback Test on an Interface
Context
Perform the following steps on the S3700 where a loopback test needs to be performed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
loopbacktest internal
A loopback test is configured on the interface.
By default, no loopback test is configured on an interface.
----End
Procedure
l Run the display port-group [ all | port-group-name ] command to check information about
a port group.
12
l Run the display interface [ interface-type [ interface-number ] ] command to check
information about auto-negotiation capability on an Ethernet interface.
l Run the display virtual-cable-test interface-type interface-number command to check the
cable test result on an Ethernet interface.
----End
1.5 Maintaining Ethernet Interfaces
This section describes how to maintain Ethernet interfaces.
1.5.1 Debugging Ethernet Interfaces
Context
CAUTION
Debugging affects the performance of the system. So, after debugging, run the undo debugging
all command to disable it immediately.
When an Ethernet interface or Eth-Trunk fault occurs, run the following debugging commands
in the user view to locate the fault.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the debugging l2if [ error | event | msg | updown ] command to enable the debugging of
link layer features.
----End
This section provides several configuration examples of Ethernet interfaces.
1.6.1 Example for Configuring Port Isolation
Networking Requirements
As shown in Figure 1-1, it is required that PC1 and PC2 cannot communicate with each other,
but they can communicate with PC3.
13
Figure 1-1 Networking diagram for configuring port isolation
Switch
PC1 PC2 PC3
Eth0/0/3 E
t
h
0
/
0
/
2
Eth0/0/1
10.10.10.1/24 10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.3/24

Configuration Roadmap
The configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. Enable port isolation on the ports connected to PC1 and PC2 respectively to prevent PC1
and PC2 from communicating with each other.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data:
l Number of the port connected to PC1
l Number of the port connected to PC2
l Port isolation mode: Layer 2 isolation and Layer 3 communication (default configuration)
l ID of the VLAN that the ports connected to PC1, PC2, and PC3 belong to (VLAN 1 by
default)
l Port isolation group that the ports connected to PC1 and PC2 belong to (group 1 by default)
Procedure
Step 1 Enable port isolation.
# Isolate ports on Layer 2 and allow them to communicate on Layer 3.
<Quidway> system-view
[Quidway] port-isolate mode l2
# Enable port isolation on Ethernet 0/0/1.
[Quidway] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port-isolate enable
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
# Enable port isolation on Ethernet 0/0/2.
14
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/2] port-isolate enable
Step 2 Verify the configuration.
PC1 and PC2 cannot ping each other.
PC1 and PC3 can ping each other.
PC2 and PC3 can ping each other.
----End
Configuration Files
Configuration file of the Switch
#
sysname Quidway
#
interface Ethernet0/0/1
port-isolate enable group 1
#
port-isolate enable group 1
#
#
return
15
2 Link Aggregation Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the concepts, configuration procedures, and configuration examples of
link aggregation.
2.1 Introduction to Link Aggregation
This section describes the concept of link aggregation.
2.2 Link Aggregation Supported by the S3700
This section describes link aggregation features supported by the S3700.
2.3 Configuring Link Aggregation in Manual Load Balancing Mode
This section describes how to configure link aggregation in manual load balancing mode.
2.4 Configuring Link Aggregation in Static LACP Mode
This section describes how to configure link aggregation in static LACP mode.
2.5 Configuring an E-Trunk
As an extension to the Link Aggregation Protocol (LACP) that implements link aggregation on
a single device, the Enhanced Trunk (E-Trunk) protocol implements link aggregation between
different devices. This improves link reliability between devices.
2.6 Maintaining Link Aggregation
This section describes how to clear the statistics of received and sent LACP packets, debug the
link aggregation group, and monitor the running status of the link aggregation group.
This section provides several configuration examples of link aggregation in manual load
balancing mode and in static LACP mode.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 2 Link Aggregation Configuration
16
2.1 Introduction to Link Aggregation
This section describes the concept of link aggregation.
Link aggregation refers to a method of bundling a group of physical interfaces into a logical
interface to increase bandwidth. It is also called multi-interface load sharing group or link
aggregation group. For details, refer to IEEE802.3ad.
By setting up a link aggregation group between two devices, you can obtain higher bandwidth
and reliability. Link aggregation provides redundancy protection for communication among
devices without upgrading the hardware.
2.2 Link Aggregation Supported by the S3700
This section describes link aggregation features supported by the S3700.
Manual Load Balancing Mode
In load balancing mode, you can manually add member interfaces to the link aggregation group.
All the interfaces configured with load balancing are in forwarding state. The S3700 can perform
load balancing based on destination MAC addresses, source MAC addresses, source MAC
address exclusive-or destination MAC address, source IP addresses, destination IP addresses,
source address exclusive-or destination IP address.
You must set up the Eth-Trunk and add an interface to the Eth-Trunk manually. The Link
Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is not used.
The manual load balancing mode is usually used when the peer device does not support LACP.
Static LACP Mode
The static LACP mode is a link aggregation mode in which the two parties negotiate aggregation
parameters by exchanging LACP packets. After the negotiation, the two parties determine the
active interface and the inactive interface. In static LACP mode, you need to create an Eth-Trunk
manually and add members to the Eth-Trunk. The active interfaces and inactive interfaces are
determined by LACP negotiation.
The static LACP mode is also called the M:N mode. In this mode, links can implement load
balancing and redundancy at the same time. In a link aggregation group, M links are active and
they forward data in load balancing mode. N links are inactive and they function as backup links.
The backup links do not forward data. When an active link fails, the backup link with the highest
priority replaces the failed link to forward data and its status changes to active.
In static LACP mode, some links function as backup links. In manual load balancing mode, all
member interfaces work in forwarding state to share the traffic. This is the main difference
between the two modes.
Link aggregation can also be implemented in dynamic LACP mode. In dynamic LACP mode,
LACP creates the Eth-Trunk and adds member interfaces automatically without human
intervention. This mode is easy for users, but is too flexible and hard for management; therefore,
the S3700 does not support dynamic LACP mode.
17
Active Interface and Inactive Interface
Active interfaces refer to the interfaces that are in active state and are responsible for forwarding
data. The interfaces that do not forward data and are in inactive state are called inactive interfaces.
According to the operation modes, active and inactive interfaces are classified as follows:
l Manual load balancing mode: Generally, all member interfaces are active interfaces unless
a fault occurs on these interfaces.
l Static LACP mode: The interfaces connected to M links are active interfaces that are
responsible for forwarding data; the interfaces connected to N links are inactive interfaces
that are used for redundancy backup.
Actor and Partner
In static LACP mode, the device in the link aggregation group with a higher LACP priority is
the Actor and the device with a lower LACP priority is the Partner.
If the two devices have the same LACP priority, the Actor is selected based on the MAC
addresses of the devices. The device with a smaller MAC address becomes the Actor.
Differentiating the Actor and the Partner is to keep the active interfaces of devices at both ends
consistent. If the devices at both ends select active interfaces according to the priority of their
own interfaces, the active interfaces may be different and the active links cannot be set up.
Therefore, the Actor is first determined. The Partner selects active interfaces according to the
priority of the interfaces of the Actor. Figure 2-1 shows the process of selecting active interfaces.
Figure 2-1 Determining the active links in static LACP mode
SwitchA SwitchB
SwitchB SwitchA
The Actor determines
the active link
Device with high
priority
Device with low
priority
Active interface selected by SwitchA
Active interface selected by SwitchB

2.3 Configuring Link Aggregation in Manual Load
Balancing Mode
This section describes how to configure link aggregation in manual load balancing mode.
18
When the bandwidth or the reliability of two devices should be increased and either of the two
devices does not support LACP, you should create an Eth-Trunk in manual load balancing mode
on Switches and add member interfaces to the Eth-Trunk to increase the bandwidth and improve
reliability of devices.
As shown in Figure 2-2, Eth-Trunks are created between SwitchA and SwitchB.
Figure 2-2 Networking diagram for configuring link aggregation in load balancing mode
SwitchA SwitchB
Eth-Trunk
Eth-Trunk 1 Eth-Trunk 1

Before configuring an Eth-Trunk in manual load balancing mode, complete the following tasks:
l Powering on the S3700
l Creating the Eth-Trunks
Data Preparation
To configure an Eth-Trunk in manual load balancing mode, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number of the Eth-Trunk in manual load balancing mode
2 Type and number of the member interface

2.3.2 Configuring the Eth-Trunk to Work in Manual Load Balancing
Mode
Context
NOTE
Check whether the Eth-Trunk contains member interfaces before you configure the operation mode of the
Eth-Trunk. If the Eth-Trunk contains member interfaces, the operation mode of the Eth-Trunk cannot be
changed. To delete member interfaces from the Eth-Trunk, run the undo eth-trunk command in the
interface view or run the undo trunkport interface-type interface-number command in the Eth-Trunk
view.
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure an Eth-Trunk in manual load balancing
mode.
19
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
interface eth-trunk trunk-id
The Eth-Trunk view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
mode manual load-balance
The operation mode of the Eth-Trunk is set to load balancing.
By default, an Eth-Trunk works in manual load balancing mode.
If the local device is configured with the Eth-Trunk in manual load balancing mode, you need
to configure the Eth-Trunk in manual load balancing mode on the peer device.
----End
2.3.3 Adding Member Interfaces to an Eth-Trunk
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure member interfaces of an Eth-Trunk.
Procedure
l Configuration in the Eth-Trunk interface view
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
The Eth-Trunk interface view is displayed.
3. Run:
trunkport interface-type { interface-number1 [ to interface-number2 ] }
&<1-8>
Member interfaces are added to the Eth-Trunk.
l Configuration in the member interface view
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
20
3. Run:
eth-trunk trunk-id
The interface is added to the Eth-Trunk.
When adding an interface to an Eth-Trunk, pay attention to the following points:
An Eth-Trunk contains a maximum of eight member interfaces.
A member interface cannot be configured with any service or static MAC address.
When adding an interface to an Eth-Trunk, ensure that the interface is a hybrid interface,
which is the default interface type.
An Eth-Trunk cannot be nested, that is, its member interfaces cannot be Eth-Trunk.
An Ethernet interface can be added to only one Eth-trunk interface. To add the Ethernet
interface to another Eth-trunk, delete the Ethernet interface from the current Eth-Trunk
first.
The member interfaces of an Eth-trunk must be of the same type. For example, the FE
interface and the GE interface cannot be added to the same Eth-trunk.
Ethernet interfaces on different LPUs can be added to the same Eth-Trunk.
The peer interface directly connected to the Eth-Trunk on the local end must also be
added to an Eth-Trunk; otherwise, the two ends cannot communicate.
When the rates of member interfaces are different, the interfaces with a smaller rate may
be congested, and packets may be lost.
After an interface is added to an Eth-Trunk, MAC address learning is performed by the
Eth-Trunk rather than the member interfaces.
----End
2.3.4 (Optional) Configuring the Load Balancing Mode
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where the Eth-Trunk load balancing mode needs to be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
load-balance { dst-ip | dst-mac | src-ip | src-mac | src-dst-ip | src-dst-mac }
The load balancing mode is configured for the Eth-Trunk.
The default load balancing mode of the S3700SI and S3700EI is src-dst-mac; the default load
balancing mode of the S3700HI is src-dst-ip.
21
The S3700 supports the following load balancing modes:
l dst-ip: load balancing based on the destination IP address. In this mode, the system obtains
the specified three bits from each of the destination IP address and the TCP or UDP port
number in outgoing packets to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation, and then selects the
outgoing interface from the Eth-Trunk table according to the calculation result.
l dst-mac: load balancing based on the destination MAC address. In this mode, the system
obtains the specified three bits from each of the destination MAC address, VLAN ID,
Ethernet type, and incoming interface information to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation,
and then selects the outgoing interface from the Eth-Trunk table according to the calculation
result.
l src-ip: load balancing based on the source IP address. In this mode, the system obtains the
specified three bits from each of the source IP address and the TCP or UDP port number in
incoming packets to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation, and then selects the outgoing
interface from the Eth-Trunk table according to the calculation result.
l src-mac: load balancing based on the source MAC address. In this mode, the system obtains
the specified three bits from each of the source MAC address, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, and
incoming interface information to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation, and then selects
the outgoing interface from the Eth-Trunk table according to the calculation result.
l src-dst-ip: load balancing based on the Exclusive-OR result of the source IP address and
destination IP address. In this mode, the system performs the Exclusive-OR calculation
between the Exclusive-OR results of the dip and dmac modes, and then selects the outgoing
l src-dst-mac: load balancing based on the Exclusive-OR result of the source MAC address
and destination MAC address. In this mode, the system obtains three bits from each of the
source MAC address, destination MAC address, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, and incoming
interface information to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation, and then selects the outgoing
Member interfaces of an Eth-Trunk perform per-flow load balancing. The local end and the
remote end can use different load balancing modes, and the load balancing mode on one end
does not affect load balancing on the other end.
----End
2.3.5 (Optional) Limiting the Number of Active Interfaces
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to limit the number of active interfaces.
Procedure
l Setting the upper threshold of the number of interfaces that determine bandwidth of the
Eth-Trunk
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
22
3. Run:
max bandwidth-affected-linknumber link-number
The maximum number of interfaces that determine bandwidth of the Eth-Trunk is set.
By default, the maximum number of interfaces that determine bandwidth of the Eth-
Trunk is 8.
NOTE
l The upper threshold the number of interfaces that determine bandwidth of the Eth-Trunk of the
local S3700 and that of the remote S3700 can be different. If the upper thresholds at two ends
are different, the smaller one is used.
l Setting the lower threshold of the number of active interfaces
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
3. Run:
least active-linknumber link-number
The lower threshold of the number of active interfaces is set.
By default, the lower threshold of the number of active interfaces is 1.
In manual load balancing mode, you can determine the minimum number of active
interfaces in the Eth-Trunk by setting the lower threshold. If the number of active interfaces
is smaller than the value in manual load balancing mode, the status the Eth-Trunk becomes
Down.
NOTE
l The lower threshold of the number of active interfaces of the local S3700 and that of the remote
S3700 can be different. If the lower thresholds at two ends are different, the larger one is used.
----End
2.3.6 (Optional) Configuring the Load Balancing Mode for
Unknown Unicast Traffic
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure the load balancing mode for unknown
unicast traffic.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
23
Step 2 Run:
unknown-unicast load-balance { dmac | smac | smacxordmac }
The load balancing mode for unknown unicast traffic is configured.
NOTE
The S3700HI does not support the unknown-unicast load-balance command.
----End
Procedure
l Run the display trunkmembership eth-trunk trunk-id command to display the member
interfaces of the Eth-Trunk.
l Run the display eth-trunk trunk-id command to display the load balancing status of the
Eth-Trunk.
----End
2.4 Configuring Link Aggregation in Static LACP Mode
This section describes how to configure link aggregation in static LACP mode.
To increase the bandwidth and improve the connection reliability, you can configure a link
aggregation group on two directly connected Switches. The requirements are as follows:
l The links between two devices can implement redundancy backup. When a fault occurs on
some links, the backup links replace the faulty ones to keep data transmission uninterrupted.
l The active links have the load balancing capability.
Figure 2-3 Typical networking of link aggregation in static LACP mode
SwitchB
Eth-Trunk 1
SwitchA
Eth-Trunk 1
Eth-Trunk
Active link
Standby link

Before configuring an Eth-Trunk in static LACP mode, complete the following tasks:
l Powering on the S3700
24
l Creating the Eth-Trunk
Data Preparation
To configure an Eth-Trunk in static LACP mode, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number of the Eth-Trunk
2 Type and number of the member interface
3 Maximum number of active interfaces

2.4.2 Configuring the Eth-Trunk to Work in Static LACP Mode
Context
NOTE
Check whether the Eth-Trunk contains member interfaces before you configure the operation mode of the
Eth-Trunk. If the Eth-Trunk contains member interfaces, the operation mode of the Eth-Trunk cannot be
changed. To delete member interfaces from the Eth-Trunk, run the undo eth-trunk command in the
interface view or run the undo trunkport interface-type interface-number command in the Eth-Trunk
view.
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure an Eth-Trunk of static LACP mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
bpdu enable
The Eth-Trunk member interfaces are configured to send received BPDUs to the CPU.
Step 4 Run:
mode lacp-static
The Eth-Trunk is configured to work in static LACP mode.
By default, an Eth-Trunk works in manual load balancing mode.
If the local device is configured with an Eth-Trunk of static LACP mode, you must configure
the Eth-Trunk of static LACP mode on the peer device.
----End
25
2.4.3 Adding Member Interfaces to an Eth-Trunk
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure member interfaces of an Eth-Trunk.
Procedure
l Configuration in the Eth-Trunk interface view
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
3. Run:
trunkport interface-type { interface-number1 [ to interface-number2 ] }
&<1-8>
Member interfaces are added to the Eth-Trunk.
l Configuration in the member interface view
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
3. Run:
eth-trunk trunk-id
The interface is added to the Eth-Trunk.
When adding an interface to an Eth-Trunk, pay attention to the following points:
An Eth-Trunk contains a maximum of eight member interfaces.
A member interface cannot be configured with any service or static MAC address.
When adding an interface to an Eth-Trunk, ensure that the interface is a hybrid interface,
which is the default interface type.
An Eth-Trunk cannot be nested, that is, its member interfaces cannot be Eth-Trunk.
An Ethernet interface can be added to only one Eth-Trunk interface. To add the Ethernet
interface to another Eth-Trunk, delete the Ethernet interface from the current Eth-Trunk
first.
The member interfaces of an Eth-Trunk must be of the same type. For example, the FE
interface and the GE interface cannot be added to the same Eth-Trunk.
Ethernet interfaces on different LPUs can be added to the same Eth-Trunk.
26
The peer interface directly connected to the Eth-Trunk on the local end must also be
added to an Eth-Trunk; otherwise, the two ends cannot communicate.
When the rates of member interfaces are different, the interfaces with a smaller rate may
be congested, and packets may be lost.
After an interface is added to an Eth-Trunk, MAC address learning is performed by the
Eth-Trunk rather than the member interfaces.
----End
2.4.4 (Optional) Configuring the Load Balancing Mode
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure the Eth-Trunk load balancing mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
load-balance { dst-ip | dst-mac | src-ip | src-mac | src-dst-ip | src-dst-mac }
The load balancing mode is configured for the Eth-Trunk.
The default load balancing mode of the S3700SI and S3700EI is src-dst-mac; the default load
balancing mode of the S3700HI is src-dst-ip.
The S3700 supports the following load balancing modes:
l dst-ip: load balancing based on the destination IP address. In this mode, the system obtains
the specified three bits from each of the destination IP address and the TCP or UDP port
number in outgoing packets to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation, and then selects the
outgoing interface from the Eth-Trunk table according to the calculation result.
l dst-mac: load balancing based on the destination MAC address. In this mode, the system
obtains the specified three bits from each of the destination MAC address, VLAN ID,
Ethernet type, and incoming interface information to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation,
and then selects the outgoing interface from the Eth-Trunk table according to the calculation
result.
l src-ip: load balancing based on the source IP address. In this mode, the system obtains the
specified three bits from each of the source IP address and the TCP or UDP port number in
incoming packets to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation, and then selects the outgoing
l src-mac: load balancing based on the source MAC address. In this mode, the system obtains
the specified three bits from each of the source MAC address, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, and
27
incoming interface information to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation, and then selects
the outgoing interface from the Eth-Trunk table according to the calculation result.
l src-dst-ip: load balancing based on the Exclusive-OR result of the source IP address and
destination IP address. In this mode, the system performs the Exclusive-OR calculation
between the Exclusive-OR results of the dip and dmac modes, and then selects the outgoing
l src-dst-mac: load balancing based on the Exclusive-OR result of the source MAC address
and destination MAC address. In this mode, the system obtains three bits from each of the
source MAC address, destination MAC address, VLAN ID, Ethernet type, and incoming
interface information to perform the Exclusive-OR calculation, and then selects the outgoing
Member interfaces of an Eth-Trunk perform per-flow load balancing. The local end and the
remote end can use different load balancing modes, and the load balancing mode on one end
does not affect load balancing on the other end.
----End
2.4.5 (Optional) Limiting the Number of Active Interfaces
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to limit the number of active interfaces.
Procedure
l Setting the upper threshold of the number of active interfaces
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
3. Run:
max active-linknumber link-number
The upper threshold of the number of active interfaces is set.
By default, the upper threshold of the number of active interfaces is 8.
In static LACP mode, you can limit the maximum number (M) of active interfaces in the
Eth-Trunk by setting the upper threshold. The other member interfaces function as backup.
If the upper threshold is not set, up to eight interfaces in the Eth-Trunk can be active.
NOTE
l The upper threshold of the number of active interfaces should not be smaller the lower threshold
for the number of active interfaces.
l The upper threshold of the number of active interfaces of the local S3700 and that of the remote
S3700 can be different. If the upper thresholds at two ends are different, the smaller one is used.
l Setting the lower threshold of the number of active interfaces
28
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
3. Run:
least active-linknumber link-number
The lower threshold of the number of active interfaces is set.
By default, the lower threshold of the number of active interfaces is 1.
In static LACP mode, you can determine the minimum number of active interfaces in the
Eth-Trunk by setting the lower threshold. If the number of active interfaces is smaller than
the value in static mode, the status of the Eth-Trunk becomes Down.
NOTE
l The lower threshold of the number of active interfaces should not be larger than the upper
threshold of the number of active interfaces.
l The lower threshold of the number of active interfaces of the local S3700 and that of the remote
S3700 can be different. If the lower thresholds at two ends are different, the larger one is used.
----End
2.4.6 (Optional) Setting the LACP Priority of the System
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to set the LACP priority of the system.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
lacp priority priority
The system LACP priority of the S3700 is set.
The smaller the LACP priority value of the system is, the higher the priority is. By default, the
LACP priority of the system is 32768.
The end of a smaller priority value functions as the Actor. If the two ends have the same priority,
the end with a smaller MAC address functions as the Actor.
----End
2.4.7 (Optional) Setting the LACP Priority of an Interface
29
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
lacp priority priority
The LACP priority of the interface is set.
By default, the interface LACP priority is 32768. A smaller priority value indicates a higher
LACP priority.
----End
2.4.8 (Optional) Enabling LACP Preemption and Setting the Delay
for LACP Preemption
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to enable LACP preemption mode and set the delay
for LACP preemption.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
lacp preempt enable
The LACP preemption function is enabled on the Eth-Trunk.
By default, the LACP preemption function is disabled.
NOTE
To ensure normal running of an Eth-Trunk, it is recommended that you enable or disable LACP preemption
on both ends of the Eth-Trunk.
30
Step 4 Run:
lacp preempt delay delay-time
The delay for LACP preemption on the Eth-Trunk is set.
By default, the delay for LACP preemption is 30 seconds.
Enabling the LACP preemption function ensures that the interface with the highest LACP
priority can be an active interface. For example, when an interface with the highest priority
becomes inactive due to a failure, and then recovers, the interface can become an active interface
if the LACP preemption function is enabled; if the LACP preemption function is disabled, the
interface cannot become an active interface again.
The delay for LACP preemption refers to the period in which an inactive interface of the Eth-
Trunk in static LACP mode waits before it becomes active.
----End
2.4.9 (Optional) Setting the Timeout Interval for Receiving LACP
Packets
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to set the timeout interval for receiving LACP
packets.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
lacp timeout { fast | slow }
The timeout for receiving LACP protocol packets the Eth-Trunk is set.
NOTE
l After the lacp timeout command is used, the local end informs the peer end of the timeout interval
through LACP packets. If the fast is selected, the interval for sending LACP packets is 1 second. If
the slow keyword is selected, the interval for sending LACP packets is 30 seconds.
l The timeout interval for receiving LACP packets is three times the interval for sending LACP packets.
That is, when the fast keyword is used, the timeout interval for receiving LACP packets is 3s; when
the slow keyword is used, the timeout interval for receiving LACP packets is 90s.
l You can select different keywords on the two ends. To facilitate the maintenance, however, it is
recommended that you select the same keyword on both ends.
----End
31
2.4.10 (Optional) Configuring the Load Balancing Mode for
Unknown Unicast Traffic
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure the load balancing mode for unknown
unicast traffic.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
unknown-unicast load-balance { dmac | smac | smacxordmac }
The load balancing mode for unknown unicast traffic is configured.
NOTE
The S3700HI does not support the unknown-unicast load-balance command.
----End
Procedure
l Run the display eth-trunk [ trunk-id [interface interface-type interface-number ] ]
command to display information about the Eth-Trunk and member interfaces.
----End
2.5 Configuring an E-Trunk
As an extension to the Link Aggregation Protocol (LACP) that implements link aggregation on
a single device, the Enhanced Trunk (E-Trunk) protocol implements link aggregation between
different devices. This improves link reliability between devices.
Before configuring an E-Trunk, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete
the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This will help
you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
As shown in Figure 2-4, the E-Trunk is used to protect the links between a CE and two PEs
when the CE is dual-homed to the two PEs. The CE is connected to PE1 and PE2 through a static
32
LACP Eth-Trunk respectively. The two Eth-Trunks form an E-Trunk to implement backup of
link aggregation groups between PE1 and PE2, enhancing the network reliability.
Figure 2-4 Networking diagram of the E-Trunk
PE1
PE2
CE
E
t
h
-
T
r
u
n
k

1
E
th
-
T
r
u
n
k

2
E-Trunk1 Network

NOTE
Only the S3700HI supports the E-Trunk function.
Before configuring an E-Trunk, complete the following tasks:
l Connecting physical links between devices correctly
l Configuring static LACP Eth-Trunk interfaces
Data Preparation
To configure an E-Trunk, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 LACP system ID and priority
2 ID and priority of the E-Trunk
3 Interface numbers and working modes of the Eth-Trunks
4 Local and peer IP addresses
5 Encrypted password
6 Interval for sending hello packets and time multiplier for detecting hello packets

2.5.2 Setting the LACP System ID and LACP Priority of an E-Trunk
In an E-Trunk, the two PEs must be configured with the same LACP system ID and priority so
that the CE considers the two PEs as one device.
33
Context
Do as follows on the member devices of the E-Trunk.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
lacp e-trunk system-id mac-address
The LACP system ID is set for the E-Trunk.
By default, the MAC address of Ethernet interface on the MPU is used as the LACP system ID
a device.
The master and backup devices in an E-Trunk must use the same LACP system ID.
Step 3 Run:
lacp e-trunk priority priority
The LACP priority of the E-Trunk member is set.
By default, the LACP priority of an E-Trunk is 32768.
The master and backup devices in an E-Trunk must use the same LACP priority.
----End
2.5.3 Creating an E-Trunk and Setting Its Priority
The E-Trunk priority determines whether a device in the E-Trunk is the master device or the
standby device.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
e-trunk e-trunk-id
An Eth-Trunk is created.
If the specified E-Trunk already exists, the E-Trunk view is displayed directly.
The member devices in an E-Trunk must be configured with the same E-Trunk ID.
At most 16 E-Trunks can be created on a device.
34
Step 3 Run:
priority priority
The priority of the E-Trunk is set.
The E-Trunk priority is applied to master/backup negotiation between two devices. The device
of higher priority is the master. A smaller priority value indicates a higher priority.
If the priorities of two devices are the same, the device with the smaller system ID is the master.
By default, the priority of an E-Trunk is 100.
----End
2.5.4 Configuring Local and Peer IP Addresses of an E-Trunk
E-Trunk packets are sent through the local IP address and port configured on the local device.
When changing the local IP address or peer IP address on a device, you must change the
corresponding address on the peer device. Otherwise, LACP packets are discarded.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
e-trunk e-trunk-id
The E-Trunk view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
peer-address peer-ip-address source-address source-ip-address
The local and peer IP addresses of the E-Trunk are configured.
The peer IP address of the local device is the local IP address of the peer device. For example,
an E-Trunk is set up between device A and device B. On device A, the peer IP address is 2.2.2.2
and the local IP address is 1.1.1.1. Then, on device B, the peer IP address is 1.1.1.1 and the local
IP address is 2.2.2.2.
----End
2.5.5 Binding an E-Trunk to a BFD Session
If the local device in an E-Trunk cannot detect whether the peer device is faulty by sending E-
Trunk packets, it can use the Bidirectional Fast Detection (BFD) protocol to detect faults on the
peer device. Each E-Trunk needs to be configured with a peer IP address. You can create a BFD
session to check whether the route to the peer is reachable. The E-Trunk can detect faults reported
by the BFD session and handles the faults quickly.
35
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
e-trunk e-trunk-id
Step 3 Run:
e-trunk track bfd-session session-id
The E-Trunk is bound to a BFD session.
BFD sessions are used to fast detect the fault of the control link between the two devices of the
E-Trunk.
----End
2.5.6 Adding an Eth-Trunk to an E-Trunk
After configuring an E-Trunk, you must add Eth-Trunks to the E-Trunk to implement link
aggregation between the two devices. In this manner, backup of aggregation groups is
implemented between devices and the network reliability is enhanced.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Only static LACP Eth-Trunks can be added to an E-Trunk.
Step 3 Run:
e-trunk e-trunk-id
The Eth-Trunk is added to an E-Trunk.
An Eth-Trunk can be added to only one E-Trunk.
On the two devices in an E-Trunk, the IDs of the Eth-Trunks added to the E-Trunk must be the
same. For example, if you add Eth-Trunk 1 and Eth-Trunk 2 to E-Trunk 1 on device A, you must
also add Eth-Trunk 1 and Eth-Trunk 2 to E-Trunk 1 on device B.
----End
36
2.5.7 (Optional) Configuring the Working Mode of an Eth-Trunk in
an E-Trunk
You can configure the working mode of an Eth-Trunk only after adding the Eth-Trunk to an E-
Trunk. The working mode of an Eth-Trunk can be automatic, forced master, or forced backup.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Only static LACP Eth-Trunks can be added to an E-Trunk.
Step 3 Run:
e-trunk mode { auto | force-master | force-backup }
The working mode of the Eth-Trunk in the E-Trunk is configured.
By default, an Eth-Trunk works in automatic mode in an E-Trunk.
The e-trunk mode command is valid only for an Eth-Trunk in an E-Trunk. When the Eth-Trunk
exits from the E-Trunk, the configuration is cancelled.
When the Eth-Trunk works in automatic mode, the master/backup status of the Eth-Trunk is
determined by the E-Trunk status of the local device and the fault information of the peer Eth-
Trunk.
l If the local E-Trunk is the master, the local Eth-Trunk works in master state.
l If the local E-Trunk is the backup and the peer Eth-Trunk is faulty, the local Eth-Trunk works
in master state. When the local Eth-Trunk receives the message informing that the peer Eth-
Trunk recovers, the local Eth-Trunk becomes the backup.
When the E-Trunk works properly, changing the interval for sending packets or timeout of hello
packets make the E-Trunk alternate between the master state and the backup state. Therefore, it
is recommended that you set the working mode of a member Eth-Trunk to forcible master/backup
before changing the interval for sending packets or the timeout of hello packets. After new
configurations take effect, you can restore the working mode to automatic.
----End
2.5.8 (Optional) Setting the Password
An encrypted password can be set to enhance the system security. The encrypted passwords set
on the two devices of an E-Trunk must be the same.
37
Context
You can encrypt the password in plain text or cipher text.
l When the password is encrypted in plain text, it can be displayed in the configuration file.
l When the password is encrypted in cipher text, it is displayed as unidentifiable characters.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
e-trunk e-trunk-id
Step 3 Run:
security-key { simple simple-key | cipher cipher-key }
The password for encrypting packets is configured.
CAUTION
If simple is selected, the password is saved in the configuration file in plain text. In this case,
users at a lower level can easily obtain the password by viewing the configuration file. This
brings security risks. Therefore, it is recommended that you select cipher to save the password
in cipher text.
----End
2.5.9 (Optional) Setting the Timeout of Hello Packets
If the backup device in an E-Trunk does not receive any hello packet from the peer device within
the timeout interval, it becomes the master device. The timeout interval here refers to the timeout
interval contained in the hello packets sent by the peer device rather than that set on the local
device.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
38
e-trunk e-trunk-id
Step 3 Run:
timer hello hello-times
The interval for sending Hello packets is set.
By default, the value of hello-times is 10. Since the unit is 100 ms, the interval for sending hello
packets is 1s.
Step 4 Run:
timer hold-on-failure multiplier multiplier
The time multiplier for detecting Hello packets is set.
The peer device checks the timeout interval contained in the received packet to check whether
the local device times out. If the peer device is the backup and does not receive hello packets
from the local device within the timeout interval, the peer device becomes the master.
Timeout interval = Interval for sending hello packets x Time multiplier. It is recommended that
you set the time multiplier to at least 3.
By default, the time multiplier for detecting hello packets is 20.
----End
2.5.10 (Optional) Setting the Revertive Switching Delay
After the revertive switching delay is set, the local Eth-Trunk must wait until the delay timer
times out to become the master again after it recovers from a fault. This delays the revertive
switching of the service traffic, ensuring uninterrupted forwarding of the service traffic.
Context
If an E-Trunk works with other services, after the master device recovers from a fault, the status
of the member Eth-Trunk on the master device may be restored before other services are restored.
If traffic is immediately switched back to the master device, service traffic will be interrupted.
After the revertive switching delay is set, the local Eth-Trunk becomes Up only after the delay
timer times out. Then the local device becomes the master again. This delays the revertive
switching of the service traffic, thus ensuring uninterrupted forwarding of the service traffic.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
e-trunk e-trunk-id
Step 3 Run:
39
timer revert delay delay-value
The revertive switching delay is set.
By default, the revertive switching delay of an E-Trunk is 120 seconds.
----End
After configuring an E-Trunk, you can view information about the E-Trunk, including its
priority, system ID, local IP address, peer IP address, revertive switching delay, master/backup
status, and cause of status change.
Procedure
l Run the display e-trunk e-trunk-id command to view information about the E-Trunk.
----End
2.6 Maintaining Link Aggregation
This section describes how to clear the statistics of received and sent LACP packets, debug the
link aggregation group, and monitor the running status of the link aggregation group.
2.6.1 Clearing Statistics of LACP Packets
Context
CAUTION
The statistics of LACP packets cannot be restored after you clear them. So, confirm the action
before you use the command.
Procedure
l Run the reset lacp statistics eth-trunk [ trunk-id ] command to clear statistics of received
and sent LACP packets.
----End
2.6.2 Debugging the Link Aggregation Group
40
Context
CAUTION
When a running fault occurs in the link aggregation group, run the following debugging
commands in the user view to check the debugging information, and locate and analyze the fault.
Procedure
l Run the debugging trunk error command to enable the debugging of Eth-Trunk errors.
l Run the debugging trunk event command to enable the debugging of Eth-Trunk events.
l Run the debugging trunk lacp-pdu command to enable the debugging of LACP packets.
l Run the debugging trunk lagmsg command to enable the debugging of LACP protocol
messages.
l Run the debugging trunk msg command to enable the debugging of Eth-Trunk messages.
l Run the debugging trunk state-machine command to enable the debugging of Eth-Trunk
status machine.
l Run the debugging trunk updown command to enable the debugging of Eth-Trunk Up
and Down messages.
l Run the debugging trunk command to enable the debugging of Eth-Trunk messages.
----End
2.6.3 Monitoring the Operation Status of the Link Aggregation
Group
Context
During the daily maintenance, you can run the following commands in any view to check the
operation status of the link aggregation group.
Procedure
l Run the display eth-trunk [ trunk-id [ interface interface-type interface-number ] ]
command to display the status of the link aggregation group.
l Run the display lacp statistics eth-trunk [ trunk-id [ interface interface-type interface-
number ] ] command to display the statistics of sent and received LACP packets.
----End
41
This section provides several configuration examples of link aggregation in manual load
balancing mode and in static LACP mode.
2.7.1 Example for Configuring Link Aggregation in Manual Load
Balancing Mode
As shown in Figure 2-5, the Switch is connected to the SwitchA through an Eth-Trunk. The
link between the Switch and SwitchA must ensure high reliability.
Figure 2-5 Networking diagram for configuring link aggregation in manual load balancing mode
Switch
Eth-Trunk 1
LAN Switch
GE0/0/1
VLAN 100-150
E
t
h
-
T
r
u
n
k
Eth-Trunk 1
GE0/0/3 GE0/0/4
GE0/0/2
VLAN 151-200
SwitchA
LAN Switch

1. Create an Eth-Trunk.
2. Add member interfaces to the Eth-Trunk.
42
Data Preparation
l Number of the Eth-Trunk
l Types and numbers of the member interfaces in the Eth-Trunk
Procedure
Step 1 Create an Eth-Trunk.
# Create Eth-Trunk 1.
[Quidway] sysname Switch
[Switch] interface eth-trunk 1
[Switch-Eth-Trunk1] quit
Step 2 Add member interfaces to the Eth-Trunk.
# Add Eth 0/0/3 to Eth-Trunk 1.
[Switch] interface ethernet 0/0/3
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/3] eth-trunk 1
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/3] quit
# Add Eth 0/0/4 to Eth-Trunk 1.
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/4] eth-trunk 1
Step 3 Configure Eth-Trunk 1.
# Configure Eth-Trunk 1 to allow packets of VLANs 100 to 200 to pass through.
[Switch] interface eth-trunk 1
[Switch-Eth-Trunk1] port link-type trunk
[Switch-Eth-Trunk1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 100 to 200
[Switch-Eth-Trunk1] quit
Run the display trunkmembership command in any view to check whether Eth-Trunk 1 is
created and whether member interfaces are added.
[Switch] display trunkmembership eth-trunk 1
Trunk ID: 1
used status: VALID
TYPE: ethernet
Working Mode : Normal
Number Of Ports in Trunk = 2
Number Of UP Ports in Trunk = 2
operate status: up
Interface Ethernet0/0/3, valid, operate up, weight=1,
Interface Ethernet0/0/4, valid, operate up, weight=1,
# Display the configuration of Eth-Trunk 1.
[Switch] display eth-trunk 1
Eth-Trunk1's state information is:
WorkingMode: NORMAL Hash arithmetic: According to SA-XOR-DA
Least Active-linknumber: 1 Max Bandwidth-affected-linknumber: 8
Operate status: up Number Of Up Port In Trunk: 2
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PortName Status Weight
43
Ethernet0/0/3 Up 1
Ethernet0/0/4 Up 1
The preceding information indicates that Eth-Trunk 1 consists of member interfaces Eth 0/0/3
and Eth 0/0/4. The member interfaces are both in Up state.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Switch
#
interface Eth-Trunk1
port link-type trunk
port trunk allow-pass vlan 100 to 200
#
eth-trunk 1
#
eth-trunk 1
#
return
2.7.2 Example for Configuring Link Aggregation in Static LACP
Mode
To improve the bandwidth and the connection reliability, configure the link aggregation group
on two directly connected Switches, as shown in Figure 2-6. The requirements are as follows:
l M active links can implement load balancing.
l N links between two Switches can carry out redundancy backup. When a fault occurs on
an active link, the backup link replaces the faulty link to keep the reliability of data
transmission.
Figure 2-6 Networking diagram for configuring link aggregation in static LACP mode
SwitchB
Eth-Trunk 1
SwitchA
Eth-Trunk 1
Eth-Trunk
Active link
Backup link
Eth 0/0/1
Eth 0/0/2
Eth 0/0/3
Eth 0/0/2
Eth 0/0/1
Eth 0/0/3

1. Create an Eth-Trunk on the Switch and configure the Eth-Trunk to work in static LACP
mode.
44
2. Add member interfaces to the Eth-Trunk.
3. Set the system priority and determine the Actor.
4. Set the upper threshold of the active interfaces.
5. Set the priority of the interface and determine the active link.
Data Preparation
l Numbers of the link aggregation groups on the Switches
l System priority of SwitchA
l Upper threshold of active interfaces
l LACP priority of the active interface
Procedure
Step 1 Create Eth-Trunk 1 and set the load balancing mode of the Eth-Trunk to static LACP mode.
# Configure SwitchA.
[Quidway] sysname SwitchA
[SwitchA] interface eth-trunk 1
[SwitchA-Eth-Trunk1] bpdu enable
[SwitchA-Eth-Trunk1] mode lacp-static
[SwitchA-Eth-Trunk1] quit
# Configure SwitchB.
[Quidway] sysname SwitchB
[SwitchB] interface eth-trunk 1
[SwitchB-Eth-Trunk1] bpdu enable
[SwitchB-Eth-Trunk1] mode lacp-static
[SwitchB-Eth-Trunk1] quit
Step 2 Add member interfaces to the Eth-Trunk.
# Configure SwitchA.
[SwitchA] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] eth-trunk 1
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
# Configure SwitchB.
[SwitchB] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] eth-trunk 1
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
45
Step 3 Set the system priority on SwitchA to 100 so that SwitchA becomes the Actor.
[SwitchA] lacp priority 100
Step 4 Set the upper threshold M of active interfaces on SwitchA to 2.
[SwitchA] interface eth-trunk 1
[SwitchA-Eth-Trunk1] max active-linknumber 2
[SwitchA-Eth-Trunk1] quit
Step 5 Set the priority of the interface and determine active links on SwitchA.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] lacp priority 100
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] lacp priority 100
# Check information about the Eth-Trunk of the Switches and check whether the negotiation is
successful on the link.
[SwitchA] display eth-trunk 1
Local:
LAG ID: 1 WorkingMode: STATIC
Preempt Delay: Disabled Hash arithmetic: According to SA-XOR-DA
System Priority: 100 System ID: 00e0-fca8-0417
Least Active-linknumber: 1 Max Active-linknumber: 2
Operate status: Up Number Of Up Port In Trunk: 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ActorPortName Status PortType PortPri PortNo PortKey PortState
Weight
Ethernet0/0/1 Selected 100M 100 6145 2865 11111100
1
1
Ethernet0/0/3 Unselect 100M 32768 6147 2865 11100000
1
Partner:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PartnerPortName SysPri SystemID PortPri PortNo PortKey PortState
Ethernet0/0/1 32768 00e0-fca6-7f85 32768 6145 2609 11111100
Ethernet0/0/2 32768 00e0-fca6-7f85 32768 6146 2609 11111100
Ethernet0/0/3 32768 00e0-fca6-7f85 32768 6147 2609 11110000
[SwitchB] display eth-trunk 1
Local:
LAG ID: 1 WorkingMode: STATIC
Preempt Delay: Disabled Hash arithmetic: According to SA-XOR-DA
System Priority: 32768 System ID: 00e0-fca6-7f85
Least Active-linknumber: 1 Max Active-linknumber: 8
Operate status: Up Number Of Up Port In Trunk: 2
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ActorPortName Status PortType PortPri PortNo PortKey PortState
Weight
1
1
Ethernet0/0/3 Unselect 100M 32768 6147 2609 11100000
1
Partner:
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PartnerPortName SysPri SystemID PortPri PortNo PortKey
46
PortState
Ethernet0/0/1 100 00e0-fca8-0417 100 6145 2865
11111100
Ethernet0/0/2 100 00e0-fca8-0417 100 6146 2865
11111100
Ethernet0/0/3 100 00e0-fca8-0417 32768 6147 2865
11110000
The preceding information shows that the system priority of SwitchA is 100 and it is higher than
the system priority of SwitchB. Member interfaces Eth0/0/1 and Eth0/0/2 become the active
interfaces and are in Selected state. Interface Eth0/0/3 is in Unselect state. M active links work
in load balancing mode and N links are the backup links.
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of SwitchA
#
sysname SwitchA
#
lacp priority 100
#
mode lacp-static
max active-linknumber 2
#
eth-trunk 1
lacp priority 100
#
eth-trunk 1
lacp priority 100
#
eth-trunk 1
#
return
l Configuration file of SwitchB
#
sysname SwitchB
#
mode lacp-static
#
eth-trunk 1
#
eth-trunk 1
#
eth-trunk 1
#
return
47
3 VLAN Configuration
About This Chapter
Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) have advantages of broadcast domain isolation, security
enhancement, flexible networking, and good extensibility.
3.1 Introduction
The VLAN technology is important for forwarding on Layer 2 networks. This section describes
the background, functions, and advantages of the VLAN technology.
3.2 VLAN Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes VLAN features supported by the S3700 to help you understand VLAN
configurations.
3.3 Dividing a LAN into VLANs
A LAN can be divided into several VLANs and users in each VLAN can communicate with
each other. Currently, the S3700 supports several VLAN division modes. You can choose one
of them as required.
3.4 Creating a VLANIF Interface
VLANIF interfaces are Layer 3 logical interfaces. After creating VLANIF interfaces on Layer
2 devices, you can configure Layer 3 features on these interfaces.
3.5 Configuring Inter-VLAN Communication
Configuring inter-VLAN communication allows users in different VLANs to communicate with
each other. Currently, the S3700 supports several inter-VLAN communication schemes. Choose
one of them as required.
3.6 Configuring VLAN Aggregation to Save IP Addresses
VLAN aggregation prevents the waste of IP addresses and implements inter-VLAN
communication.
3.7 Configuring a MUX VLAN to Separate Layer 2 Traffic
Configuring a MUX VLAN allows users in different VLANs to communicate with each other,
and separates users in a certain VLAN.
3.8 Configuring a Voice VLAN to Transmit Voice Data
A voice VLAN is used to transmit voice data.
3.9 Configuring an mVLAN to Implement Integrated Management
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 3 VLAN Configuration
48
Configuring an mVLAN allows users to use the IP address of the VLANIF interface
corresponding to the mVLAN to log in to a management switch to manage devices attached to
the switch.
3.10 Maintaining VLAN
A command of clearing statistics helps to locate the faults in a VLAN.
This section provides several examples of VLAN configuration.
49
3.1 Introduction
The VLAN technology is important for forwarding on Layer 2 networks. This section describes
the background, functions, and advantages of the VLAN technology.
Overview of VLAN
The Ethernet technology is for sharing communication mediums and data based on the Carrier
Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect (CSMA/CD). If there are a large number of PCs on an
Ethernet network, collision becomes a serious problem and can lead to broadcast storms. As a
result, network performance deteriorates. This can even cause the Ethernet network to become
unavailable. Switches can be used to interconnect local area networks (LANs). Switches forward
information received by inbound ports to specified outbound ports, thereby preventing access
collision in a shared medium. If no specified outbound port is found for information received
by an inbound port, the switch will forward the information from all ports except the inbound
port. This forms a broadcast domain.
To prevent broadcast domains from being too broad and causing problems, you can divide a
network into segments. In this manner, a large broadcast domain is divided into multiple small
broadcast domains to confine the possible scope of broadcast packets. Routers can be deployed
at the network layer to separate broadcast domains, but this method has disadvantages, which
include: complex network planning, inflexible networking, and high levels of expenditure. The
Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) technology can divide a large Layer 2 network into
broadcast domains to prevent broadcast storms and protect network security.
Definition of VLAN
The VLAN technology is used to divide a physical LAN into multiple logical broadcast domains,
each of which is called a VLAN. Each VLAN contains a group of PCs that have the same
requirements. A VLAN has the same attributes as a LAN. PCs of a VLAN can be placed on
different LAN segments. If two PCs are located on one LAN segment but belong to different
VLANs, they do not broadcast packets to each other. With VLAN, the broadcast traffic volume
is reduced; fewer devices are required; network management is simplified; and network security
is improved.
Figure 3-1 shows a typical VLAN application. Three switches are placed in different locations,
for example, different stories of an office building. The VLAN technology allows enterprises to
share LAN facilities and ensures information security for each enterprise network.
50
Figure 3-1 Schematic diagram for a typical VLAN application
VLAN-A
VLAN-B
VLAN-C
Router
Switch1 Switch2 Switch3

This application shows the following VLAN advantages:
l Broadcast domains are confined. A broadcast domain is confined to a VLAN. This saves
bandwidth and improves network processing capabilities.
l Network security is enhanced. Packets from different VLANs are separately transmitted.
PCs in one VLAN cannot directly communicate with PCs in another VLAN.
l Network robustness is improved. A fault in a VLAN does not affect PCs in other VLANs.
l Virtual groups are set up flexibly. With the VLAN technology, PCs in different
geographical areas can be grouped together. This facilitates network construction and
maintenance.
Basic VLAN Concepts and Principles
l 802.1Q and VLAN frame format
A conventional Ethernet frame is encapsulated with the Length/Type field for an upper-
layer protocol following the Destination address and Source address fields, as shown in
Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2 Conventional Ethernet frame format
2bytes 6bytes 6bytes 46-1500bytes 4bytes
Destination
address
Source
address
Length/Type
Data FCS

IEEE 802.1Q is an Ethernet networking standard for a specified Ethernet frame format. It
adds a 32-bit field between the Source address and the Length/Type fields of the original
frame, as shown in Figure 3-3.
51
Figure 3-3 802.1Q frame format
2bytes 3bits 12bits 1bit
4bytes 2bytes
802.1Q
Tag
Data FCS
TPID PRI CFI VID
6bytes 6bytes 42-1500bytes 4bytes
Destination
address
Source
address
Length/
Type

Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID): a 16-bit field set to a value of 0x8100 in order to identify
the frame as an IEEE 802.1Q-tagged frame. If an 802.1Q-incapable device receives an
802.1Q frame, it will discard the frame.
Priority (PRI): a 3-bit field which indicates the frame priority. The value ranges from 0
to 7. The greater the value, the higher the priority. These values can be used to prioritize
different classes of traffic to ensure that frames with high priorities are transmitted first
when traffic is heavy.
Canonical Format Indicator (CFI): a 1-bit field. If the value of this field is 1, the MAC
address is in the non-canonical format. If the value is 0, the MAC address is in the
canonical format. CFI is used to ensure compatibility between Ethernet networks and
Token Ring networks. It is always set to zero for Ethernet switches.
VLAN Identifier (VID): a 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs.
On the S3700, VLAN IDs range from 0 to 4095. The values 0 and 4095 are reserved,
and therefore VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4094.
Each frame sent by an 802.1Q-capable switch carries a VLAN ID. On a VLAN, Ethernet
frames are classified into the following types:
Tagged frames: frames with 32-bits 802.1Q tags.
Untagged frames: frames without 32-bits 802.1Q tags.
l VLAN division methods
Table 3-1 shows VLAN division methods.
Table 3-1 VLAN division methods
VLAN
Division
Method
Definition
Port-based
VLAN division
VLANs are configured based on ports on a switch. For example, ports
1 to 4 on a switch are added to VLAN 2; ports 5 to 8 are added to
VLAN 3.
Ports on different Ethernet switches can be added to one VLAN. For
example, ports 1 to 4 on switch A and ports 3 to 6 on switch B can
be added to the same VLAN.
Each switch maintains a VLAN mapping table that records mappings
between local ports and VLANs.
52
VLAN
Division
Method
Definition
MAC address-
based VLAN
division
PCs are added to VLANs based on their MAC addresses.
A switch maintains a VLAN mapping table that records mappings
between MAC addresses and VLANs.
IP subnet-based
VLAN division
VLANs are configured based on IP addresses of PCs. PCs belonging
to one IP subnet are added to the same VLAN.
between IP subnets and VLANs.
Protocol-based
VLAN division
VLANs are configured based on the Length/Type fields in Layer 2
frames. Currently, IPv4, IPv6, IPX, or AppleTalk can be specified in
the Length/Type field of a Layer 2 frame to indicate the running
network protocol.
between protocols and VLANs.
Policy-based
VLAN division
PCs are added to VLANs based on their MAC and IP addresses.
between MAC addresses, IP addresses, interfaces, and VLANs.

l Type of VLAN links
Figure 3-4 Schematic diagram for VLAN links
Trunk link
CE1 CE2
PC3
VLAN3 VLAN3
PC4
PC1
VLAN2 VLAN2
PC2
3
2
3
2
2
3
Access link
Access link
Trunk link
PE

As shown in Figure 3-4, there are the following types of VLAN links:
53
Access link: connects a PC to a switch. Generally, a PC does not know which VLAN
it belongs to, and PC hardware cannot distinguish frames with VLAN tags. Therefore,
PCs send and receive only untagged frames.
Trunk link: connects a switch to another switch or to a router. Data of different VLANs
are transmitted along a trunk link. The two ends of a trunk link must be able to distinguish
frames with VLAN tags. Therefore, only tagged frames are transmitted along trunk
links.
l Port types
Table 3-2 lists VLAN port types.
Table 3-2 Port types
Port
Type
Method of
Processing
Received
Untagged Frames
Method of
Processing
Received
Tagged
Frames
Method of
Sending
Frames
Application
Access
port
Accepts an untagged
frame and adds a tag
with the default
VLAN ID to the
frame.
l Accepts a
tagged
frame if the
VLAN ID
carried in
the frame is
the same as
the default
VLAN ID.
l Discards a
tagged
frame if the
VLAN ID
carried in
the frame is
different
from the
default
VLAN ID.
Removes the tag
from a frame and
sends the frame.
An access port
connects a
switch to a PC
and can be
added to only
one VLAN.
54
Port
Type
Method of
Processing
Received
Untagged Frames
Method of
Processing
Received
Tagged
Frames
Method of
Sending
Frames
Application
Trunk
port
l Adds a tag with
the default
VLAN ID to an
untagged frame
and accepts the
frame if the port
permits the
default VLAN
ID.
l Adds a tag with
the default
VLAN ID to an
untagged frame
and discards the
frame if the port
denies the default
VLAN ID.
l Accepts a
tagged
frame if the
port permits
the VLAN
ID carried in
the frame.
l Discards a
tagged
frame if the
port denies
the VLAN
ID carried in
the frame.
l Removes the
tag from a
received
frame and
sends the
frame if the
VLAN ID
carried in the
frame is the
same as the
default
VLAN ID
and
permitted by
the port.
l Directly
sends a
received
frame if the
VLAN ID
carried in the
frame is
different
from the
default
VLAN ID
but permitted
by the port.
A trunk port
can be added to
multiple
VLANs to send
and receive
frames for these
VLANs. A
trunk port
connects a
switch to
another switch
or to a router.
Hybrid
port
Sends a received
frame if the port
permits the
VLAN ID
carried in the
frame. A
specified
command can be
used to
determine
whether a hybrid
port sends
frames with or
without tags.
A hybrid port
can be added to
multiple
VLANs to send
and receive
frames for these
VLANs. A
hybrid port can
connect a
switch to a PC
or connect a
network device
to another
network
device.
55
Port
Type
Method of
Processing
Received
Untagged Frames
Method of
Processing
Received
Tagged
Frames
Method of
Sending
Frames
Application
QinQ
port
QinQ ports are enabled with the IEEE 802.1QinQ protocol. A QinQ port adds
a tag to a single-tagged frame, and thus supports a maximum of 4094 x 4094
VLAN tags, which meets the requirement of a Networkfor the number of
VLANs.

Each access, trunk, hybrid, or QinQ port can be configured with a default VLAN, namely,
the port default VLAN ID (PVID) to specify the VLAN to which the port belongs.
The PVID of an access port indicates the VLAN to which the port belongs.
As a trunk or hybrid port can be added to multiple VLANs, the port must be configured
with PVIDs.
By default, a port is added to VLAN 1.
l Principle for data switching in a VLAN
Use the network shown in Figure 3-4 as an example. If PC 1 in VLAN 2 intends to send
data to PC 2, the data is forwarded as follows:
1. An access port on CE 1 receives an untagged frame from PC 1 and adds a PVID
(VLAN 2) to the frame. CE 1 searches the MAC address table for an outbound port.
Then the frame is transmitted from the outbound port.
NOTE
Assume that VLANs are configured based on MAC addresses. After an access port on CE 1
receives an untagged frame from PC 1, the port checks the VLAN mapping table for a VLAN
ID corresponding to the source MAC address, and adds a tag with the obtained VLAN ID to
the frame.
2. After the trunk port on CE 1 and PE receives the frame, the port checks whether the
VLAN ID carried in the frame is the same as that configured on the port. If the VLAN
ID has been configured on the port, the port transparently transmits the frame to CE
2. If the VLAN ID is not configured on the port, the port discards the frame.
3. After a trunk port on CE 2 receives the frame, the system searches the MAC address
table for an outbound port which connects CE 2 to PC 2.
4. After the frame is sent to the access port connecting CE 2 to PC 2, the port checks that
the VLAN ID carried in the frame is the same as that configured on the port. The port
then removes the tag from the frame and sends the untagged frame to PC 2.
l VLANIF interface
A VLANIF interface is a Layer 3 logical interface, which can be configured on either a
Layer 3 switch or a router.
Layer 3 switching combines routing and switching techniques to implement routing on a
switch, thus improving the overall network performance. After sending the first data flow,
a Layer 3 switch generates mappings between MAC addresses and IP addresses. To send
the same data flow, the switch directly sends the data flow at Layer 2 but not Layer 3 based
on this mapping table.
56
To allow that new data flows are correctly forwarded based on the routing table, be sure
that the routing table's routing entries are correct. Therefore, VLANIF interfaces and
routing protocols must be configured on Layer 3 switches for reachable Layer 3 routes.
NOTE
Key points are summarized as follows:
l A PC does not need to know the VLAN to which it belongs. It sends only untagged frames.
l After receiving an untagged frame from a PC, a switching device determines the VLAN to which
the frame belongs. The determination is based on the configured VLAN division method such as port
information, and then the switching device processes the frame accordingly.
l If the frame needs to be forwarded to another switching device, the frame must be transparently
transmitted along a trunk link. Frames transmitted along trunk links must carry VLAN tags to allow
other switching devices to properly forward the frame based on the VLAN information.
l Before sending the frame to the destination PC, the switching device connected to the destination PC
removes the VLAN tag from the frame to ensure that the PC receives an untagged frame.
Generally, only tagged frames are transmitted on trunk links; only untagged frames are transmitted on
access links. In this manner, switching devices on the network can properly process VLAN information
and PCs are not concerned about VLAN information.
3.2 VLAN Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes VLAN features supported by the S3700 to help you understand VLAN
configurations.
The VLAN technology helps set up virtual groups to separate broadcast domains and implements
both intra-VLAN and inter-VLAN communication.
1. After VLANs are configured, users in a VLAN can communicate with each other.
2. In addition to intra-VLAN communication, users in different VLANs need to communicate
with each other sometimes.
NOTE
Intra-VLAN communication and inter-VLAN communication are basic VLAN functions.
3. The following VLAN features are also supported to meet requirements of special
applications and extended functions:
l VLAN aggregation: prevents the waste of IP addresses and implements inter-VLAN
communication.
l MUX VLAN: provides a mechanism to isolate Layer 2 traffic between interfaces in a
VLAN.
l Voice VLAN: select voice data packets from various packets and changes the priority
of voice data packets to improve the voice data transmission quality.
l Management VLAN (mVLAN): helps implement integrated management by using a
remote device. A user can use the IP address of the VLANIF interface corresponding
to the mVLAN to telnet to a management switch.
VLAN Assignment
VLAN assignment is a basic VLAN configuration. After VLANs are configured, users in a
VLAN can communicate with each other. VLANs are configured in different manners, as shown
in Table 3-3.
57
Table 3-3 VLAN assignment in different usage scenarios
VLAN
Assignment
Method
Advantage Disadvantage Usage Scenario
Port-based
VLAN
assignment
The configuration is
simple. It is the most
common VLAN
assignment method.
not flexible. If a port
needs to transmit
frames of another
VLAN, the port must
be deleted from the
original VLAN and
added to the new
VLAN. For a network
having a large number
of traveling users, the
network administrator
needs to spend more
time on maintenance.
Port-based VLAN
assignment is applicable
to large-scale networks
that do not have high
security requirements.
MAC address-
based VLAN
assignment
If a user travels from
one place to another,
the user does not need
to be added to a new
VLAN. This improves
security and flexibility
for terminal users.
A network
administrator needs to
configure a switch
with a MAC address
associated with a
specific VLAN. For a
network with a large
number of terminals,
configuration will take
the network
administrator a lot of
work before VLAN-
based communication
can be enabled.
MAC address-based
VLAN assignment is
applicable to networks
that have high security
requirements and many
traveling users.
IP subnet-
based VLAN
assignment
IP subnet-based and
protocol-based VLAN
assignment are both
called network layer-
based VLAN
assignment.
Network layer-based
VLAN assignment
greatly reduces the
workload of manual
configurations and
allows users to easily
join a VLAN, move
from one VLAN to
another VLAN, or
leave a VLAN.
Switches need to parse
the source IP addresses
of packets and convert
them into MAC
addresses. This slows
down the response of
switches.
IP subnet-based VLAN
to networks that have
traveling users and
require simple
management.
Protocol-
based VLAN
assignment
Switches need to
analyze protocol
address formats and
convert between them.
This slows down the
response of switches.
Currently, VLANs can
be configured based on
AppleTalk, IPv4, IPv6,
or IPX.
58
VLAN
Assignment
Method
Policies-based
VLAN
assignment
MAC and IP
addresses-based or
MAC addresses, IP
addresses and
interfaces-based
VLAN assignment is
of high security. This
VLAN assignment
method does not allow
users to change MAC
addresses or IP
addresses based on
which VLANs are
configured.
Compared with other
VLAN assignment
methods, policies-
based VLAN
assignment has the
highest priority.
Each policy needs to
be manually
configured.
Policies-based VLAN
to small-scale networks
that have strict security
requirements and a large
number of traveling
users.

NOTE
Only the S3700HI supports policy-based VLAN assignment.
Inter-VLAN Communication
After VLANs are configured, users in a VLAN can communicate with each other. Users in
different VLANs cannot directly communicate with each other. Table 3-4 lists schemes for inter-
VLAN communication.
59
Table 3-4 Schemes for inter-VLAN communication
Inter-VLAN
Communica
tion Scheme
VLANIF
interface
After VLANIF
interfaces are
configured, users in
different VLANs and
network segments can
communicate with
each other as long as
routes are reachable.
Inter-VLAN
communication can
also be implemented by
Layer 3 switches if
This scheme boasts of
low operating costs.
If multiple users on a
network belong to
different VLANs, each
VLAN requires a
VLANIF interface.
Each VLANIF interface
needs to be assigned an
IP address. This
increases configuration
workload and uses a lot
of IP addresses.
This scheme is
applicable to small-
scale networks on
which users belong to
different network
segments and IP
addresses of these
users are seldom
changed.
If a large number of
VLANs are configured
and both Layer 2 and
Layer 3 forwarding of
packets are required,
use VLANIF
interfaces.

VLAN Aggregation
To implement inter-VLAN communication on switches, configure IP addresses for the VLANIF
interfaces. When many VLANs are deployed, a great number of IP addresses are occupied.
VLAN aggregation can solve the problem of occupation of excessive IP addresses.
VLAN aggregation means that multiple VLANs are aggregated into a super-VLAN. The VLANs
that form the super-VLAN is called sub-VLANs.
You can create a VLANIF interface for a super-VLAN. Then, you can configure an IP address
only for this interface rather than for each sub-VLAN. All sub-VLANs share the same IP network
segment, which optimizes the use of IP addresses.
MUX VLAN
A MUX VLAN is used to isolate Layer 2 traffic between interfaces in a VLAN. For example,
on an intranet, a user interface can communicate with a server interface, but the user interfaces
cannot communicate with each other.
In MUX VLAN implementation, VLANs are classified in to MUX VLANs and subordinate
VLANs. Subordinate VLANs are classified into subordinate group VLANs and subordinate
separate VLANs.
The MUX VLAN can communicate with the subordinate VLANs, but the subordinate VLANs
cannot communicate with each. Interfaces in a subordinate group VLAN can communicate with
each other, but interfaces in a subordinate separate VLAN cannot communicate with each other.
You can implement inter-device MUX VLAN by configuring the same MUX VLAN on multiple
devices and configuring interfaces between the devices to allow packets of the MUX VLAN.
Implementation of inter-device MUX VLAN is the same as the implementation of MUX VLAN
on a single device.
60
3.3 Dividing a LAN into VLANs
A LAN can be divided into several VLANs and users in each VLAN can communicate with
each other. Currently, the S3700 supports several VLAN division modes. You can choose one
of them as required.
Before dividing a LAN into VLANs, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the configuration. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Currently, the S3700 supports the following VLAN division modes. You can choose one of them
as required. Table 3-5 lists VLAN division modes.
Table 3-5 VLAN assignment in different usage scenarios
VLAN
Assignment
Method
Port-based
VLAN
assignment
simple. It is the most
common VLAN
assignment method.
not flexible. If a port
needs to transmit
frames of another
VLAN, the port must
be deleted from the
original VLAN and
added to the new
VLAN. For a network
having a large number
of traveling users, the
network administrator
needs to spend more
time on maintenance.
Port-based VLAN
to large-scale networks
that do not have high
security requirements.
61
VLAN
Assignment
Method
MAC address-
based VLAN
assignment
If a user travels from
one place to another,
the user does not need
to be added to a new
VLAN. This improves
security and flexibility
for terminal users.
A network
administrator needs to
configure a switch
with a MAC address
associated with a
specific VLAN. For a
network with a large
number of terminals,
configuration will take
the network
administrator a lot of
work before VLAN-
based communication
can be enabled.
MAC address-based
VLAN assignment is
applicable to networks
that have high security
requirements and many
traveling users.
IP subnet-
based VLAN
assignment
IP subnet-based and
protocol-based VLAN
assignment are both
called network layer-
based VLAN
assignment.
Network layer-based
VLAN assignment
greatly reduces the
workload of manual
configurations and
allows users to easily
join a VLAN, move
from one VLAN to
another VLAN, or
leave a VLAN.
Switches need to parse
the source IP addresses
of packets and convert
them into MAC
addresses. This slows
down the response of
switches.
IP subnet-based VLAN
to networks that have
traveling users and
require simple
management.
Protocol-
based VLAN
assignment
Switches need to
analyze protocol
address formats and
convert between them.
This slows down the
response of switches.
Currently, VLANs can
be configured based on
AppleTalk, IPv4, IPv6,
or IPX.
62
VLAN
Assignment
Method
Policies-based
VLAN
assignment
MAC and IP
addresses-based or
MAC addresses, IP
addresses and
interfaces-based
VLAN assignment is
of high security. This
VLAN assignment
method does not allow
users to change MAC
addresses or IP
addresses based on
which VLANs are
configured.
Compared with other
VLAN assignment
methods, policies-
based VLAN
assignment has the
highest priority.
Each policy needs to
be manually
configured.
Policies-based VLAN
to small-scale networks
that have strict security
requirements and a large
number of traveling
users.

NOTE
l The S3700SI and S3700EI do not support Policies-based VLAN assignment.
NOTE
In the case that the S3700 supports multiple VLAN division modes, the priorities of these VLAN division
modes are in descending order:
1. Policies-based VLAN division
This mode has the highest priority, but is not commonly used.
2. MAC address-based VLAN division and IP subnet-based VLAN division
By default, MAC address-based VLAN division is set as the preference. You can run commands to
change priorities of these two VLAN division modes.
3. Protocol-based VLAN division
4. Port-based VLAN division
Port-based VLAN division has the lowest priority, but is most commonly used.
Before dividing a LAN into VLANs, complete the following task:
l Connecting ports and configuring physical parameters of the ports, ensuring that the ports
are physically Up
Data Preparation
To dividing a LAN into VLANs, you need the following data.
63
No. Data
1 VLAN ID, number of each Ethernet port to be added to the VLAN, and (optional)
attribute of Ethernet ports
2 VLAN ID, MAC address mapped to the VLAN and (optional) 802.1p priority
value related to the MAC address
3 VLAN ID, (optional) IP subnet index, IP address mapped to the VLAN and
(optional) 802.1p priority value related to the IP address or network segment
4 VLAN ID, (optional) protocol template index, protocol type mapped to the
VLAN, and (optional) 802.1p priority value related to the protocol
5 VLAN ID, MAC address and IP address mapped to the VLAN and (optional)
number of the Ethernet port added to a VLAN based on its MAC and IP addresses

3.3.2 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on Ports
Dividing a LAN into VLANs based on ports is the most simple and effective VLAN division
mode.
Context
After VLANs are configured based on ports, the VLANs can process tagged and untagged frames
in the following manners:
l After receiving an untagged frame, a port adds the PVID to the frame, searches the MAC
address table for an outbound port, and sends the tagged frame from the outbound port.
l After a port receives a tagged frame, it checks the VLAN ID carried in the frame:
If the port allows frames with the specified VLAN ID to pass through, it forwards the
frame.
If the port does not allow frames with the specified VLAN ID to pass through, it discards
the frame.
1. Create VLANs.
2. Configure the port type and features.
(1) Configure the port type (access, trunk, hybrid, or QinQ).
3. Add ports to VLANs.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
64
A VLAN is created, and the VLAN view is displayed. If the specified VLAN has been created,
the VLAN view is directly displayed.
The VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4094. If VLANs need to be created in batches, run the vlan
batch { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> command to create VLANs in batches, and then run
the vlan vlan-id command to enter the view of a specified VLAN.
Step 3 Run:
quit
Step 4 Configure the port type and features.
1. Run the interface interface-type interface-number command to enter the view of an
Ethernet port to be added to the VLAN.
2. Run the port link-type { access | hybrid | trunk | dot1q-tunnel } command to configure
the port type.
By default, the port type is hybrid.
l If a Layer 2 Ethernet port is directly connected to a terminal, set the port type to access
or hybrid.
l If a Layer 2 Ethernet port is connected to another switch, the port type can be set to
access, trunk, hybrid, or QinQ.
Step 5 Add ports to the VLAN.
Run either of the following commands as needed:
l For access or QinQ ports:
Run the port default vlan vlan-id command to add a port to a specified VLAN.
To add ports to a VLAN in batches, run the port interface-type { interface-number1 [ to
interface-number2 ] } &<1-10> command in the VLAN view.
l For trunk ports:
Run the port trunk allow-pass vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
command to add the port to specified VLANs.
(Optional) Run the port trunk pvid vlan vlan-id command to specify the default VLAN
for a trunk interface.
l For hybrid ports:
Run either of the following commands to add a port to VLANs in untagged or tagged
mode:
Run the port hybrid untagged vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
command to add a port to VLANs in untagged mode.
In untagged mode, a port removes tags from frames and then forwards the frames.
This is applicable to scenarios in which Layer 2 Ethernet ports are connected to
terminals.
Run the port hybrid tagged vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
command to add a port to VLANs in tagged mode.
In tagged mode, a port forwards frames without removing their tags. This is applicable
to scenarios in which Layer 2 Ethernet ports are connected to switches.
(Optional) Run the port hybrid pvid vlan vlan-id command to specify the default VLAN
of a hybrid interface.
65
By default, all ports are added to VLAN 1.
----End
3.3.3 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on MAC Addresses
MAC address-based VLAN division is used if user locations do not need to be concerned. This
improves security and flexibility for terminal users.
Context
VLANs configured based on MAC addresses process only untagged frames, and treat tagged
frames in the same manner as VLANs configured based on ports.
After receiving an untagged frame, a port searches for a MAC-VLAN mapping based on the
source MAC address in the frame.
l If a mapping is found, the port forwards the frame based on the VLAN ID and priority
value in the mapping.
l If no matching mapping is found, the port matches the frame with other matching rules.
1. Create VLANs.
2. Map MAC addresses to VLAN IDs.
(1) Set the port type to hybrid.
(2) Configure a port to allow frames with specified VLAN IDs to pass through.
4. (Optional) Configure the highest priority for MAC address-based VLAN division.
NOTE
By default, MAC address-based VLAN division is set as the preference. To use IP subnet-based
VLAN division, set a higher priority for it.
5. Enable MAC address-based VLAN division.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
mac-vlan mac-address mac-address [ mac-address-mask | mac-address-mask-length ]
[ priority priority ]
66
Map a MAC address to the VLAN.
l The mac-address value is in the H-H-H format. H is a hexadecimal number that contains one
to four digits, such as 00e0 and fc01. If an H contains less than four digits, 0s are padded
ahead. For example, if you specify an H as e0, it is displayed as 00e0. A MAC address cannot
be set to all 0s or all Fs.
l The optional parameter priority specifies the 802.1p priority value related to the MAC
addresses. The value ranges from 0 to 7. The greater the value, the higher the priority. The
default value is 0. After the 802.1p priority value is specified, frames with high priorities are
first forwarded when traffic is congested.
Step 4 Run:
quit
1. Run the interface interface-type interface-number command to enter the view of the port
to be configured to allow frames with a specified VLAN ID to pass through.
2. Run the port link-type hybrid command to set the port type to hybrid.
3. Run the port hybrid untagged vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all } command
to configure the hybrid port to allow frames with a specified VLAN ID to pass through.
NOTE
If an interface of an S3700SI or S3700EI is added to a MAC address-based VLAN with a mask
specified, add this interface to its default VLAN.
Step 6 (Optional) Run the vlan precedence mac-vlan command to configure a higher priority for MAC
address-based VLAN division.
By default, MAC address-based VLAN division is set as the preference.
Step 7 Run:
mac-vlan enable
MAC address-based VLAN division is enabled.
By default, MAC address-based VLAN division is disabled.
NOTE
MAC address-based VLAN assignment conflict with MUX VLAN. They cannot be configured on the same
interface.
----End
3.3.4 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on IP Subnets
IP subnet-based and protocol-based VLAN division are called network layer-based VLAN
division, which reduces manual VLAN configuration workload and allows users to easily join
a VLAN, transfer from one VLAN to another, and exit from a VLAN. IP subnet-based VLAN
division is applicable to networks that have traveling users and require simple management.
67
Context
VLANs configured based on IP subnets process only untagged frames. and treat tagged frames
in the same manner as VLANs configured based on ports.
After receiving untagged frames, a device determines the VLANs to which the frames belong
based on their source IP addresses before sending them to corresponding VLANs.
1. Create VLANs.
2. Associate IP subnets with VLANs to determine mappings between subnets and VLANs.
(2) Configure a port to allow frames with the specified VLAN IDs to pass through.
4. (Optional) Set a higher priority for IP subnet-based VLAN division.
NOTE
By default, MAC address-based VLAN division is set as the preference. To use IP subnet-based
VLAN division, set a higher priority for it.
5. Enable IP subnet-based VLAN division.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
ip-subnet-vlan [ ip-subnet-index ] ip ip-address { mask | mask-length }
An IP subnet is associated with the VLAN.
l The optional parameter ip-subnet-index specifies the IP subnet index. The subnet index can
be specified by a user or automatically generated by the system.
l The parameter ip-address specifies the source IP address or network address based on which
a VLAN is configured. The value is in dotted decimal notation.
l The optional parameter priority specifies the 802.1p priority value related to the VLAN
configured based on the IP address or network address. The value ranges from 0 to 7. The
greater the value, the higher the priority. The default value is 0. After the 802.1p priority
value is specified, frames with high priorities are first forwarded when traffic is congested.
Step 4 Run:
68
quit
to be configured to allow frames with the specified VLAN ID to pass through.
to allow frames with the specified VLAN ID to pass through.
vlan precedence ip-subnet-vlan
IP subnet-based VLAN division is configured with a higher priority.
By default, MAC address-based VLAN division is set as the preference.
Step 7 Run:
ip-subnet-vlan enable
IP subnet-based VLAN division is enabled.
By default, IP subnet-based VLAN division is disabled.
----End
3.3.5 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on Protocols
IP subnet-based and protocol-based VLAN division are called network layer-based VLAN
division, which reduces manual VLAN configuration workload and allows users to easily join
a VLAN, transfer from one VLAN to another, and exit from a VLAN.
Context
VLANs configured based on protocols process only untagged frames. and treat tagged frames
in the same manner as VLANs configured based on ports.
After receiving an untagged frame, a port identifies the protocol template used by the frame to
determine the VLAN to which the frame belongs.
l If the port has been added to VLANs corresponding to some protocols, and the protocol
template adopted by the frame matches one of these protocols, the port adds the
corresponding VLAN ID to the frame.
l If the port has been added to VLANs corresponding to some protocols, but the protocol
template adopted by the frame does not match any one of these protocols, the port adds the
PVID to the frame.
1. Create VLANs.
2. Associate protocols with VLANs to determine mappings between protocols and VLANs.
69
(2) Configure a port to allow frames with the specified VLAN ID to pass through.
(3) Associate ports with VLANs.
After receiving a frame associated with a specified protocol, the system automatically
assigns the VLAN ID associated with the protocol to the frame.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
protocol-vlan [ protocol-index ] { at | ipv4 | ipv6 | ipx { ethernetii | llc | raw
| snap } | mode { ethernetii-etype etype-id1 | llc dsap dsap-id ssap ssap-id | snap-
etype etype-id2 } }
A protocol is associated with a VLAN and the protocol template is specified.
l The optional parameter protocol-index specifies the protocol template index.
The protocol template is determined by the protocol type and encapsulation format. A
protocol VLAN can be defined by a protocol template.
l When configuring the source and destination service access points, note the following points:
dsap-id and ssap-id cannot be both set to 0xaa.
dsap-id and ssap-id cannot be both set to 0xe0, which corresponds to the Logical Link
Control (LLC) encapsulation format for IPX packets.
dsap-id and ssap-id cannot be both set to 0xff, which corresponds to the RAW
encapsulation format for IPX packets.
to be configured to allow frames with the specified VLAN ID to pass through.
to allow frames with the specified VLAN ID to pass through.
4. Run:
protocol-vlan vlan vlan-id { all | protocol-index1 [ to protocol-index2 ] }
The port is associated with the VLAN.
l The parameter vlan-id specifies the ID of a VLAN configured based on a protocol.
70
l The optional parameter priority specifies the 802.1p priority value related to the
protocol. The value ranges from 0 to 7. The greater the value, the higher the priority.
The default value is 0. After the 802.1p priority value is specified, frames with high
priorities are first forwarded when traffic is congested.
----End
3.3.6 Dividing a LAN into VLANs Based on Policies
VLANs configured based on policies are also called policy VLANs. Policy VLANs allow
terminals to plug and play and data for different users to be separately transmitted.
Context
A LAN can be divided into VLANs based on MAC and IP addresses or based on MAC and IP
addresses and interfaces.
To divide a LAN into VLANs based on policies, configure MAC and IP addresses of terminals
on a switch and associate pairs of MAC addresses ,IP addresses and interfaces with VLANs.
Only users matching a policy can be added to a specified VLAN. If the IP or MAC addresses
of users added to a VLAN are changed, they will exit from the VLAN.
Policy VLANs process only untagged frames. and treat tagged frames in the same manner as
VLANs configured based on ports.
After receiving an untagged frame, the device finds a VLAN matching both MAC and IP
addresses of the frame, and transmits the frame in the VLAN.
1. Create VLANs.
2. Associate pairs of MAC and IP addresses with VLANs to divide a LAN into VLANs based
on both MAC and IP addresses.
(2) Configure a port to allow frames with specified MAC and IP addresses to pass through.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
71
policy-vlan mac-address mac-address ip ip-address [ interface interface-type
interface-number ] [ priority priority ]
Policy VLAN is configured.
If interface interface-type interface-number is not specified, the MAC and IP address policy
will be applied to all ports in the VLAN. If interface interface-type interface-number is
specified, the MAC and IP address policy will be applied to the specified port in the VLAN.
Before deleting a policy VLAN, run the undo policy-vlan command to disable the policy VLAN
function.
Step 4 Run:
quit
to be configured with a policy VLAN.
to allow frames with specified MAC and IP addresses to pass through.
----End
After dividing a LAN into VLANs, you can view information about VLANs configured in
different modes. For example, which VLANs are classified based on ports or MAC addresses.
Prerequisite
The configurations of VLAN division are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display vlan [ vlan-id [ verbose ] ] command to check information about all
VLANs or a specified VLAN.
l Run the display mac-vlan { mac-address { all | mac-address [ mac-address-mask | mac-
address-mask-length ] } | vlan vlan-id } command to check information about VLANs
configured based on MAC addresses.
l Run the display ip-subnet-vlan vlan { all | vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } command to check
information about VLANs configured based on IP subnets.
l Run the display protocol-vlan vlan { all | vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } command to check
information about VLANs configured based on protocols.
l Run the display protocol-vlan interface { all | interface-type interface-number } command
to check information about VLANs configured based on protocols associated with ports.
l Run the display policy-vlan { all | vlan vlan-id } command to check information about
policy vlan.
----End
72
3.4 Creating a VLANIF Interface
VLANIF interfaces are Layer 3 logical interfaces. After creating VLANIF interfaces on Layer
2 devices, you can configure Layer 3 features on these interfaces.
Before creating a VLANIF interface, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
Layer 3 switching combines routing and switching techniques to implement routing on a switch,
thus improving the overall network performance. After sending the first data flow, a Layer 3
switch generates mappings between MAC addresses and IP addresses. To send the same data
flow, the switch directly sends the data flow at Layer 2 but not Layer 3 based on this mapping
table.
To allow that new data flows are correctly forwarded based on the routing table, be sure that the
routing table's routing entries are correct. Therefore, VLANIF interfaces and routing protocols
must be configured on Layer 3 switches for reachable Layer 3 routes.
Before creating a VLANIF interface, complete the following task:
l Creating a VLAN
Data Preparation
To create a VLANIF interface, you need to the following data.
No. Data
1 VLAN ID
2 IP address to be assigned to the VLANIF interface
3 (Optional) Delay after which the VLANIF interface goes Down
4 (Optional) MTU of the VLANIF interface

3.4.2 Creating a VLANIF Interface
Before configure Layer 3 features on a Layer 2 device, you must create a VLANIF interface on
the device.
73
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
interface vlanif vlan-id
A VLANIF interface is created and the VLAIF interface view is displayed.
The VLAN ID specified in this command must be the ID of an existing VLAN.
NOTE
A VLANIF interface is Up only when at least one physical port added to the corresponding VLAN is Up.
----End
3.4.3 Assigning an IP Address to a VLANIF Interface
As a VLANIF interface is a Layer 3 logical interface, it can communicate with other interfaces
at the network layer only after being assigned an IP address.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The VLANIF interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
ip address ip-address { mask | mask-length } [ sub ]
An IP address is assigned to the VLANIF interface for communication at the network layer.
----End
3.4.4 (Optional) Setting a Delay After Which a VLANIF Interface
Goes Down
Setting a delay after which a VLANIF interface goes Down prevents network flapping caused
by changes of VLANIF interface status. This function is also called VLAN damping.
Context
If a VLAN goes Down because all ports in the VLAN go Down, the system immediately reports
the VLAN Down event to the corresponding VLANIF interface, instructing the VLANIF
interface to go Down.
74
To prevent network flapping caused by changes of VLANIF interface status, enable VLAN
damping on the VLANIF interface. After the last Up port in a VLAN goes Down, the system
starts a delay timer and informs the corresponding VLANIF interface of the VLAN Down event
after the timer expires. If a port in the VLAN goes Up during the delay period, the VLANIF
interface remains Up.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
damping time delay-time
The delay for VLAN damping is set.
The delay-time value ranges from 0 to 20, in seconds. By default, the value is 0 seconds,
indicating that VLAN damping is disabled.
----End
3.4.5 (Optional) Setting the MTU of a VLANIF Interface
Context
NOTE
l After changing the maximum transmission unit (MTU) by using the mtu command on a specified
interface, you need to restart the interface to make the new MTU take effect. To restart the interface,
run the shutdown command and then the undo shutdown command, or run the restart command in
the interface view.
l If you change the MTU of an interface, you need to change the MTU of the peer interface to the same
value by using the mtu command; otherwise, services may be interrupted.
l To ensure availability of Layer 3 functions, set the MTU value of the VLANIF interface to be smaller
than the maximum length of frames on the physical interface in the corresponding VLAN.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
75
mtu mtu
The MTU of the VLANIF interface is set.
The MTU of a VLANIF interface ranges from 128 to 9216, in bytes. The default value is 1500.
NOTE
If the MTU is too small whereas the packet size is large, the packet is probably split into many fragments.
Therefore, the packet may be discarded due to the insufficient QoS queue length. To avoid this situation,
lengthen the QoS queue accordingly.
----End
After a VLANIF interface is configured for communication at the network layer, you can check
the IP address and status of a specified VLANIF interface.
Prerequisite
The configurations of a VLANIF interface are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display interface vlanif [ vlan-id ] command to check the physical status, link
protocol status, description, and IP address of the VLANIF interface.
----End
3.5 Configuring Inter-VLAN Communication
Configuring inter-VLAN communication allows users in different VLANs to communicate with
each other. Currently, the S3700 supports several inter-VLAN communication schemes. Choose
one of them as required.
Before configuring inter-VLAN communication, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for the
configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
Currently, schemes listed in Table 3-6 are provided for inter-VLAN communication. You can
choose one of them based on the real world situation.
76
Table 3-6 Schemes for inter-VLAN communication
Inter-VLAN
Communica
tion Scheme
VLANIF
interface
After VLANIF
interfaces are
configured, users in
different VLANs and
network segments can
communicate with
each other as long as
Inter-VLAN
communication can
also be implemented by
Layer 3 switches if
This scheme boasts of
low operating costs.
If multiple users on a
network belong to
different VLANs, each
VLAN requires a
VLANIF interface.
Each VLANIF interface
needs to be assigned an
IP address. This
increases configuration
workload and uses a lot
of IP addresses.
This scheme is
applicable to small-
scale networks on
which users belong to
different network
segments and IP
addresses of these
users are seldom
changed.
If a large number of
VLANs are configured
and both Layer 2 and
Layer 3 forwarding of
packets are required,
use VLANIF
interfaces.

Before configuring inter-VLAN communication, complete the following task:
l Creating VLANs
Data Preparation
To configure inter-VLAN communication, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 VLAN ID, VLANIF interface number, IP address and mask of the VLANIF
interface

3.5.2 Configuring VLANIF Interfaces for Inter-VLAN
Communication
Configuring VLANIF interfaces for inter-VLAN communication saves expenditure and helps
implement fast forwarding.
Context
VLAIF interfaces are Layer 3 logical interfaces. After being assigned IP addresses, VLANIF
interfaces are able to communicate at the network layer.
77
By using VLANIF interfaces to implement inter-VLAN communication, you need to configure
a VLANIF interface for each VLAN and assign an IP address to each VLANIF interface.
Figure 3-5 Networking diagram for configuring VLANIF interfaces for inter-VLAN
communication
Switch
VLAN2 VLAN3
VLANIF2 VLANIF3

NOTE
The default gateway address of each PC in a VLAN must be the IP address of the corresponding VLANIF
interface. Otherwise, inter-VLAN communication will fail.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
NOTE
A VLANIF interface is Up only when at least one physical port added to the corresponding VLAN is Up.
Step 3 Run:
An IP address is assigned to the VLANIF interface.
VLANIF interfaces must belong to different network segments.
----End
78
After inter-VLAN communication is configured, you can check whether users in different
VLANs can communicate with each other and check information about VLANs to which users
belong.
Prerequisite
The configurations of inter-VLAN communication are complete.
Procedure
l Run the ping [ ip ] [ -a source-ip-address | -c count | -d | -f | -h ttl-value | -i interface-
type interface-number | -m time | -n | -p pattern | -q | -r | -s packetsize | -system-time | -t
timeout | -tos tos-value | -v | -vpn-instance vpn-instance-name ]
*
host command to check
whether users in different VLANs can communicate with each other.
If the ping fails, you can run the following commands to locate the fault:
Run the display vlan [ vlan-id [ verbose ] ] command to check information about all
VLANs or a specified VLAN.
Run the display interface vlanif [ vlan-id ] command to check information about
VLANIF interfaces.
Before running this command, ensure that VLANIF interfaces have been configured.
----End
3.6 Configuring VLAN Aggregation to Save IP Addresses
VLAN aggregation prevents the waste of IP addresses and implements inter-VLAN
communication.
Before configuring VLAN aggregation, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
As networks expand, address resources become insufficient. VLAN aggregation is developed
to save IP addresses.
In VLAN aggregation, one super-VLAN is associated with multiple sub-VLANs. Physical ports
cannot join a super-VLAN but a VLANIF interface can be created for the super-VLAN and an
IP address can be assigned to the VLANIF interface. Physical ports can join a sub-VLAN but
no VLANIF interface can be created for the sub-VLAN. All the ports in the sub-VLAN use the
same IP address with the VLANIF interface of the super-VLAN. This saves subnet IDs, default
gateway addresses of the subnets, and directed broadcast addresses of the subnets. In addition,
different broadcast domains can use the addresses in the same subnet segment. As a result, subnet
differences are eliminated, addressing becomes flexible, and the number of idle addresses is
reduced. VLAN aggregation allows each sub-VLAN to function as a broadcast domain and
reduces the waste of IP addresses to be assigned to ordinary VLANs.
79
Figure 3-6 shows the typical VLAN aggregation networking.
Figure 3-6 Typical networking diagram for VLAN aggregation
Super
VLAN4
PE
Sub-VLAN 2
CE1
Sub-VLAN 3
CE2

Before configuring VLAN aggregation, complete the following task:
l Connecting ports and configuring physical parameters of the ports, ensuring that the ports
are physically Up
Data Preparation
To configure VLAN aggregation, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 ID of each sub-VLAN and number of each port belonging to the sub-VLAN
2 ID of a super-VLAN
3 IP address and mask of a VLANIF interface

3.6.2 Creating a Sub-VLAN
Each sub-VLAN functions as a broadcast domain.
80
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
port link-type access
The link type of the interface is set to access.
Step 4 Run:
quit
Return to the system view.
Step 5 Run:
vlan vlan-id
A sub-VLAN is created and the sub-VLAN view is displayed.
Step 6 Run:
port interface-type { interface-number1 [ to interface-number2 ] } &<1-10>
A port is added to the sub-VLAN.
----End
3.6.3 Creating a Super-VLAN
A super-VLAN consists of several sub-VLANs. No physical port can be added to a super-VLAN,
but a VLANIF interface can be configured for the super-VLAN and an IP address can be assigned
to the VLANIF interface.
Context
NOTE
Before configuring a super-VLAN, ensure that sub-VLANs have been configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
A VLAN is created, and the VLAN view is displayed.
The VLAN ID of a super-VLAN must be different from every sub-VLAN ID.
81
Step 3 Run:
aggregate-vlan
A super-VLAN is created.
A super-VLAN cannot contain any physical interfaces.
VLAN 1 cannot be configured as a super-VLAN.
Step 4 Run:
access-vlan { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10>
A sub-VLAN is added to a super-VLAN.
Before adding sub-VLANs to a super-VLAN in batches, ensure that these sub-VLANs are not
configured with VLANIF interfaces.
----End
3.6.4 Assigning an IP Address to the VLANIF Interface of a Super-
VLAN
The IP address of the VLANIF interface of a super-VLAN must contain the subnet segments
where users in sub-VLANs reside. All the sub-VLANs use the IP address of the VLANIF
interface of the super-VLAN, thus saving IP addresses.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
A VLANIF interface is created for a super-VLAN, and the view of the VLANIF interface is
displayed.
Step 3 Run:
An IP address is assigned to the VLANIF interface.
----End
3.6.5 (Optional) Enabling Proxy ARP on the VLANIF Interface of a
Super-VLAN
PCs in different sub-VLANs cannot directly communicate with each other in Layer2 network.
To allow these PCs to communicate with each other at Layer 3, enable proxy ARP on the
VLANIF interface of the super-VLAN.
Context
VLAN aggregation allows sub-VLANs to use the same subnet address, but prevents PCs in
different sub-VLANs from communicating with each other at the network layer.
82
PCs in ordinary VLANs can communicate with each other at the network layer by using different
gateway addresses. In VLAN aggregation, PCs in a super-VLAN use the same subnet address
and gateway address. As PCs in different sub-VLANs belong to one subnet, they communicate
with each other only at Layer 2, not Layer 3. These PCs are isolated from each other at Layer
2. Consequently, PCs in different sub-VLANs cannot communicate with each other.
Proxy ARP is required to enable PCs in a sub-VLAN to communicate with PCs in another sub-
VLAN or PCs on other networks. After a super-VLAN and its VLANIF interface are created,
proxy ARP must be enabled to allow the super-VLAN to forward or process ARP request and
reply packets. Proxy ARP helps PCs in sub-VLANs communicate with each other at the network
layer.
NOTE
An IP address must have been assigned to the VLANIF interface corresponding to the super-VLAN.
Otherwise, proxy ARP cannot take effect.
VLAN aggregation simplifies configurations for the network where many VLANs are
configured and PCs in different VLANs need to communicate with each other.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The view of the VLANIF interface of the super-VLAN is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
arp-proxy inter-sub-vlan-proxy enable
Inter-sub-VLAN proxy ARP is enabled.
----End
After VLAN aggregation is configured, you can view VLAN types and information about
VLANIF interfaces, such as the physical status, link protocol status, IP address, and mask.
Prerequisite
The VLAN aggregation configurations are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display vlan [ vlan-id [ verbose ] ] command to check VLAN information.
l Run the display interface vlanif [ vlan-id ] command to check information about a specific
VLANIF interface.
----End
83
3.7 Configuring a MUX VLAN to Separate Layer 2 Traffic
Configuring a MUX VLAN allows users in different VLANs to communicate with each other,
and separates users in a certain VLAN.
Before configuring a MUX VLAN, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
In an enterprise network, all employees of the enterprise can access the enterprise's server. It is
required that some employees be able to communicate with each other, whereas some employees
not communicate with each other.
Configuring a MUX VLAN on the switch connected to PCs helps to save VLAN ID resources,
reduce the configuration workload of the network administrator, and facilitate network
maintenance.
Figure 3-7 Networking diagram for a MUX VLAN
Enterprise
server
Switch
Group PORT Separate PORT
Principal PORT
Enterprise
employee1
Enterprise
employee2

In the MUX VLAN shown in Figure 3-7, the principal port connects the switch to the enterprise's
server; separate ports connect the switch to employees that do not communicate with each other;
group ports connect the switch to employees that need to communicate with each other. A MUX
VLAN consists of VLANs in different types listed in Table 3-7.
84
Table 3-7 Components of a MUX VLAN
MUX
VLAN
VLAN
Type
Port Type Communication Rights
Principal
VLAN
- Principal port A principal port can communicate with every
port in the MUX VLAN.
Subordinate
VLAN
Separate
VLAN
Separate port A separate port can only communicate with
principal ports.
Each separate VLAN must be associated with
a principal VLAN.
Group
VLAN
Group port A group port can communicate with both
principal ports and other group ports in the
same group VLAN but cannot communicate
with group ports in other group VLANs or
separate ports.
Each group VLAN must be associated with a
principal VLAN.

Before configuring a MUX VLAN, complete the following task:
l Creating VLANs
Data Preparation
To configure a MUX VLAN, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 ID of each principal VLAN and number of each port belonging to the principal VLAN
2 ID of each group VLAN and number of each port belonging to the group VLAN
3 ID of each separate VLAN and number of each port belonging to the separate VLAN

3.7.2 Configuring a Principal VLAN for a MUX VLAN
Ports added to a principal VLAN can communicate with every port in the MUX VLAN.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
85
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
mux-vlan
The VLAN is configured as a principal VLAN.
The VLAN ID assigned to a principal VLAN can no longer be used to configure any VLANIF
interface, super-VLAN, or sub-VLAN.
----End
3.7.3 Configuring a Group VLAN for a Subordinate VLAN
A VLAN associated with a group port is called a group VLAN. Group ports in a group VLAN
can communicate with each other.
Context
In a MUX VLAN, group VLANs cannot share the same VLAN ID with a separate VLAN.
Do as follows on a switching device that requires a group VLAN:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
The view of a created principal VLAN is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
subordinate group vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ]
A group VLAN is configured for the subordinate VLAN.
In this command, vlan-id1 and vlan-id2 specify a range of VLAN IDs. The value is an integer
ranging from 1 to 4094. The value of vlan-id2 must be greater than the value of vlan-id1.
The VLAN ID assigned to a group VLAN can be assigned to no other VLANIF interface, super-
VLAN, or sub-VLAN.
----End
3.7.4 Configuring a Separate VLAN for a Subordinate VLAN
A VLAN associated with separate ports is called a separate VLAN. Ports in a separate VLAN
cannot communicate with each other.
86
Context
Group VLANs and separate VLANs in one MUX VLAN cannot use the same VLAN ID.
Do as follows on a switching device that requires a separate VLAN:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
The view of a created principal VLAN is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
subordinate separate vlan-id
A separate VLAN is configured for a subordinate VLAN.
Group VLANs and separate VLANs in one MUX VLAN cannot use the same VLAN ID.
----End
3.7.5 Enabling the MUX VLAN Function on a Port
After the MUX VLAN function is enabled on a port, the principal VLAN and subordinate VLAN
can communicate with each other; ports in a group VLAN can communicate with each other;
ports in a separate VLAN cannot communicate with each other.
Context
Before the MUX VLAN function is enabled on a port, ensure that:
l The port has been added to only one ordinary VLAN. If the port has been added to multiple
VLANs, the MUX VLAN function cannot be enabled on this port.
l The port has been added to a principal or subordinate VLAN.
Do as follows on the switching device on which a port needs to be enabled with the MUX VLAN
function:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The view of an Ethernet port connecting users is displayed.
87
Step 3 Run:
port mux-vlan enable
The MUX VLAN function is enabled.
The interface has been added only to a principal VLAN or a subordinate VLAN.
After being enabled with the MUX VLAN function, the port can no longer be configured with
VLAN mapping or VLAN stacking.
NOTE
l Disabling MAC address learning or limiting the number of learned MAC addresses on an interface
affects the MUX VLAN function on the interface.
l The MUX VLAN and port security functions cannot be enabled on the same interface.
l The MUX VLAN and MAC address authentication cannot be enabled on the same interface.
l The MUX VLAN and 802.1x authentication cannot be enabled on the same interface.
----End
After a MUX VLAN is configured, you can check the principal VLAN ID, subordinate VLAN
ID, and VLAN type.
Prerequisite
The configurations of a MUX VLAN are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display mux-vlan command to check information about the MUX VLAN.
----End
3.8 Configuring a Voice VLAN to Transmit Voice Data
A voice VLAN is used to transmit voice data.
Before configuring a voice VLAN, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
Voice and non-voice data are transmitted on networks. Voice data is configured with a higher
priority than non-voice data to reduce the probability of the transmission delay and packet loss.
In most cases, an Access Control List (ACL) is configured to distinguish voice data from non-
voice data, and the Quality of Service (QoS) is used to ensure the transmission quality of voice
data.
Voice over IP (VoIP) phones are commonly used. If an ACL is configured to distinguish voice
data from non-voice data, and QoS is used to ensure the transmission quality of voice data, each
88
terminal needs to be configured with an ACL rule. This increases the network administrator's
workload and burdens maintenance.
The voice VLAN technique is introduced to solve the preceding problem.
After being enabled with the voice VLAN function, a device determines voice data based on
source MAC addresses of received frames, adds ports that receive voice data to a voice VLAN,
and automatically applies priority rules to ensure high priorities and good qualities of voice data.
This simplifies user configuration and facilitates management on voice data.
On the network shown in Figure 3-8, a user's High Speed Internet (HSI), VoIP, and Internet
Protocol Television (IPTV) services are connected to a switch. A voice VLAN can be configured
on the switch to implement QoS for voice data, prioritize voice data, and ensure the
communication quality.
Figure 3-8 Networking diagram for configuring a voice VLAN
Network
Server
HSI VoIP IPTV HSI VoIP IPTV
Switch
LAN Switch2
Voice flow
Voice VLAN
VLAN 10
LAN Switch1

Before configuring a voice VLAN, complete the following task:
l Creating VLANs
Data Preparation
To configure a voice VLAN, you need the following data.
89
No. Data
1 Type and number of the port enabled with the voice VLAN function, voice VLAN
ID
2 The Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) address and mask of the voice VLAN
3 (Optional) Aging timer value of the voice VLAN
4 (Optional) 802.1p priority and DSCP value for the voice VLAN
5 (Optional) Mode in which the port is added to the voice VLAN
6 (Optional) Security mode of the voice VLAN

3.8.2 Enabling the Voice VLAN Function
After being enabled with the voice VLAN function, a device is able to identify voice data based
on source MAC addresses of received frames.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The view of a port connecting the device to users' voice devices is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
voice-vlan vlan-id enable
A voice VLAN is configured and the voice VLAN function is enabled on the port.
By default, the voice VLAN function is disabled on ports.
NOTE
l VLAN 1 cannot be configured as a voice VLAN.
l The voice VLAN and default VLAN on a port must be assigned different VLAN IDs to ensure that
every function works properly.
l Only one VLAN on a port can be configured as a voice VLAN at a time.
l If the voice VLAN configured on an interface works in automatic mode, you need to run the port link-
type command to set the interface type to trunk, or hybrid.
l Before deleting a voice VLAN, run the undo voice-vlan enable command to disable the voice VLAN
function.
l The port enabled with the voice VLAN function cannot be configured with VLAN mapping, VLAN
stacking, or traffic policies.
----End
90
3.8.3 Configuring an OUI for a Voice VLAN
A voice VLAN-enabled port checks source MAC addresses of received frames. If the source
MAC addresses match OUIs, the frames are considered voice data.
Context
An OUI is a globally-unique identifier assigned by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers (IEEE) to a specific equipment vendor. An OUI represents the first 24 bits of a binary
MAC address.
An OUI represents a MAC address segment that is obtained by performing the AND operation
between a 48-bit MAC address and a mask. For example, the MAC address is 1-1-1, and the
mask is FFFF-FF00-0000. The AND operation is performed between the MAC address and the
mask to obtain the OUI 0001-0000-0000. If the first 24 bits of the MAC address of a device are
the same as an OUI, a voice VLAN-enabled port considers the device as a voice device and data
from the device as voice data.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
voice-vlan mac-address mac-address mask oui-mask [ description text ]
An OUI is configured.
l The mac-address value cannot be all 0s or a multicast or broadcast address.
l A device can be configured with a maximum of 16 OUIs. When the device is configured
with 16 OUIs, subsequent configurations will not take effect.
l When using the undo voice-vlan mac-address command to delete an OUI, specify the mac-
address value in this command as the result of the AND operation by using the configured
MAC address and mask.
NOTE
When the source MAC address of a packet matches the OUI, the S3700 changes the priority of the packet
basing on the configuration of 3.8.5 (Optional) Configuring an 802.1p Priority and a DSCP Value for
the Voice VLAN to improve the transmission quality.
----End
3.8.4 (Optional) Setting an Aging Timer for a Voice VLAN
In automatic mode, a voice VLAN-enabled port learns source MAC addresses of frames from
voice devices, adds ports connecting the device to voice devices to a voice VLAN, and uses the
voice VLAN aging timer to control the number of ports in the voice VLAN.
Context
The aging timer of a voice VLAN is effective only when ports are automatically added to the
voice VLAN.
91
If a voice VLAN-enabled port does not receive voice data from a voice device before the aging
timer expires, the port will be automatically deleted from the voice VLAN. If the port receives
voice data from the voice device again, the port will be automatically added to the voice VLAN
and the aging timer will be reset.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
voice-vlan aging-time minutes
The aging timer is set for a voice VLAN.
The aging timer value ranges from 5 to 43200, in minutes. The default value is 1440 minutes.
----End
3.8.5 (Optional) Configuring an 802.1p Priority and a DSCP Value
for the Voice VLAN
Different 802.1p priorities and DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) values can be configured for
different voice VLANs, which makes voice service deployment more flexible.
Context
By default, the 802.1p priority and DSCP value for each voice VLAN are 6 and 46 respectively.
Manual configuration of the 802.1p priority and DSCP value will allow you to plan priorities
for different voice services at will.
NOTE
l The 802.1p priority is indicated by the value in the 3-bit PRI field in each 802.1Q VLAN frame. This
field determines the transmission priority for data packets when a switching device is congested.
l The DSCP value is indicated by the 6 bits in the Type of Service (ToS) field in the IPv4 packet header.
DSCP, as the signaling for DiffServ, is used for QoS guarantee on IP networks. The traffic controller
on the network gateway takes actions merely based on the information carried by the 6 bits.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
voice-vlan remark { 8021p 8021p-value | dscp dscp-value }
*
An 802.1p priority and a DSCP value are configured for a voice VLAN.
By default, the 802.1p priority and DSCP value for a voice VLAN are 6 and 46 respectively.
----End
92
3.8.6 (Optional) Configuring the Mode in Which Ports Are Added
to a Voice VLAN
On a switching device, only one VLAN on a port can be configured as a voice VLAN. Ports can
be added to the voice VLAN in either automatic or manual mode.
Context
Ports can be added to a voice VLAN in either of the following modes:
l Automatic mode
A voice VLAN-enabled port learns source MAC addresses of frames from voice devices,
adds ports connecting the device to voice devices to a voice VLAN, and uses the voice
VLAN aging timer to control the number of ports in the voice VLAN. If a voice VLAN-
enabled port does not receive voice data from a voice device before the aging timer expires,
the port will be automatically deleted from the voice VLAN. If the port receives voice data
from the voice device again, the port will be automatically added to the voice VLAN.
l Manual mode
After the voice VLAN function is enabled, ports connected to voice devices must be
manually added to a voice VLAN. Otherwise, the voice VLAN function does not take
effect.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
voice-vlan mode { auto | manual }
The mode in which ports are added to a voice VLAN is configured.
By default, ports are automatically added to a voice VLAN.
l If the auto parameter is configured, ports will be automatically added to a voice VLAN.
l If the manual parameter is configured, ports will be manually added to a voice VLAN.
If trunk ports are connected to voice devices, run the port trunk allow-pass vlan
{ { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all } command to manually add these ports to a
voice VLAN.
If hybrid ports are connected to voice devices, do as follows as required:
Run the port hybrid untagged vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
command to manually add these ports to a voice VLAN in untagged mode.
Run the port hybrid tagged vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
command to manually add these ports to a voice VLAN in tagged mode.
93
NOTE
In Access ports cannot be automatically added to a voice VLAN. To add a port of the access type to the
voice VLAN, run the port link-type command to change the port type to trunk or hybrid.
----End
3.8.7 (Optional) Configuring the Working Mode for a Voice VLAN
A voice VLAN works in either security or ordinary mode to transmit merely voice data or both
voice and non-voice data.
Context
Based on the data filtering mechanism, a voice VLAN works in either security or ordinary mode:
l Security mode
A voice VLAN-enabled inbound port transmits only frames of which the source MAC
addresses match OUIs configured on the device, discards the voice data not belong to the
current voice VLAN and the other data can be forwarded normally.
The security mode prevents a voice VLAN from being attacked by malicious data flows,
but consumes system resources to check frames.
l Ordinary mode
A voice VLAN-enabled inbound port transmits both voice and non-voice data. The port
does not compare source MAC addresses in received frames with configured OUIs,
exposing a voice VLAN to malicious attacks.
NOTE
Transmitting voice and service data at the same time in a voice VLAN is not recommended. If a voice
VLAN must transmit both voice and service data, ensure that the voice VLAN works in ordinary mode.
Table 3-8 shows how to process frames in different voice VLAN working modes.
Table 3-8 Frame processing in different voice VLAN working modes
Voice VLAN
Working Mode
Frame Processing Mode
Security mode If the source MAC address of a frame and the OUI do not match,
the priority of the frame is not changed and the frame is prohibited
from forwarding in the voice VLAN.
Ordinary mode If the source MAC address of a frame and the OUI do not match,
the priority of the frame is not changed and the frame is allowed to
be forwarded in the voice VLAN.

Procedure
l Security mode
1. Run the system-view command to enter the system view.
2. Run the interface interface-type interface-number command to enter the view of a
port connecting the device to users' voice devices.
94
3. Run the voice-vlan security enable command to configure the voice VLAN work in
security mode.
By default, a voice VLAN works in security mode.
l Ordinary mode
1. Run the system-view command to enter the system view.
2. Run the interface interface-type interface-number command to enter the view of a
port connecting the device to users' voice devices.
3. Run the undo voice-vlan security enable command to configure the voice VLAN
work in ordinary mode.
By default, a voice VLAN works in security mode.
----End
3.8.8 (Optional) Configuring a Port to Communicate with a Voice
Device of Another Vendor
The voice VLAN legacy function can be configured to allow Huawei datacom devices to identify
packets of proprietary protocols of other vendors.
Context
After VoIP devices of some vendors are powered on, proprietary protocol packets but not DHCP
packets are sent to apply for IP addresses. To help Huawei datacom devices communicate with
voice devices of other vendors, you can enable the voice VLAN legacy function. This allows
Huawei devices to identify packets of proprietary protocols of other vendors.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
voice-vlan legacy enable
The port is configured to communicate with a voice device of another vendor.
By default, ports on Huawei devices cannot communicate with voice devices of other vendors.
----End
After a voice VLAN is configured, you can view information about the voice VLAN, including
the OUI, working mode, security mode or ordinary mode, aging timer value, the 802.1p priority
and DSCP value as well as the configuration of the port enabled with the voice VLAN function.
95
Prerequisite
The configurations of a voice VLAN are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display voice-vlan [ vlan-id ] status command to check information about the
voice VLAN, including the working mode, security mode, aging timer value and the 802.1p
priority and DSCP value as well as the configuration of the port enabled with the voice
VLAN function.
l Run the display voice-vlan oui command to check information about the OUI of the voice
VLAN, including the mask and description of the OUI.
----End
3.9 Configuring an mVLAN to Implement Integrated
Management
Configuring an mVLAN allows users to use the IP address of the VLANIF interface
corresponding to the mVLAN to log in to a management switch to manage devices attached to
the switch.
Before configuring an mVLAN to implement integrated management, familiarize yourself with
the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required
for the configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
An mVLAN can be configured to help a user use an NMS to manage indirectly-connected
devices.
After an mVLAN is configured, a user can use the IP address of the VLANIF interface
corresponding to the mVLAN to telnet to a management switch and manage devices attached
to the switch.
Before configuring an mVLAN, complete the following task:
l Creating a VLAN
Data Preparation
To configure an mVLAN, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 VLAN ID

96
3.9.2 Configuring an mVLAN
An mVLAN allows a user to use the IP address of the VLANIF interface corresponding to the
mVLAN to telnet to a management switch to manage devices attached to the switch.
Do as follows on the device that requires an mVLAN:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
The VLAN view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
management-vlan
An mVLAN is configured.
Only a trunk or hybrid port can be added to an mVLAN.
After the undo management-vlan command is used for an mVLAN, the mVLAN becomes an
ordinary VLAN, to which access, trunk, or hybrid ports can be added.
----End
3.9.3 Configuring a VLANIF Interface for an mVLAN
You need to use the IP address of the VLANIF interface corresponding to an mVLAN to telnet
to a management switch to manage attached devices.
Do as follows on the device that requires an mVLAN:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The ID of the VLANIF interface must be the ID of a configured mVLAN.
Step 3 Run:
After assigning an IP address to the VLANIF interface, you can run the telnet command to log
in to a management switch to manage attached devices.
----End
97
After an mVLAN is configured, you can check information about the mVLAN.
Prerequisite
The configurations of an mVLAN are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display vlan command to check information about the mVLAN. The command
output shows information about the mVLAN in the line started with an asterisk sign (*).
----End
3.10 Maintaining VLAN
A command of clearing statistics helps to locate the faults in a VLAN.
3.10.1 Clearing the Statistics of VLAN Packets
Before collecting traffic statistics in a specified time period on an interface, you need to reset
the original statistics on the interface.
Context
CAUTION
Statistics about VLAN packets cannot be restored after you clear it. So, confirm the action before
you use the command.
To clear the Statistics of VLAN Packets, run the following reset command in the user view:
Procedure
l Run the reset vlan vlan-id statistics command to clear packets of a specified VLAN
statistics.
----End
This section provides several examples of VLAN configuration.
3.11.1 Example for Configuring Interface-based VLANs
It is easy to divide a LAN into VLANs based on ports. After ports are added to different VLANs,
users in the same VLAN can directly communicate with each other, whereas users in different
VLANs cannot directly communicate with each other.
98
An enterprise has multiple departments. It is required that departments in charge of the same
service can communicate with each other, and departments in charge of different services cannot
It is required that on the network shown in Figure 3-9, the requirements are as follows:
l Department 1 and Department 2 are isolated from Department 3 and Department 4.
l Department 1 and Department 2 can communicate with each other.
l Department 3 and Department 4 can communicate with each other.
Figure 3-9 Networking diagram for configuring interface-based VLANs
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2 Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/4
Group 2
VLAN 3
Switch
VLAN 3
Network
VLAN 2
Department 3 Department 2 Department 4 Department 1

1. Create VLANs and determine mappings between employees and VLANs.
2. Configure port types to determine the device connected to each port.
3. Add the ports connected to department 1 and department 2 to VLAN 2 and the ports
connected to department 3 and department 4 to VLAN 3 to prevent employees in department
1 or department 2 from communicating with employees in department 3 or department 4.
Data Preparation
l Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 belong to VLAN 2.
99
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the Switch.
# Create VLAN 2.
[Quidway] vlan 2
[Quidway-vlan2] quit
# Set the link type of Eth 0/0/1 to trunk and add Eth 0/0/1 to VLAN 2.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type trunk
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
[Quidway]interface ethernet 0/0/2
# Create VLAN 3.
[Quidway] vlan 3
Ping any host in VLAN 3 from a host in VLAN 2. The ping operation fails. This indicates that
Department 1 and Department 2 are isolated from Department 3 and Department 4.
Ping any host in Department 2 from a host in Department 1. The ping operation is successful.
This indicates that Department 1 and Department 2 can communicate with each other.
Ping any host in Department 4 from a host in Department 3. The ping operation is successful.
This indicates that Department 3 and Department 4 can communicate with each other.
----End
Configuration Files
The following lists the configuration file of the Switch.
#
sysname Quidway
#
100
vlan batch 2 to 3
#
port trunk allow-pass vlan 2
#
#
#
#
return
3.11.2 Example for Configuring MAC Address-based VLAN
Assignment
MAC address-based VLAN assignment is applicable only to simple networks where network
adapters are not changed frequently.
On an enterprise network, the network administrator adds PCs of employees in a department to
the same VLAN. To improve information security, only employees is this department are
allowed to access the intranet.
As shown in Figure 3-10, only PC1, PC2, and PC3 are allowed to access the intranet through
SwitchA and Switch.
101
Figure 3-10 Network diagram of MAC address-based VLAN assignment
PC1
PC2
PC3
Switch
SwitchA
Network
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
MAC:22-22-22 MAC:33-33-33 MAC:44-44-44
VLAN 10

1. Create VLANs and determine the VLAN that PCs of employees belong to.
2. Add Ethernet interfaces to VLANs.
3. Associate MAC addresses of PC1, PC2, and PC3 with the specified VLAN so that the
Switch can assign the VLAN to packets according to their source MAC addresses.
Data Preparation
l The PVID of Eth0/0/1 on the Switch is 100.
l Eth0/0/1 of the Switch needs to be added to VLAN 10 in untagged mode.
l Eth0/0/2 of the Switch needs to be added to VLAN 10 in tagged mode.
l All the interfaces on SwitchA need to be added to VLAN 1 in untagged mode.
l MAC addresses of PC1, PC2, and PC3 need to be associated with VLAN 10.
Procedure
# Create VLANs.
102
[Quidway] vlan batch 10 100
# Set the PVID of interfaces and add interfaces to the VLANs.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 100
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 10
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/2] port hybrid tagged vlan 10
# Associate MAC addresses of PC1, PC2, and PC3 with VLAN 10.
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidway-Vlan10] mac-vlan mac-address 22-22-22
[Quidway-Vlan10] quit
# Enable MAC address-based VLAN assignment on Eth0/0/1.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] mac-vlan enable
PC1, PC2, and PC3 can access the intranet, whereas PCs of non-employees cannot access the
intranet.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10 100
#
vlan 10
mac-vlan mac-address 0022-0022-0022
#
port hybrid pvid vlan 100
port hybrid untagged vlan 10
mac-vlan enable
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 10
#
return
3.11.3 Example for Configuring IP Subnet-based VLAN
Assignment
After a LAN is divided into VLANs based on IP subnets, frames from a certain network segment
or IP address are transmitted in a specified VLAN. This reduces the configuration workload of
network administrators and facilitates management.
103
A company has multiple services including the IPTV, VoIP, and Internet access services. Each
service uses a unique IP address. Packets of the same service must be transmitted in the same
VLAN and packets of different services must be transmitted in different VLANs.
On the network shown in Figure 3-11, a switch receives Internet, IPTV, and voice services from
users of which IP addresses are diverse. It is required that different types of services be
transmitted in separate VLANs. This allows each type of services to be sent to a remote dedicated
server.
Figure 3-11 Networking diagram of IP subnet-based VLAN assignment
Internet
IPTV
server
Voice
Network
192.168.1.2
192.168.2.2
192.168.3.2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2
Switch
RouterA
Eth0/0/4
RouterB
RouterC

1. Create VLANs and determine mappings between services and VLANs.
2. Associate IP subnets with VLANs.
The switch determines the VLAN mapped to a frame based on the source IP address carried
in the frame. New nodes can be deployed on the network without too much configuration.
The switch is able to add each new node to a corresponding VLAN based on the network
address of the node.
3. Configure a port to allow frames with specified VLAN IDs to pass through.
4. Configure the highest priority for IP subnet-based VLAN assignment.
5. Enable IP subnet-based VLAN assignment.
104
Data Preparation
l VLANs to which Eth 0/0/1 needs to be added in untagged mode: VLAN 100, VLAN 200,
and VLAN 300
l VLANs to which Eth 0/0/2, Eth 0/0/3, and Eth 0/0/4 need to be added in tagged mode
respectively: VLAN 100, VLAN 200, and VLAN 300
l Configuration data for IP subnet-based VLAN assignment, as shown in Table 3-9
Table 3-9 Configuration data for IP subnet-based VLAN assignment
VLAN ID IP Subnet
Index
Source IP
Address
Subnet Mask 802.1p Priority
100 1 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 2
200 1 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0 3
300 1 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.0 4

Procedure
Step 1 Create VLANs.
# Create VLAN 100, VLAN 200, and VLAN 300 on the Switch.
[Quidway] vlan batch 100 200 300
Step 2 Configure interfaces.
# Set the link type of Eth 0/0/1 to hybrid and add it to VLAN 100, VLAN 200, and VLAN 300.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 100 200 300
# Add Eth 0/0/2 of the Switch to VLAN 100.
# Enable the IP subnet-based VLAN function on Eth 0/0/1.
105
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] ip-subnet-vlan enable
Step 3 Configure IP subnet-based VLAN assignment.
# Associate 192.168.1.2 to VLAN 100 and set the 802.1p priority of VLAN 100 to 2.
[Quidway] vlan 100
[Quidway-vlan100] ip-subnet-vlan 1 ip 192.168.1.2 24 priority 2
# Associate 192.168.2.2 to VLAN 200 and set the 802.1p priority of VLAN 200 to 3.
[Quidway] vlan 200
# Associate IP subnet 192.168.3.2 to VLAN 100 and set the 802.1p priority of VLAN 300 to 4.
[Quidway] vlan 300
Run the display ip-subnet-vlan vlan all command on the Switch. The following information
is displayed:
[Quidway] display ip-subnet-vlan vlan all
----------------------------------------------------------------
Vlan Index IpAddress SubnetMask Priority
----------------------------------------------------------------
100 1 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 2
200 1 192.168.2.2 255.255.255.0 3
300 1 192.168.3.2 255.255.255.0 4
----------------------------------------------------------------
ip-subnet-vlan count: 3 total count: 3
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of the Switch
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 100 200 300
#
vlan 100
ip-subnet-vlan 1 ip 192.168.1.2 255.255.255.0 priority 2
#
vlan 200
#
vlan 300
#
port hybrid untagged vlan 100 200 300
ip-subnet-vlan enable
#
#
106
#
#
return
3.11.4 Example for Configuring Protocol-based VLAN Assignment
Protocol-based VLAN assignment reduces manual configuration workload and allows users to
easily join a VLAN, transfer from one VLAN to another, and exit from a VLAN.
A company has multiple services including the IPTV, VoIP, and Internet access services. Each
service uses a unique protocol. It is required that services of the same type be transmitted in a
VLAN and services of different types be transmitted in separate VLANs to facilitate
management and reduce manual VLAN configuration workload.
As shown in Figure 3-12, the Switch receives packets of multiple services that use different
protocols. Users in VLAN 10 use IPv4 to communicate with remote users, and users in VLAN
20 use IPv6 to communicate with the servers. The Switch needs to assign VLANs to packets of
different services and transmit packets with different VLAN IDs to different servers.
Figure 3-12 Network diagram of protocol-based VLAN assignment
Internet
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2
Switch
RouterA
IPv6
VLAN 20
IPv4
VLAN 10
RouterB
Voice
Network

107
1. Create VLANs and determine mappings between services and VLANs.
2. Associate protocols with VLANs.
The Switch assigns a VLAN ID to a frame based on the protocol or protocol suite to which
the frame belongs. As long as the protocols of user devices keep unchanged, users do not
need to be added to new VLANs regardless of whether their locations change, whether
network cards of PCs are changed, or whether users locate in the same network segment.
3. Configure a port to allow frames with specified VLAN IDs to pass through.
4. Associate ports with VLANs.
After receiving a frame associated with a specified protocol, the system automatically
assigns the VLAN ID associated with the protocol to the frame.
Data Preparation
l VLANs to which Eth0/0/1 of the Switch needs to be added in untagged mode: VLAN 10
and VLAN 20
l VLANs to which Eth0/0/2 and Eth0/0/3 of the Switch need to be added in tagged mode:
VLAN 10 and VLAN 20
l Protocol associated with each VLAN
VLAN 10:IPv4
VLAN 20:IPv6
Procedure
[Quidway] sysname Switch
[Switch] vlan batch 10 20
Step 2 Configure protocol-based VLANs.
# Associate IPv4 with VLAN 10.
[Switch] vlan 10
[Switch-vlan10] protocol-vlan ipv4
[Switch-vlan10] quit
# Associate IPv6 with VLAN 20.
[Switch] vlan 20
[Switch-vlan20] protocol-vlan ipv6
[Switch-vlan20] quit
Step 3 Associate interfaces with protocol-based VLANs.
# Associate Eth0/0/1 with VLAN 10 and set the 802.1p priority of VLAN 10 to 5.
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/1] protocol-vlan vlan 10 all priority 5
# Associate Eth0/0/1 with VLAN 20 and set the 802.1p priority of VLAN 20 to 6.
108
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/1] protocol-vlan vlan 20 all priority 6
Step 4 Configure interfaces.
# Add Eth0/0/1 to VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 so that Eth0/0/1 allows packets of VLAN 10 and
VLAN 20 to pass through.
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 10 20
# Add Eth0/0/2 to VLAN 10 so that Eth0/0/2 allows packets of VLAN 10 to pass through.
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/2] port link-type trunk
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
# Add Eth0/0/3 to VLAN 20 so that Eth0/0/3 allows packets of VLAN 20 to pass through.
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/3] port link-type trunk
[Switch-Ethernet0/0/3] port trunk allow-pass vlan 20
After completing the configuration, run the display protocol-vlan interface all command, and
you can view the configuration of protocol-based VLANs on Eth0/0/1. For example:
<Switch> display protocol-vlan interface all
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interface VLAN Index Protocol Type Priority
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ethernet0/0/1 10 0 ipv4 5
Ethernet0/0/1 20 0 ipv6 6
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Switch
#
vlan batch 10 20
#
vlan 10
protocol-vlan 0 ipv4
vlan 20
protocol-vlan 0 ipv6
#
port hybrid untagged vlan 10 20
protocol-vlan vlan 10 0 priority 5
protocol-vlan vlan 20 0 priority 6
#
#
109
#
return
3.11.5 Example for Implementing Communication Between VLANs
by Using VLANIF Interfaces
A Layer 3 switch can replace a router to implement communications between VLANs by using
VLANIF interfaces.
Departments of an enterprise are located on different network segments and use same services
such as Internet access and VoIP. Departments in different VLANs need to use the same service,
so communication between VLANs must be implemented.
As shown in Figure 3-13, department 1 and department 2 use the same service but belong to
different VLANs and are located on different network segments. Users in department 1 and
department 2 need to communicate with each other.
Figure 3-13 Communication between VLANs using VLANIF interfaces
SwitchA
Switch
Eth0/0/1
VLAN 10
VLAN 20
PC1
10.10.10.2/24 20.20.20.2/24
Department1
PC2
Department2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2 Eth0/0/3

1. Create VLANs on the switches for different departments.
2. Add Layer 2 interfaces to the VLANs so that packets of the VLANs can pass through the
Layer 2 interfaces.
3. On the Layer 3 switch, create VLANIF interfaces corresponding to the VLANs and
configure IP addresses for the VLANIF interfaces to implement Layer 3 communication.
NOTE
To implement communication between VLANs, hosts in each VLAN must use the IP address of the
corresponding VLANIF interface as gateway address.
110
Data Preparation
l Eth0/0/1 of the Switch needs to be added to VLAN 10 and VLAN 20.
l The IP address of VLANIF10 on the Switch is 10.10.10.1/24.
l The IP address of VLANIF20 on the Switch is 20.20.20.1/24.
l Eth0/0/1of SwitchA needs to be added to VLAN 10 and VLAN 20.
l Eth0/0/2 of SwitchA needs to be added to VLAN 10.
l Eth0/0/3 of SwitchA needs to be added to VLAN 20.
Procedure
Step 1 # Configure the Switch.
# Create VLANs.
# Add Eth0/0/1 to VLANs.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 20
# Assign IP addresses to VLANIF interfaces.
[Quidway] interface vlanif 10
[Quidway-Vlanif10] ip address 10.10.10.1 24
[Quidway-Vlanif10] quit
[Quidway-Vlanif20] ip address 20.20.20.1 24
Step 2 Configure SwitchA.
# Create VLANs.
# Add interfaces to VLANs.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 20
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/2] port link-type access
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/2] port default vlan 10
On PC1 in VLAN 10, set the default gateway address to 10.10.10.1/24, which is the IP address
of VLANIF10.
111
On PC2 in VLAN 20, set the default gateway address to 20.20.20.1/24, which is the IP address
of VLANIF20.
After the preceding configurations are complete, PC1 in VLAN 10 and PC2 in VLAN 20 can
communicate.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10 20
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0
#
interface Vlanif20
ip address 20.20.20.1 255.255.255.0
#
port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 20
#
return
Configuration file of SwitchA
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10 20
#
#
port default vlan 10
#
#
return
3.11.6 Example for Configuring VLAN Aggregation
This part describes how to configure communication between VLANs with less IP addresses.
Assume that an enterprise has many departments and IP addresses of these departments are on
the same network segment, to improve the service security, IP address of employee users in
different departments are added to different VLANs. Employee users in different departments
need to communicate with each other.
As shown in Figure 3-14, IP addresses of the R&D department and test department belong to
different VLANs. It is required that employee users in different VLANs communicate with each
other.
112
Figure 3-14 Typical networking of VLAN configuration
VLAN 2 VLAN 3
VLAN4
Switch
VLAN3 VLAN2
VLANIF4:100.1.1.12/24
Development
Department
Test
Department
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/4

1. Add interfaces of the Switch to sub-VLANs.
2. Add the sub-VLANs to a super-VLAN.
3. Configure the IP address for the super-VLAN.
4. Configure proxy ARP for the super-VLAN.
Data Preparation
l The VLAN ID of the super-VLAN is 4.
l The IP address of the super-VLAN is 100.1.1.12.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the interface type.
# Configure Eth 0/0/1 as an access interface.
113
Step 2 Configure VLAN 2.
# Create VLAN 2.
[Quidway] vlan 2
# Add Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to VLAN 2.
[Quidway-vlan2] port ethernet 0/0/1 0/0/2
# Create VLAN 3.
[Quidway] vlan 3
[Quidway-vlan3] port ethernet 0/0/3 0/0/4
# Configure the super-VLAN.
[Quidway] vlan 4
[Quidway-vlan4] aggregate-vlan
[Quidway-vlan4] access-vlan 2 to 3
# Configure the VLANIF interface.
[Quidway-Vlanif4] ip address 100.1.1.12 255.255.255.0
Step 5 Configure the personal computers.
Configure the IP address for each personal computer and make them reside in the same network
segment with VLAN 4.
After the preceding configuration, the personal computers and the Switch can ping each other,
but the computers in VLAN 2 and the computers in VLAN 3 cannot ping each other.
Step 6 Configure proxy ARP.
[Quidway-Vlanif4] arp-proxy inter-sub-vlan-proxy enable
114
After the preceding configuration, the computers in VLAN 2 and the computers in VLAN 3 can
ping each other.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 2 to 4
#
vlan 4
aggregate-vlan
access-vlan 2 to 3
#
interface Vlanif4
ip address 100.1.1.12 255.255.255.0
arp-proxy inter-sub-vlan-proxy enable
#
port default vlan 2
#
port default vlan 2
#
port default vlan 3
#
port default vlan 3
#
return
3.11.7 Example for Configuring the MUX VLAN
MUX VLAN isolates Layer 2 traffic of different interfaces in a VLAN. It allows some employee
users of an enterprise to communicate with each other and isolates some employee users from
each other.
In an enterprise network, all employees of the enterprise can access the enterprise's server. It is
required that some employees be able to communicate with each other, whereas some employees
not communicate with each other.
As shown in Figure 3-15, in an enterprise network, all employees of the enterprise can access
the enterprise's server. It is required that some employees be able to communicate with each
other, whereas some employees not communicate with each other.
For an enterprise with a large number of employees, each employee that is prohibited from
communicating with another needs to be added to a separate VLAN if the preceding scheme is
used. This wastes VLAN ID resources and imposes an additional configuration workload on the
network administrator.
115
Configuring a MUX VLAN on the switch connected to PCs helps to save VLAN ID resources,
reduce the configuration workload of the network administrator, and facilitate network
maintenance.
Figure 3-15 Typical networking of MUX VLAN configuration
VLAN3 VLAN4 VLAN2
HostA
HostE HostD HostC HostB
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3 Eth0/0/4 Eth0/0/5
Switch

1. Configure the MUX VLAN.
2. Configure the group VLAN.
3. Configure the separate VLAN.
4. Add interfaces to the VLAN and enable the MUX VLAN function.
Data Preparation
l Eth 0/0/1 belongs to VLAN 2.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the MUX VLAN.
# Create VLAN 2, VLAN 3, and VLAN 4.
[Quidway] vlan batch 2 3 4
[Quidway] quit
# Configure the MUX VLAN, subordinate VLAN, and interfaces.
[Quidway] vlan 2
[Quidway-vlan2] mux-vlan
[Quidway-vlan2] subordinate group 3
116
[Quidway-vlan2] subordinate separate 4
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port mux-vlan enable
Host A can ping Hosts B to E. Hosts B to E can also ping Host A.
Host B and Host C can ping each other.
Host D and Host E cannot ping each other.
Host B and Host C cannot ping Host D or host E. Host D and Host E cannot ping Host B or Host
C.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 2 to 4
#
vlan 2
mux-vlan
subordinate group 3
subordinate separate 4
#
port default vlan 2
#
port default vlan 3
#
117
port default vlan 3
#
port default vlan 4
#
port default vlan 4
#
return
3.11.8 Example for Configuring a Voice VLAN in Auto Mode
In this example, voice traffic is transmitted by using a specific VLAN, namely, voice VLAN.
During a certain period, if a voice device becomes faulty or exits from the network, the interface
connected to the voice device will exit from the voice VLAN.
Data flows of the HSI, VoIP, and IPTV services are transmitted on a network. Users require
high quality of VoIP services; therefore, voice data flows must be transmitted with a high priority
to ensure the call quality.
As shown in Figure 3-16, after a voice VLAN is configured on the Switch, the Switch checks
whether a data flow received by Ethernet0/0/1 is a voice data flow based on the source MAC
address of the flow. If the data flow is a voice data flow, the Switch changes the priority of the
flow and transmits it in the voice VLAN. If not, the Switch transmits the flow in a common
VLAN without changing the priority of the flow. Ethernet0/0/1 needs to be automatically added
to or deleted from the voice VLAN.
Figure 3-16 Networking diagram of a voice VLAN in auto mode
Switch
Internet
DHCP Server
HSI VoIP IPTV
Eth0/0/1
LAN Switch
118

1. Create VLANs.
2. Configure the link type and default VLAN of the interface.
3. Enable the voice VLAN on the interface.
4. Set the mode of adding the interface to the voice VLAN to auto.
5. Set the OUI of the voice VLAN.
6. Set the aging time of the voice VLAN.
7. Set the working mode of the voice VLAN.
Data Preparation
l Voice VLAN and VLAN through which the IP phone applies for an IP address: VLAN 2
and VLAN 6
l OUI and mask: 0011-2200-0000 and ffff-ff00-0000
l Aging time of the voice VLAN: 100 minutes
l The default VLAN of Ethernet0/0/1: VLAN 6
Procedure
Step 1 Create VLANs and configure the interface on the Switch.
# Create VLAN 2 and VLAN 6.
# Configure the link type and default VLAN of the interface.
Step 2 Configure the voice VLAN on the Switch.
# Configure the voice VLAN on the interface.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] voice-vlan 2 enable
# Set the mode of adding the interface to the voice VLAN to auto.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] voice-vlan mode auto
# Set the OUI of the voice VLAN.
[Quidway] voice-vlan mac-address 0011-2200-0000 mask ffff-ff00-0000
# Set the aging time of the voice VLAN.
[Quidway] voice-vlan aging-time 100
119
# Set the working mode of the voice VLAN.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] voice-vlan security enable
Run the display voice-vlan oui command to check whether the OUI of the voice VLAN is
correct.
<Quidway> display voice-vlan oui
---------------------------------------------------
OuiAddress Mask Description
---------------------------------------------------
0011-2200-0000 ffff-ff00-0000
Run the display voice-vlan 2 status command to check whether the mode of adding the interface
to the voice VLAN, working mode, and aging time of the voice VLAN are correct.
<Quidway> display voice-vlan 2 status
Voice VLAN Configurations:
---------------------------------------------------
Voice VLAN ID : 2
Voice VLAN status : Enable
Voice VLAN aging time : 100 (minutes)
Voice VLAN 8021p remark : 6
Voice VLAN dscp remark : 46
----------------------------------------------------------
Port Information:
-----------------------------------------------------------
Port Add-Mode Security-Mode Legacy
-----------------------------------------------------------
Ethernet0/0/1 Auto Security Disable
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 2 6
#
voice-vlan aging-time 100
#
voice-vlan mac-address 0011-2200-0000 mask ffff-ff00-0000
#
voice-vlan 2 enable
#
return
3.11.9 Example for Configuring a Voice VLAN in Manual Mode
In manual voice VLAN mode, an interface must be added to the voice VLAN manually after
the voice VLAN function is enabled on the interface. The interface connected to a voice device
can forward voice data packets only after the interface is added to the voice VLAN manually.
120
Data flows of the HSI, VoIP, and IPTV services are transmitted on a network. Users require
high quality of VoIP services; therefore, voice data flows must be transmitted with a high priority
to ensure the call quality.
As shown in Figure 3-17, after a voice VLAN is configured on the Switch, the Switch checks
whether a data flow received by Ethernet0/0/1 is a voice data flow based on the source MAC
address of the data flow. If the data flow is a voice data flow, the Switch changes the priority of
the flow and transmits it in the voice VLAN. If not, the Switch transmits the flow in a common
VLAN without changing the priority of the flow. Ethernet0/0/1 needs to be added to or deleted
from the voice VLAN manually.
Figure 3-17 Networking diagram of a voice VLAN in manual mode
Switch
Internet
DHCP Server
HSI VoIP IPTV
Eth0/0/1
LAN Switch

1. Create VLANs.
2. Configure the link type and default VLAN of the interface.
3. Enable the voice VLAN on the interface.
4. Set the mode of adding the interface to the voice VLAN to manual.
5. Set the OUI of the voice VLAN.
6. Set the working mode of the voice VLAN.
7. Add the interface to the voice VLAN.
121
Data Preparation
l Voice VLAN and VLAN through which the IP phone applies for an IP address: VLAN 2
and VLAN 6
l OUI and mask: 0011-2200-0000 and ffff-ff00-0000
l The default VLAN of Ethernet0/0/1: VLAN 6
Procedure
Step 1 Create VLANs and configure the interface on the Switch.
# Create VLAN 2 and VLAN 6.
# Configure the link type and default VLAN of the interface.
Step 2 Configure the voice VLAN on the Switch.
# Configure the voice VLAN on the interface.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] voice-vlan 2 enable
# Set the mode of adding the interface to the voice VLAN to manual and add the interface to the
voice VLAN.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] voice-vlan mode manual
# Set the OUI of the voice VLAN.
[Quidway] voice-vlan mac-address 0011-2200-0000 mask ffff-ff00-0000
# Set the working mode of the voice VLAN.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] voice-vlan security enable
Run the display voice-vlan oui command to check whether the OUI of the voice VLAN is
correct.
<Quidway> display voice-vlan oui
---------------------------------------------------
OuiAddress Mask Description
---------------------------------------------------
0011-2200-0000 ffff-ff00-0000
Run the display voice-vlan 2 status command to check whether the mode of adding the interface
to the voice VLAN, working mode, and aging time of the voice VLAN are correct.
<Quidway> display voice-vlan 2 status
Voice VLAN Configurations:
---------------------------------------------------
Voice VLAN ID : 2
122
Voice VLAN status : Enable
Voice VLAN aging time : 1440(minutes)
Voice VLAN 8021p remark : 6
Voice VLAN dscp remark : 46
----------------------------------------------------------
Port Information:
-----------------------------------------------------------
Port Add-Mode Security-Mode Legacy
-----------------------------------------------------------
Ethernet0/0/1 Manual Security Disable
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 2 6
#
voice-vlan mac-address 0011-2200-0000 mask ffff-ff00-0000
#
voice-vlan 2 enable
voice-vlan mode manual
#
return
123
4 VLAN Mapping Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the basic knowledge, methods, and examples for configuring VLAN
mapping.
4.1 Introduction to VLAN Mapping
This section describes the concept of VLAN mapping.
4.2 VLAN Mapping Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes VLAN mapping features supported by the S3700.
4.3 Configuring VLAN Mapping of Single VLAN Tag
This section describes how to configure VLAN mapping of single VLAN tag.
4.4 Configuring VLAN Mapping of Double VLAN Tags
This section describes how to configure mapping of double VLAN tags.
4.5 Configuring Global VLAN Mapping
This section describes how to configure global VLAN mapping.
This section provides several examples of VLAN mapping configuration.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 4 VLAN Mapping Configuration
124
4.1 Introduction to VLAN Mapping
This section describes the concept of VLAN mapping.
VLAN Mapping is a process of mapping the customer VLAN to the carrier VLAN by replacing
the inner and outer VLAN tags of data frames. In this manner, VLAN aggregation is realized,
and services of customers can be transmitted according to the network planning of the carrier.
4.2 VLAN Mapping Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes VLAN mapping features supported by the S3700.
The S3700 supports the following VLAN mapping features:
l Single-tag VLAN mapping based on the interface and VLAN
l Double-tag VLAN mapping based on the interface and VLAN
l Single-tag VLAN mapping based on the interface, VLAN, and 802.1p priority
l Global VLAN mapping
NOTE
Only the S3700HI supports double-tag VLAN mapping.
The S3700HI does not support global VLAN mapping.
4.3 Configuring VLAN Mapping of Single VLAN Tag
This section describes how to configure VLAN mapping of single VLAN tag.
When two private networks in different VLANs communicate with each other through a public
network, the user packets may carry the C-VLAN tag when reaching the ISP network. You can
configure VLAN mapping on the edge device of the public network so that the VLANs of private
networks are separated from VLANs of the public network. This saves VLAN resources of the
public network.
Before configuring VLAN mapping, complete the following task:
l Configuring VLANs
Data Preparation
To configure VLAN mapping, you need the following data.
125
No. Data
1 VLAN ID before VLAN mapping
2 VLAN ID after VLAN mapping

4.3.2 Replacing a Single Tag
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure single-tag VLAN mapping.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
The link type of the interface is set.
By default, the link type of an interface is hybrid.
Step 4 Run:
port trunk allow-pass vlan vlan-id
The interface is added to the VLAN specified by map-vlan.
Step 5 Run:
qinq vlan-translation enable
VLAN translation is enabled on the interface.
Step 6 Run:
port vlan-mapping vlan vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] map-vlan vlan-id3 [ remark-8021p
8021p-value ]
Single-tag VLAN mapping is configured on the interface.
126
NOTE
l VLAN mapping can only be configured on a trunk or hybrid interface, and the interface must be added
to the VLAN specified by map-vlan in tagged mode.
l If multiple VLANs are specified in vlan, the interface needs to be added to these VLANs in tagged
mode, and the VLAN specified by map-vlan cannot be a VLAN corresponding to a VLANIF interface.
l If VLAN mapping and DHCP are configured on the same interface, the interface must be added to the
original VLANs (VLANs before mapping) in tagged mode.
l Limiting MAC address learning on an interface may affect the N:1 VLAN mapping on the interface.
----End
Procedure
l Run the display vlan vlan-id command to check whether the interface is added to the
translated local VLAN.
l Run the display current-configuration command to display information about the VLAN
mapping of single VLAN tag on the interface.
Run the preceding command, and you can obtain the following information:
The interface is added to the translated local VLAN.
The information about the VLAN mapping is correct.
----End
4.4 Configuring VLAN Mapping of Double VLAN Tags
This section describes how to configure mapping of double VLAN tags.
When two private networks in different VLANs communicate with each other through a public
network, the user packets may carry one or two VLAN tags when arriving on the public network.
You can configure VLAN mapping of double VLAN tags on the edge device of the public
network so that the VLANs of private networks and public network can be separated. This saves
VLAN resources of the public network. Compared with VLAN mapping of single VLAN tag,
this function is more flexible and used in a wider scope.
NOTE
Only the S3700HI supports double-tag VLAN mapping.
l Before configuring outer-tag VLAN mapping, configure VLANs.
127
Data Preparation
To configure double-tag VLAN mapping, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Outer VLAN ID before VLAN mapping
2 Inner VLAN ID before VLAN mapping
3 Outer VLAN ID after VLAN mapping

4.4.2 Replacing the Outer VLAN Tag
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to replace the outer VLAN tags.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
The link type of the interface is set to trunk.
Step 4 Run:
port trunk allow-pass vlan vlan-id
The interface is added to the VLAN whose ID will replace the outer VLAN tag of frames.
Step 5 Run:
Step 6 Run:
port vlan-mapping vlan vlan-id1 inner-vlan vlan-id2 [ to vlan-id3 ] map-vlan vlan-
id4 [ remark-8021p 8021p-value ]
The outer VLAN tag is replaced.
NOTE
VLAN mapping can only be configured on a trunk or hybrid interface, and the interface must be added to
the VLAN specified by map-vlan in tagged mode.
----End
128
Procedure
l Run the display vlan vlan-id command to check whether the interface is added to the
translated local VLAN.
l Run the display current-configuration command to display information about the
mapping of double VLAN tags on the interface.
Run the preceding command, and you can obtain the following information:
The interface is added to the translated local VLAN.
The information about the VLAN mapping is correct.
----End
4.5 Configuring Global VLAN Mapping
This section describes how to configure global VLAN mapping.
To apply VLAN mapping to multiple interfaces, you can configure global VLAN mapping to
simplify configuration.
NOTE
The S3700HI does not support global VLAN mapping.
Before configuring global VLAN mapping, complete the following tasks:
l Creating the VLANs involved in VLAN mapping
l Adding the related interfaces to the translated VLAN in tagged mode
Data Preparations
To configure global VLAN mapping, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Original VLAN ID
2 Translated VLAN ID

4.5.2 Configuring Global VLAN Mapping
129
Context
Do as follows as the S3700 where global VLAN mapping needs to be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
vlan-mapping map-vlan vlan-id [ remark-8021p 8021p-value ]
Global VLAN mapping is configured.
NOTE
To enable global VLAN mapping to take effect on an interface, ensure that:
l The interface is a hybrid or trunk interface.
l The interface has been added to the translated VLAN in tagged mode.
l VLAN translation is enabled on the interface by using the qinq vlan-translation enable command.
----End
Procedure
l Run the display this command in the VLAN view to check the configuration of global
VLAN mapping.
----End
Example
Run the display this command in the VLAN view.
[Quidway-vlan10] display this
#
vlan 10
vlan-mapping map-vlan 20
#
return
This section provides several examples of VLAN mapping configuration.
4.6.1 Example for Configuring Single-Tag VLAN Mapping
130
As shown in Figure 4-1, users in VLAN 6 need to communicate with users in VLAN 5 through
VLAN 10 on the network.
Figure 4-1 Networking diagram of single-tag VLAN mapping configurations
VLAN10
SwitchC SwitchD
SwitchB SwitchA
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2
VLAN6
172.16.0.1/16 172.16.0.2/16 172.16.0.3/16 172.16.0.5/16 172.16.0.6/16 172.16.0.7/16
VLAN5
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Network

1. Create VLANs on SwitchA, SwitchB, SwitchC, and SwitchD.
2. Add interfaces of SwitchA, SwitchB, SwitchC, and SwitchD to the corresponding VLANs.
3. Configure single-tag VLAN mapping on Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchA.
4. Configure single-tag VLAN mapping on Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchB.
Data Preparation
l VLAN to be created on SwitchA: VLAN 6
l VLAN to be created on SwitchB: VLAN 5
l VLAN to be created on SwitchC and SwitchD: VLAN 10
Procedure
Step 1 Create VLANs on the Switches.
# Create VLAN 6 on SwitchA.
131
[SwitchA] vlan 6
# Create VLAN 5 on SwitchB.
[SwitchB] vlan 5
# Create VLAN 10 on SwitchC.
[Quidway] sysname SwitchC
[SwitchC] vlan 10
# Create VLAN 10 on SwitchD.
[Quidway] sysname SwitchD
[SwitchD] vlan 10
Step 2 Add interfaces to VLANs.
# Add Eth 0/0/2 and Eth 0/0/3 of SwitchA to VLAN 6.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] port link-type trunk
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 6
# Add Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchA to VLAN 6.
# Add Eth 0/0/2 and Eth 0/0/3 of SwitchB to VLAN 5.
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/2] port link-type trunk
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 5
# Add Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchB to VLAN 5.
# Add Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchC to VLAN 10.
[SwitchC] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type trunk
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
# Add Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchD to VLAN 10.
[SwitchD] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type trunk
132
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 10
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
Step 3 Configure single-tag VLAN mapping on the Switches.
# Configure single-tag VLAN mapping on Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchA.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] qinq vlan-translation enable
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-mapping vlan 10 map-vlan 6
# Configure single-tag VLAN mapping on Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchB.
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] qinq vlan-translation enable
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-mapping vlan 10 map-vlan 5
The hosts in VLAN 6 and the hosts in VLAN 5 can ping each other.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname SwitchA
#
vlan batch 6
#
port vlan-mapping vlan 10 map-vlan 6
#
#
#
return
#
sysname SwitchB
#
vlan batch 5
#
#
#
#
return
l Configuration file of SwitchC
133
#
sysname SwitchC
#
vlan batch 10
#
#
return
l Configuration file of SwitchD
#
sysname SwitchD
#
vlan batch 10
#
#
return
4.6.2 Example for Configuring N:1 VLAN Mapping
As shown in Figure 4-2, users in VLAN 100 to VLAN 110 connect to the Internet through the
aggregate switch of the carrier, that is, the Switch.
After user devices are powered on, they send service request packets to the switch of the carrier.
After the user devices pass the authentication, services can be used.
134
Figure 4-2 Networking diagram of N:1 VLAN mapping
Eth0/0/1 Switch

SwitchA
SwitchE
VLAN100~110
SwitchD SwitchC
SwitchB
Internet

1. Configure the VLANs before and after mapping.
2. Add Eth 0/0/1 of the Switch to the VLANs before and after mapping in tagged mode.
3. Configure VLAN mapping on Eth 0/0/1 of the Switch.
Data preparation
l VLANs before mapping: VLAN 100 to VLAN 110
l VLAN after mapping: VLAN 10
Procedure
# Create VLANs.
[Quidway] vlan batch 10 100 to 110
# Add related Eth 0/0/1 to the VLANs.
135
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid tagged vlan 10 100 to 110
# Configure VLAN mapping on Eth 0/0/1.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] qinq vlan-translation enable
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-mapping vlan 100 to 110 map-vlan 10
Users in VLAN 100 to VLAN 110 can connect to the Internet through the Switch.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10 100 to 110
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 10 100 to 110
port vlan-mapping vlan 100 to 110 map-vlan 10
#
return
4.6.3 Example for Configuring Global VLAN Mapping
As shown in Figure 4-3, users in VLAN 10 connect to network through the Switch.
136
Figure 4-3 Networking of global VLAN mapping
Switch
SwitchA
VLAN 10
SwitchD SwitchC SwitchB

Internet
VLAN 20

Eth0/0/1

1. Create the VLANs before and after mapping on the Switch.
2. Add Eth0/0/1 of the Switch to the translated VLAN in tagged mode.
3. Enable VLAN translation on Eth0/0/1 of the Switch.
4. Configure other downlink interfaces of the Switch in the same way.
5. Configuring global VLAN mapping on the Switch.
Data Preparations
l VLAN ID before VLAN mapping: VLAN 10
l Translated VLAN ID: VLAN 20
Procedure
# Create VLANs.
137
# Add Eth0/0/1 to the VLANs.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid tagged vlan 10 20
# Enable VLAN translation on Eth0/0/1.
# Configure global LAN mapping.
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidway-vlan10] vlan-mapping map-vlan 20 remark-8021p 5
Users in VLAN 10 can connect to the Internet through the Switch.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10 20
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 10 20
#
vlan-mapping map-vlan 20 remark-8021p 5
#
return
138
5 QinQ Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the basic knowledge, methods, and examples for configuring QinQ.
5.1 Concept of QinQ
This section describes the concept of QinQ.
5.2 QinQ Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the QinQ features supported by the S3700.
5.3 Configuring QinQ on an Interface
This section describes how to configure the interface type, the protocol used by the outer VLAN
tag, and the interface-based QinQ.
5.4 Configuring Selective QinQ
This section describes how to configure the interface type, the outer VLAN ID, and selective
QinQ.
5.5 Configuring QinQ Stacking on a VLANIF Interface
To log in to a remote device to manage it, configure QinQ stacking on the VLANIF interface
corresponding to the management VLAN on the remote device.
5.6 Setting the Protocol Type in the Outer VLAN Tag
This section describes how to set the protocol type in the outer VLAN tag on an interface.
This section provides several configuration examples of QinQ.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 5 QinQ Configuration
139
5.1 Concept of QinQ
This section describes the concept of QinQ.
The 802.1Q-in-802.1Q (QinQ) protocol is a Layer 2 tunneling protocol based on the IEEE
802.1Q technology. The frame transmitted on the public network has double 802.1Q tags. One
is a public tag and the other is a private tag. It is called the QinQ protocol.
The principle of QinQ is to encapsulate a private VLAN tag in a public VLAN tag; therefore, a
packet traverses the backbone network of the Internet service provider (ISP) carrying double
VLAN tags. By using the QinQ technology, the S3700 provides a simpler Layer 2 VPN tunnel
for users.
5.2 QinQ Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the QinQ features supported by the S3700.
Selective QinQ
The S3700 supports selective QinQ, which is extended on the basis of QinQ. Selective QinQ
enables an interface to add the outer VLAN tags with different public VLAN IDs to frames
according to the private VLAN IDs in the inner VLAN tags. This can differentiate various types
of users.
The S3700 not only supports selective QinQ based on the interface and VLAN, but also supports
flow-based selective QinQ.
For the commands related to flow-based selective QinQ, see the Quidway S3700 Series Ethernet
Switches Command Reference - QoS.
Protocols Used by Outer VLAN Tags
The protocols applied to outer VLAN tags vary according to the vendors. To interwork with
non-Huawei devices, the S3700 supports the selective setting of the protocols used by the outer
VLAN tags.
5.3 Configuring QinQ on an Interface
This section describes how to configure the interface type, the protocol used by the outer VLAN
tag, and the interface-based QinQ.
To separate the private network from the public network and save VLAN resources, you can
configure double 802.1q tags on a QinQ interface provided by the S3700. The inner VLAN tag
of the private network is distributed for the internal network such as the intranet; the outer VLAN
tag of the public network is distributed for the external network such as the ISP's network. In
140
this way, a maximum of 4094 x 4094 VLAN tags are provided to enable transparent transmission
of the packets from different private network users with the same VLAN ID.
None
Data Preparation
To configure QinQ on the interface, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number of the QinQ interface
2 (Optional) Protocol used by the outer VLAN tag
3 Outer VLAN ID

5.3.2 Setting the Link Type of an Interface
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 to be configured with interface QinQ.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
port link-type dot1q-tunnel
The link type of the interface is set to dot1q-tunnel.
Dot1q-tunnel interfaces do not support Layer 2 multicast.
----End
5.3.3 Specifying the Outer VLAN ID
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 to be configured with interface QinQ.
141
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
The VLAN is created.
Step 3 Run:
quit
Step 4 Run:
Step 5 Run:
port default vlan vlan-id
The VLAN ID (default VLAN) of the outer VLAN tag is set.
----End
Procedure
l Run the display current-configuration interface interface-type interface-number
command to display the QinQ configuration on the interface.
----End
5.4 Configuring Selective QinQ
This section describes how to configure the interface type, the outer VLAN ID, and selective
QinQ.
To enable users to communicate through the ISP network, user packets are added an outer VLAN
tag.
None
142
Data Preparation
To configure selective QinQ, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number of the interface to be configured with selective QinQ
2 Inner VLAN ID
3 Outer VLAN ID

5.4.2 Setting the Link Type of an Interface
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 to be configured with selective QinQ:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
port link-type hybrid
The link type of the interface is set to hybrid.
----End
5.4.3 Adding an Outer VLAN Tag
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to configure selective QinQ.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
143
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
port hybrid untagged vlan vlan-id
The interface is added to the stacked VLAN in untagged mode.
The stacked outer VLAN must a VLAN existing on the S3700, but the VLANs before VLAN
stacking do not need to be created on the S3700.
----End
5.4.4 Configuring Selective QinQ
Context
An interface learns the MAC address from the outer VLAN tag of a QinQ packet.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
Step 4 Run:
port vlan-stacking vlan vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] stack-vlan vlan-id3 [
remark-8021p 8021p-value ]
The selective QinQ is configured. The meanings of the parameters are as follows:
l vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] specifies the C-VLAN IDs of packets to which you need to add an
outer VLAN tag.
l stack-vlan vlan-id3 specifies the VLAN ID in the outer VLAN tag to be added.
l [ remark-8021p 8021p-value ] specifies the internal priority in the stacked outer VLAN tag.
By default, the priority in the stacked outer VLAN tag is the same as the priority in the inner
VLAN tag.
----End
144
Procedure
command to display the selective QinQ configuration on the interface.
----End
5.5 Configuring QinQ Stacking on a VLANIF Interface
Before configuring QinQ stacking on a VLANIF interface, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the data required for
the configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
As shown in Figure 5-1, SwitchA is connected to SwitchB through a third-party network. The
management VLAN on SwitchB is the same as the VLAN for users connected to SwitchA. The
VLAN ID provided by the carrier, however, is different from the management VLAN ID.
Figure 5-1 Networking for QinQ stacking on a VLANIF interface
Internet
SwitchA
SwitchB
user1
user2
VLAN 10
IP 10
IP 10 20
Management VLAN 10
Interface VLANIF 10

To log in to SwitchB to manage it from SwitchA, you can configure QinQ stacking on the
VLANIF interface corresponding to the management VLAN on SwitchB.
After QinQ stacking is configured, data frames are processed as follows:
l Frames sent from SwitchA to SwitchB
The user-side interface of SwitchA, which is configured with QinQ, sends double-tagged
frames to the ISP network. The outer VLAN tag is assigned by the carrier so that the frames
can be transparently transmitted across the ISP network to SwitchB.
145
When SwitchB receives double-tagged frames, it compares the VLAN tags of the frames
with the VLAN tags configured on the VLANIF interface. If the outer tag of the frames is
the same as the outer tag configured on the VLANIF interface, SwitchB removes the outer
tag and sends the frames to the IP layer for processing.
l Frames sent from SwitchB to SwitchA
When the VLANIF interface of SwitchB receives data frames, SwitchB adds a VLAN tag
to the frames according to the QinQ stacking configuration. The new outer VLAN tag is
assigned by the carrier so that the double-tagged data frames can be transparently
transmitted to SwitchA across the ISP network. SwitchA removes the outer VLAN tag of
the frames and forwards the frames to users.
Before configuring QinQ stacking on a VLANIF interface, complete the following tasks:
l Creating VLANs
l Configuring the management VLAN
Data Preparations
To configure QinQ stacking on a VLANIF interface, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 VLAN IDs

5.5.2 Configuring QinQ Stacking on a VLANIF Interface
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The VLANIF interface corresponding to the management VLAN is created.
Before running this command, ensure that the management VLAN exists.
Step 3 Run:
qinq stacking vlan vlan-id
QinQ stacking is configured on the VLANIF interface.
146
NOTE
l When configuring QinQ stacking on a VLANIF interface, ensure that the VLANIF interface
corresponds to the management VLAN. VLANIF interfaces corresponding to other VLANs do not
support QinQ stacking.
l To change the configured outer VLAN tag, run the undo qinq stacking vlan command to disable QinQ
stacking, and then run the qinq stacking vlan command to configure a new outer VLAN tag.
l The qinq stacking vlan command conflicts with the icmp host-unreachable send command.
Therefore, you must run the undo icmp host-unreachable send command before using the qinq
stacking vlan command.
----End
After QinQ stacking is configured on the VLANIF interface of the remote device, you can log
in to the remote device to manage it from the local device.
Prerequisite
The configurations of QinQ stacking on the VLANIF interface are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display vlan [ vlan-id [ verbose ] ] command to check whether the management VLAN
is configured correctly.
Step 2 Run the display this command in the VLANIF interface view to check whether QinQ stacking
is configured correctly.
----End
5.6 Setting the Protocol Type in the Outer VLAN Tag
This section describes how to set the protocol type in the outer VLAN tag on an interface.
To enable the S3700 to communicate with devices of other vendors, you need to set a protocol
type that can be identified by the peer device in the outer VLAN tag.
None.
Data Preparation
To set the protocol type in the outer VLAN tag, you need the following data.
147
No. Data
1 Interface number
2 Protocol type in the outer VLAN tag

5.6.2 Configuring the Type of an Interface
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to set the protocol type in the outer VLAN tag.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
port link-type { hybrid | trunk | access }
The interface type is configured.
By default, the interface type is hybrid.
----End
5.6.3 Setting the Protocol Type in the Outer VLAN Tag
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 where you need to set the protocol type in the outer VLAN tag.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
qinq protocol protocol-id
148
The protocol type of the outer VLAN tag is set.
The qinq protocol command cannot be used on a QinQ interface.
The qinq protocol command is used to identify incoming frames and add or change TPID for
outgoing frames.
By default, the protocol type in the outer VLAN tag is 0x8100.
NOTE
l To implement the connectivity between the devices of different vendors, the protocol type in the outer
VLAN tag must be identified by the peer device.
l The protocol IDs set by the qinq protocol command cannot be the same as well-known protocol IDs.
Otherwise, the interface cannot distinguish packets of these protocols. For example, protocol-id cannot
be set to 0x0806, which is the ARP protocol ID.
----End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display current-configuration interface interface-type interface-number command to
display protocol type in the outer VLAN tag set on an interface.
----End
This section provides several configuration examples of QinQ.
5.7.1 Example for Configuring QinQ on Interfaces
As shown in Figure 5-2, there are two enterprises on the network, namely, Enterprise 1 and
Enterprise 2. Enterprise 1 has two office locations; Enterprise 2 has three office locations. The
office locations of the two enterprises access SwitchG or SwitchF of the ISP network. The
network of Enterprise 1 is divided into VLAN 1000 to VLAN 1500; the network of Enterprise
2 is divided into VLAN 2000 to VLAN 3000. It is required that employees in the same VLAN
can communicate with each other through the ISP network but the two enterprises are isolated
from each other.
149
Figure 5-2 Networking diagram for configuring QinQ on interfaces
VLAN1500
VLAN1000
VLAN3000
VLAN2000
Enterprise 2
VLAN3000
VLAN2000
Enterprise 2
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/4
Eth0/0/3
VLAN3000
VLAN2000 VLAN1500
VLAN1000
Enterprise 1 Enterprise1 Enterprise 2
Eth0/0/1
SwitchG
SwitchF
Eth0/0/2

1. Create VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 on SwitchF; create VLAN 20 on SwitchG.
2. Configure Eth 0/0/1, Eth 0/0/2, and Eth 0/0/3 of SwitchF as QinQ interfaces.
3. Configure Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 of SwitchG as QinQ interfaces.
4. Add Eth 0/0/4 of SwitchF and Eth 0/0/3 of SwitchG to VLAN 20 in tagged mode.
Data Preparation
l VLAN 10 assigned to Enterprise 1 on the ISP network
l VLAN 20 assigned to Enterprise 2 on the ISP network.
Procedure
# Create VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 on SwitchF.
150
[Quidway] sysname SwitchF
[SwitchF] vlan batch 10 20
# Create VLAN 20 on SwitchG.
[Quidway] sysname SwitchG
[SwitchG] vlan 20
Step 2 Configure the interfaces as QinQ interfaces.
# Configure Eth 0/0/1, Eth 0/0/2, and Eth 0/0/3 of SwitchF as QinQ interfaces. Set the VLAN
ID of the outer VLAN tag added by Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/3/ to VLAN 10; set the VLAN ID of
the outer VLAN tag added by Eth 0/0/2 to VLAN 20.
[SwitchF] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchF-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type dot1q-tunnel
[SwitchF-Ethernet0/0/1] port default vlan 10
[SwitchF-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
# Set Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 of SwitchG as QinQ interfaces; set the VLAN ID of the outer
VLAN tags added by Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2/ to VLAN 20.
[SwitchG] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchG-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type dot1q-tunnel
[SwitchG-Ethernet0/0/1] port default vlan 20
[SwitchG-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
[SwitchG-Ethernet0/0/2] port link-type dot1q-tunnel
[SwitchG-Ethernet0/0/2] port default vlan 20
Step 3 Configure other interfaces.
# Add Eth 0/0/4 of SwitchF to VLAN 20.
[SwitchF-Ethernet0/0/4] port link-type trunk
[SwitchF-Ethernet0/0/4] port trunk allow-pass vlan 20
# Add Eth 0/0/3 of SwitchG to VLAN 20.
[SwitchG-Ethernet0/0/3] port link-type trunk
[SwitchG-Ethernet0/0/3] port trunk allow-pass vlan 20
Ping a remote host on the same VLAN in another office location of Enterprise 1 from a host of
Enterprise 1. If it can ping the remote host, hosts in different locations of Enterprise 1 can
Ping a remote host on the same VLAN in another office location of Enterprise 2 from a host of
Enterprise 2. If it can ping the remote host, hosts in different locations of Enterprise 2 can
151
Ping a host of Enterprise 2 from a host in any office location of Enterprise 1. If it fails to ping
the host of Enterprise 2, the two enterprises are isolated from each other.
----End
Configuration Files
The following lists the configuration files of the Switch.
l Configuration file of SwitchF
#
sysname SwitchF
#
vlan batch 10 20
#
#
#
#
#
return
l Configuration file of SwitchG
#
sysname SwitchG
#
vlan batch 20
#
#
#
#
return
5.7.2 Example for Configuring Selective QinQ
As shown in Figure 5-3, common Internet access users (using PCs) and IPTV users (using IPTV
terminals) connect to the carrier network through Switch A and Switch B and communicate with
each other through the carrier network.
It is required that packets of PCs and IPTV terminals are tagged VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 when
the packets are transmitted through the carrier network.
152
Figure 5-3 Networking for configuring selective QinQ
PC
PC
IPTV IPTV
Network
Eth0/0/2 Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/1
SwitchA SwitchB

1. Create VLANs on Switch A and Switch B.
2. Configure types of interfaces on Switch A and Switch B, and add the interfaces to
corresponding VLANs.
3. Configure selective QinQ on interfaces of Switch A and Switch B.
Data Preparation
l VLANs that PCs belong to: VLAN 100 to VLAN 200
l VLANs that IPTV terminals belong to: VLAN 300 to VLAN 400
l VLAN tag that packets of PCs carry on the carrier network: VLAN 2
l VLAN tag that packets of IPTV terminals carry on the carrier network: VLAN 3
Procedure
# On Switch A, create VLAN 2 and VLAN 3, that is, the outer VLAN IDs added to packets on
the carrier network.
[SwitchA] vlan batch 2 3
# On Switch B, create VLAN 2 and VLAN 3, that is, the outer VLAN IDs added to packets on
the carrier network.
[SwitchB] vlan batch 2 3
Step 2 Configure selective QinQ on interfaces of Switch A and Switch B.
153
# Configure Eth 0/0/1 of Switch A.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 2 3
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] qinq vlan-translation enable
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-stacking vlan 100 to 200 stack-vlan 2
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-stacking vlan 300 to 400 stack-vlan 3
# Configure Eth 0/0/1 of Switch B.
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type hybrid
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 2 3
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] qinq vlan-translation enable
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-stacking vlan 100 to 200 stack-vlan 2
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-stacking vlan 300 to 400 stack-vlan 3
Step 3 Configure other interfaces.
# Add Eth 0/0/2 of Switch A to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 3
# Add Eth 0/0/2 of Switch B to VLAN 2 and VLAN 3.
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 2 3
# View the configuration of each interface on Switch A.
<SwitchA> display current-configuration interface ethernet 0/0/1
#
port hybrid untagged vlan 2 to 3
port vlan-stacking vlan 100 to 200 stack-vlan 2
#
return
<SwitchA> display current-configuration interface ethernet 0/0/2
#
#
return
# View the configuration of each interface on Switch B.
<SwitchB> display current-configuration interface ethernet 0/0/1
#
#
return
<SwitchB> display current-configuration interface ethernet 0/0/2
#
154
#
return
If Switch A and Switch B are configured correctly:
l PCs can communicate with each other through the carrier network.
l IPTV terminals can communicate with each other through the carrier network.
----End
Configuration Files
Only the configuration files of the Switches are provided:
l Configuration file of Switch A
#
sysname SwitchA
#
vlan batch 2 to 3
#
#
#
return
l Configuration file of Switch B
#
sysname SwitchB
#
vlan batch 2 to 3
#
#
#
return
5.7.3 Example for Configuring Selective QinQ with VLAN
Mapping
As shown in Figure 5-4, the Internet access, IPTV, and VoIP services are provided for users
through home gateways.
The corridor switches allocate VLANs to the services as follows:
155
l VLANs for the Internet access service of different users: VLAN 1000 to VLAN 1100
l Shared VLAN for the IPTV service: VLAN 1101
l Shared VLAN for the VoIP service: VLAN 1102
l Shared VLAN for home gateways: VLAN 1103
Each community switch is connected to 50 downstream corridor switches and maps the VLAN
IDs in the packets of the Internet access service from the corridor switches to VLAN 101 to
VLAN 150.
The aggregate switch of the carrier is connected to 50 downstream community switches and
adds outer VLAN IDs 21 to 70 to the packets sent from the community switches.
After user devices are powered on, they send service request packets to the switch of the carrier.
After the user devices pass the authentication, services can be used.
Figure 5-4 Networking for configuring selective QinQ

Community
switch
Corridor
switch
Home
gateway
SwitchA
Aggregate switch of carrier
SwitchB
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Internet
Eth0/0/2

ME60

1. Create VLANs on SwitchA and SwitchB.
2. Configure VLAN mapping on SwitchB and add Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to the VLANs.
3. Configure selective QinQ on SwitchA and add Eth 0/0/1 to VLANs.
4. Add other downlink interfaces of SwitchA and SwitchB to the VLANs. The configurations
are similar to the configurations of their Eth 0/0/1 interfaces.
5. Configure other community switches. The configuration is similar to the configuration on
SwitchB.
156
Data preparation
l VLANs to which Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchB is added in tagged mode: VLAN 1000 to VLAN
1100, VLAN 1101, VLAN 1102, VLAN 1103, and VLAN 101
l VLANs to which Eth 0/0/2 of SwitchB is added in tagged mode: VLAN 101 to VLAN 150,
VLAN 1101, VLAN 1102, and VLAN 1103
l VLANs to which Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchA is added in tagged mode: VLAN 1101, VLAN 1102,
and VLAN 1103
l VLANs to which Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchA is added in untagged mode: VLAN 21
l Interface on SwitchB where VLAN mapping is configured: Eth 0/0/1
l Interface on SwitchA where selective QinQ is configured: Eth 0/0/1
Procedure
Step 1 # Configure SwitchA.
# Create VLANs.
[Quidway] vlan batch 21 to 70 1101 to 1103
# Add related Eth 0/0/1 to the VLANs.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid tagged vlan 1101 to 1103
# Configure selective QinQ on Eth 0/0/1.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-stacking vlan 101 to 150 stack-vlan 21
Step 2 # Configure SwitchB.
# Create VLANs.
[Quidway] vlan batch 101 to 150 1000 to 1103
# Add Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to the VLANs.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid tagged vlan 101 1000 to 1103
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/2] port hybrid tagged vlan 101 to 150 1101 to 1103
# Configure VLAN mapping on Eth 0/0/1.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-mapping vlan 1000 to 1100 map-vlan 101
157
The Internet access service, IPTV service, and VoIP service can be used.
----End
Configuration Files
Configuration file of SwitchA
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 21 to 70 1101 to 1103
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 1101 to 1103
#
return
Configuration file of SwitchB
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 101 to 150 1000 to 1103
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 101 1000 to 1103
port vlan-mapping vlan 1000 to 1100 map-vlan 101
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 101 to 150 1101 to 1103
#
return
5.7.4 Example for Configuring QinQ Stacking on the VLANIF
Interface
In this networking, the management VLAN is deployed on the remote server and the VLAN ID
of Switch A is the same as the management VLAN ID. The VLAN ID provided by the carrier,
however, is different from the management VLAN ID. To remotely log in to the remote server
for managing VLAN services on Switch A, you can configure VLAN stacking according to this
example.
As shown in Figure 5-5, Switch A is connected to the remote server through the third-party
network. The management VLAN is deployed on the remote server and the VLAN ID that the
downstream user connected to Switch A belongs to is the same as the management VLAN ID.
The VLAN ID provided by the carrier, however, is different from the management VLAN ID.
158
Figure 5-5 Networking diagram for configuring QinQ stacking on the VLANIF interface
Internet
SwitchA
Server
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
user1
VLAN 10
IP 10
IP 10 20
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
SwitchC

To remotely log in to the remote server for managing VLAN services on Switch A, you can
configure QinQ stacking on the VLANIF interface corresponding to the management VLAN on
Switch B.
NOTE
The VLANIF interface where QinQ stacking is configured must correspond to the management VLAN.
This is because other types of VLANs do not support QinQ stacking.
1. Configure QinQ on Switch A.
2. Do as follows on the remote server:
(1) Create VLAN 10 and configure VLAN 10 as the management VLAN.
(2) Create a VLANIF interface on VLAN 10.
(3) Configure QinQ stacking on the VLANIF interface.
Data Preparation
l Outer tag that Switch A adds to data frames
l Management VLAN ID on the remote server
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Switch C.
# Configure Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to allow packets from VLAN 10 to pass through.
[SwitchC] vlan batch 10
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid tagged vlan 10
159
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/2] port hybrid tagged vlan 10
Step 2 Configure Switch A.
# Configure QinQ so that the frames sent from Switch A to the remote server carry double tags.
[SwitchA] vlan batch 20
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-stacking vlan 10 stack-vlan 20
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 20
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] port hybrid tagged vlan 20
Step 3 Configure the remote server.
# Configure Eth 0/0/2 to allow frames from VLAN 20 to pass through.
[Quidway] sysname Server
[Server] vlan batch 10 20
[Server] interface ethernet 0/0/2
[Server-Ethernet0/0/2] port hybrid tagged vlan 20
[Server-Ethernet0/0/2] quit
# Configure QinQ stacking.
[Server] vlan 10
[Server-vlan10] management-vlan
[Server-vlan10] quit
[Server] interface vlanif 10
[Server-Vlanif10] undo icmp host-unreachable send
[Server-Vlanif10] qinq stacking vlan 20
[Server-Vlanif10] ip address 10.10.10.1 24
[Server-Vlanif10] quit
[Server] interface ethernet 0/0/2
[Server-Ethernet0/0/2] port hybrid tagged vlan 10 20
You can log in to the remote server for managing VLAN services on Switch A.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname SwitchA
#
vlan batch 20
#
interface Ethernet 0/0/1
port vlan-stacking vlan 10 stack-vlan 20
#
#
return
l Configuration file of Switch C
160
#
sysname SwitchC
#
vlan batch 10
#
#
#
return
l Configuration file of the remote server
#
sysname Server
#
vlan batch 10 20
#
vlan 10
management-vlan
#
interface Vlanif10
ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0
undo icmp host-unreachable send
qinq stacking vlan 20
#
#
return
161
6 GVRP Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes basic concepts involved in GVRP, GVRP configuration procedures, and
concludes with a GVRP configuration example.
6.1 GVRP Overview
This section explains the concepts of Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) and GARP
VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP), and how they relate to each another.
6.2 GVRP Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the GVRP features supported by the S3700.
6.3 Configuring GVRP
This section describes how to configure the GVRP function.
6.4 Maintaining GVRP
This section describes how to clear the statistics about GARP.
This section provides configuration examples of GVRP.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 6 GVRP Configuration
162
6.1 GVRP Overview
This section explains the concepts of Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) and GARP
VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP), and how they relate to each another.
GVRP
GVRP is an application of GARP that maintains and propagates VLAN registration information
to other devices.
GARP
GARP enables member switches on a LAN to distribute, transmit, and register information such
as VLAN information and multicast addresses with one another.
GARP is not an entity on a device. GARP-compliant entities are called GARP participants.
GVRP is a GARP application. When a GARP application runs on an interface, the interface is
considered a GARP participant.
l GARP messages and timers
GARP messages
GARP members transmit VLAN registration information by exchanging GARP
messages. The three main GARP messages are Join, Leave, and LeaveAll.
When a GARP participant expects other devices to register its attributes, it sends
Join messages to other devices. When the GARP participant receives a Join message
from another participant or is configured with attributes statically, it also sends Join
messages to other devices for the devices to register the new attributes.
When a GARP participant expects other devices to deregister its attributes, it sends
Leave messages to other devices. When the GARP participant receives a Leave
message from another participant or some of its attributes are deregistered statically,
it also sends Leave messages to other devices.
When a GARP participant is enabled, the LeaveAll timer is started. When the
LeaveAll timer expires, the GARP participant sends LeaveAll messages to request
other GARP participants to deregister all the attributes of the sender. Then other
participants can re-register the attributes.
The Join, Leave, and LeaveAll messages are used to control registration and
deregistration of attributes.
Through GARP messages, all attributes that need to be registered are sent to all the
GARP-enabled devices on the same LAN.
GARP timers
The intervals for sending GARP messages are controlled by GARP timers. GARP
defines four timers to control the intervals for sending GARP messages.
Hold timer: When a GARP participant receives a registration message from another
participant, it does not send the registration message in a Join message to other
participants immediately. Instead, the participant starts the Hold timer. When the
Hold timer expires, the participant packs all the registration messages received
within this period in a Join message and sends the Join message to other participants.
This saves bandwidth on the network.
163
Join timer: To ensure reliable transmission of Join messages, a participant can send
each Join message twice. If the participant does not receive the response after
sending the Join message the first time, it sends the Join message again. The Join
timer specifies the interval between the two Join messages.
Leave timer: When a GARP participant expects other participants to deregister its
attribute, it sends Leave messages to other participants. When another participant
receives the Leave message, it starts the Leave timer. If the participant does not
receive any Join message before the Leave timer expires, it deregisters the attributes
of the Leave message sender.
LeaveAll timer: When a GARP participant is enabled, the LeaveAll timer is started.
When the LeaveAll timer expires, the GARP participant sends LeaveAll messages
to request other GARP participants to re-register all its attributes. Then the LeaveAll
timer restarts.
NOTE
l The GARP timers apply to all GARP participants (such as GVRP) on the same LAN.
l The Hold timer, Join timer, and Leave timer must be set individually on each interface,
whereas the LeaveAll timer is set globally and takes effect on all interfaces of a device.
l Devices on a network may have different settings of the LeaveAll timer. In this case, all the
devices use the smallest LeaveAll timer value on the network. When the LeaveAll timer of
a device expires, the device sends LeaveAll messages to other devices. After other devices
receive the LeaveAll messages, they reset their LeaveAll timers. Therefore, only the
LeavelAll timer with the smallest value takes effect even if devices have different settings
of the LeaveAll timer.
l GARP operation process
Through GARP, the configuration information of a GARP member can be propagated on
the entire LAN. A GARP member may be a terminal workstation or a bridge. A GARP
member sends an attribute declaration or an attribute reclaim declaration to request other
GARP members to register or deregister its attributes. The GARP member can also register
or deregister attributes of other members when receiving attribute declarations or attribute
reclaim declarations from other members. When an interface receives an attribute
declaration, it registers the attribute. When the interface receives an attribute reclaim
declaration, the interface deregisters the attribute.
PDUs sent from a GARP participant use a multicast MAC address as the destination MAC
address. When a device receives a packet from a GARP participant, the device identifies
the packet according to the destination MAC address of the packet and sends the packet to
the corresponding GARP participant (such as GVRP).
l Format of a GARP packet
Figure 6-1 shows the format of a GARP packet.
164
Figure 6-1 Format of a GARP packet
DA SA length DSAP SSAP Ctrl PDU
Protocol ID Message 1

Message N End Mark
Attribute Type Attribute List
Attribute 1 End Mark Attribute N
Attribute Length Attribute Event Attribute Value

Ethernet Frame
GARP PDU structure
1
1
1
1
N
N
N
N
3
2
2
3
Message structure
Attribute List structure
Attribute structure

The following table describes the fields in a GARP packet.
Field Description Value
Protocol ID Indicates the protocol ID. The value is 1.
Message Indicates the messages in
the packet. A message
consists of the Attribute
Type and Attribute List
fields.
-
Attribute Type Indicates the type of an
attribute, which is defined
by the GARP application.
The value is 0x01 for
GVRP, indicating that the
attribute value is a VLAN
ID.
Attribute List Indicates the attribute list,
which consists of multiple
attributes.
-
Attribute Indicates an attribute,
which consists of the
Attribute Length, Attribute
Event, and Attribute Value
fields.
-
Attribute Length Indicates the length of an
attribute.
The value ranges from 2 to
255, in bytes.
165
Field Description Value
Attribute Event Indicates the event that an
attribute describes. The
value can be:
l 0: LeaveAll event
l 1: JoinEmpty event
l 2: JoinIn event
l 3: LeaveEmpty event
l 4: LeaveIn event
l 5: Empty event
Attribute Value Indicates the value of an
attribute.
The value is a VLAN ID for
GVRP. This field is invalid
in a LeaveAll attribute.
End Mark Indicates the end of a
GARP PDU.
The value is 0x00.

6.2 GVRP Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the GVRP features supported by the S3700.
GVRP is an application of GARP. Based on the working mechanism of GARP, GVRP maintains
dynamic VLAN registration information in a device and propagates the registration information
to other devices.
After GVRP is enabled on the S3700, the S3700 can receive VLAN registration information
from other devices and dynamically update local VLAN registration information. VLAN
registration information includes which VLAN members are on the VLAN and through which
interfaces their packets can be sent to the S3700. The S3700 can also send the local VLAN
registration information to other devices. By exchanging VLAN registration information, all the
devices on the same LAN have the same VLAN information. The VLAN registration
information transmitted through GVRP contains both static local registration information that
is manually configured and the dynamic registration information from other devices.
A GVRP interface supports three registration modes:
l Normal: In this mode, the GVRP interface can dynamically register and deregister VLANs,
and transmit dynamic VLAN registration information and static VLAN registration
information.
l Fixed: In this mode, the GVRP interface is disabled from dynamically registering and
deregistering VLANs and can transmit only the static registration information. If the
registration mode of a trunk interface is set to fixed, the interface allows only the manually
configured VLANs to pass even if it is configured to allow all the VLANs to pass.
l Forbidden: In this mode, the GVRP interface is disabled from dynamically registering and
deregistering VLANs and can transmit only information about VLAN 1. If the registration
mode of a trunk interface is set to forbidden, the interface allows only VLAN 1 to pass even
if it is configured to allow all the VLANs to pass.
NOTE
The S3700 supports a maximum of 4094 dynamic VLANs.
The GVRP protocol can run only in the Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) instance. The interface
blocked by MSTP in the CIST instance cannot send or receive GVRP packets.
166
6.3 Configuring GVRP
This section describes how to configure the GVRP function.
On a complicated Layer 2 network, you can enable interfaces to dynamically join or leave
VLANs by configuring the GVRP function. This simplifies the configuration
Before configuring the GVRP function, complete the following task:
l Adding the GVRP interfaces to all VLANs
l Configuring the interface to send BPDUs to the CPU
Data Preparation
To configure the GVRP function, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 (Optional) Registration mode of GVRP interfaces
2 (Optional) Values of GARP timers

6.3.2 Enabling GVRP
Context
Do as follows on the S3700 to enable GVRP.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
gvrp
GVRP is enabled globally.
Step 3 Run:
167
Step 4 Run:
The link type of the interface is set to trunk.
Step 5 Run:
port trunk allow-pass vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] }&<1-10> | all }
The interface is added to the specified VLANs.
Step 6 Run:
gvrp
GVRP is enabled on the interface.
By default, GVRP is disabled globally and on each interface.
NOTE
l Before enabling GVRP on an interface, you must enable GVRP globally.
l Before enabling GVRP on an interface, you must set the link type of the interface to trunk.
----End
6.3.3 (Optional) Setting the Registration Mode of a GVRP Interface
Context
A GVRP interface supports three registration modes:
l Normal: In this mode, the GVRP interface can dynamically register and deregister VLANs,
and transmit dynamic VLAN registration information and static VLAN registration
information.
l Fixed: In this mode, the GVRP interface is disabled from dynamically registering and
deregistering VLANs and can transmit only the static registration information. If the
registration mode of a trunk interface is set to fixed, the interface allows only the manually
configured VLANs to pass even if it is configured to allow all the VLANs to pass.
l Forbidden: In this mode, the GVRP interface is disabled from dynamically registering and
deregistering VLANs and can transmit only information about VLAN 1. If the registration
mode of a trunk interface is set to forbidden, the interface allows only VLAN 1 even if it
is configured to allow all the VLANs.
Do as follows on the S3700 to set the registration mode of interfaces.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
168
Step 3 Run:
gvrp registration { fixed | forbidden | normal }
The registration mode of the interface is set.
By default, the registration type of a GVRP interface is normal.
NOTE
Before setting the registration mode of an interface, you need to enable GVRP on the interface.
----End
6.3.4 (Optional) Setting the GARP Timers
Context
When a GARP participant is enabled, the LeaveAll timer is started. When the LeaveAll timer
expires, the GARP participant sends LeaveAll messages to request other GARP participants to
re-register all its attributes. Then the LeaveAll timer restarts.
Devices on a network may have different settings of the LeaveAll timer. In this case, all the
devices use the smallest LeaveAll timer value on the network. When the LeaveAll timer of a
device expires, the device sends LeaveAll messages to other devices. After other devices receive
the LeaveAll messages, they reset their LeaveAll timers. Therefore, only the LeavelAll timer
with the smallest value takes effect even if devices have different settings of the LeaveAll timer.
When using the garp timer command to set the GARP timers, pay attention to the following
points:
l The undo garp timer command restores the default values of the GARP timers. If the
default value of a timer is out of the valid range, the undo garp timer command does not
take effect.
l The value range of each timer changes with the values of the other timers. If a value you
set for a timer is not in the allowed range, you can change the value of the timer that
determines the value range of this timer.
l To restore the default values of all the GARP timers, restore the Hold timer to the default
value, and then restore the Join timer, Leave timer, and LeaveAll timer to the default values
in sequence.
NOTE
In actual application, it is recommended that you use the following values of the GVRP timers:
l GARP Hold timer: 100 centiseconds (1 second)
l GARP Join timer: 600 centiseconds (6 seconds)
l GARP Leave timer: 3000 centiseconds (30 seconds)
l GARP LeaveAll timer: 12000 centiseconds (2 minutes)
When the number of dynamic VLANs increases, lengths of the GARP timers need to be increased.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
169
Step 2 Run:
garp timer leaveall timer-value
The value of the LeaveAll timer is set.
The default value of the LeaveAll timer is 1000 centiseconds (10 seconds).
Step 3 Run:
Step 4 Run:
garp timer { hold | join | leave } timer-value
The value of the Hold timer, Join timer, or Leave timer is set.
By default, the value of the Hold timer is 10 centiseconds, the value of the Join timer is 20
centiseconds, and the value of the Leave timer is 60 centiseconds.
----End
Procedure
l Run the display gvrp status command to view the status of global GVRP is enabled.
l Run the display gvrp statistics [ interface { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-
type interface-number ] }&<1-10> ] command to view the statistics about GVRP on an
interface.
l Run the display garp timer [ interface { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-
type interface-number ] }&<1-10> ] command to view the values of GARP timers.
----End
6.4 Maintaining GVRP
This section describes how to clear the statistics about GARP.
6.4.1 Clearing GARP Statistics
Context
CAUTION
GARP statistics cannot be restored after being cleared. Therefore, use this command with
caution.
170
Procedure
Step 1 Run the reset garp statistics [ interface { interface-type interface-number [ to interface-type
interface-number ] }&<1-10> ] command in the user view to clear statistics about GARP on the
specified interfaces.
----End
This section provides configuration examples of GVRP.
6.5.1 Example for Configuring GVRP
As shown in Figure 6-2, a branch of company A communicates with the headquarters through
Switch A and Switch B. To simplify the configuration, you need to enable GVRP on all switches
of company A and set the registration mode to normal on interfaces of these switches.
Company B communicates with company A through Switch B and Switch C. To configure
switches of company B to transmit packets of only VLANs of company B, you need to enable
GVRP on all switches of company B and set the registration mode to fixed on the interfaces
connected to switches of company A.
Figure 6-2 Networking for configuring GVRP
SwitchA
SwitchB
SwitchC
Branch of
company A
Company A
Company B
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Company A
Company A

1. Enable GVRP globally.
2. Set the link type of interfaces to trunk.
3. Enable GVRP on interfaces.
171
4. Set the registration mode of interfaces.
Data Preparation
l VLANs allowed by interfaces of Switch A, Switch B, and Switch C: all VLANs
l Registration mode of interfaces of Switch A and Switch B: normal
l Registration modes of Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 of Switch C: fixed and normal respectively
l VLANS of company B on Switch C: VLAN 101 to VLAN 200
Procedure
Step 1 Configure Switch A.
# Enable GVRP globally.
[SwitchA] gvrp
# Set the link type of Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to trunk and configure the interfaces to allow all
VLANs.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan all
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan all
# Enable GVRP on the interfaces and set the registration modes of the interfaces.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] gvrp
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] gvrp registration normal
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] bpdu enable
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] gvrp
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] gvrp registration normal
The configuration of Switch B is similar to the configuration of Switch A, and is not mentioned
here.
Step 2 Configure Switch C.
# Create VLAN 101 to VLAN 200.
[SwitchC] vlan batch 101 to 200
# Enable GVRP globally.
[SwitchC] gvrp
# Set the link type of Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to trunk and configure the interfaces to allow all
VLANs.
172
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan all
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan all
# Enable GVRP on the interfaces and set the registration modes of the interfaces.
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] gvrp
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] gvrp registration fixed
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] bpdu enable
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/2] gvrp
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/2] gvrp registration normal
After the configuration is complete, the branch of company A can communicate with the
headquarters, and users of company A in VLAN 101 to VLAN 200 can communicate with users
in company B.
Run the display gvrp status command on Switch A to check whether GVRP is enabled globally.
The following information is displayed:
<SwitchA> display gvrp status
GVRP is enabled
Run the display gvrp statistics command on Switch A to view statistics about GVRP on GVRP
interfaces, including the GVRP state of each interface, number of GVRP registration failures,
source MAC address of the last GVRP PDU, and registration type of each interface.
<SwitchA> display gvrp statistics
GVRP statistics on port Ethernet0/0/1
GVRP status : Enabled
GVRP registrations failed : 0
GVRP last PDU origin : 0000-0000-0000
GVRP registration type : Normal
Verify the configurations of Switch B and Switch C in the same way.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname SwitchA
#
gvrp
#
gvrp
#
gvrp
173
#
return
#
sysname SwitchB
#
gvrp
#
gvrp
#
gvrp
#
return
l Configuration file of Switch C
#
sysname SwitchC
#
vlan batch 101 to 200
#
gvrp
#
gvrp
gvrp registration fixed
#
gvrp
#
return
174
7 MAC Address Table Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter provides the basics for MAC address table configuration, configuration procedure,
and configuration examples.
7.1 MAC Address Table Overview
This section describes the definition of the MAC address table, how MAC address entries are
generated, and how packets are forwarded based on the MAC address table.
7.2 MAC Address Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the MAC address features supported by the S3700 and provides usage
scenarios of the features to help you complete configuration tasks quickly and accurately.
7.3 Configuring a Static MAC Address Entry
A static MAC address entry specifies an outbound interface for packets destined for a specified
MAC address. Static MAC address entries protect the S3700 from MAC address attacks.
7.4 Configuring a Blackhole MAC Address Entry
You can configure a blackhole MAC address entry so that the S3700 can discard packets with
the specified source or destination MAC address.
7.5 Setting the Aging Time of Dynamic MAC Address Entries
Dynamic MAC address entries are created by the S3700 and can be aged out. Setting a proper
aging time prevents sharp increase of MAC address entries.
7.6 Disabling MAC Address Learning
If a fixed device is connected to an interface, you can disable MAC address learning on the
interface. This prevents other devices from accessing the interface and improves device security.
7.7 Limiting the Number of Learned MAC Addresses
This section describes how to limit the number of MAC addresses learned on an interface or in
a VLAN.
7.8 Configuring Port Security
The port security function prevents devices with untrusted MAC addresses from accessing an
interface. This function is applicable to the networks that require high access security.
7.9 Configuring MAC Address Anti-Flapping
This section describes how to prevent MAC address flapping between interfaces.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 7 MAC Address Table Configuration
175
7.10 Configuring MAC Address Flapping Detection
This section describes how to configure MAC address flapping detection.
7.11 Enabling MAC Spoofing Defense
MAC spoofing defense ensures that a MAC address learned on an interface will not be learned
on other interfaces, protecting the system against MAC spoofing attacks.
7.12 Configuring the S3700 to Discard Packets with an All-0 MAC Address
You can configure the S3700 to discard packets with an all-0 source or destination MAC address.
7.13 Enabling MAC Address Triggered ARP Entry Update
The MAC address triggered ARP entry update function enables the S3700 to update the
corresponding ARP entry when the outbound interface in a MAC address entry changes.
7.14 Enabling Port Bridge
The port bridge function enables an interface to process packets in which the source and
destination MAC addresses are the same.
This section provides several examples for the configuration of the MAC address table.
176
7.1 MAC Address Table Overview
This section describes the definition of the MAC address table, how MAC address entries are
generated, and how packets are forwarded based on the MAC address table.
Definition
A MAC address table is maintained on theS3700. The MAC address table stores the MAC
addresses of other devices learned by the S3700, the VLAN IDs, and the outbound interfaces
that are used to send data. Before forwarding a data packet, the S3700 searches the MAC address
table based on the destination MAC address and the VLAN ID of the packet to find the outbound
interface quickly. This reduces the number of broadcast packets.
Creation of MAC Address Entries
MAC address entries can be created dynamically or manually.
l Automatic creation: MAC address entries are learned by the system automatically. The
MAC address table needs to be updated constantly because the network topology always
changes. The automatically created MAC address entries are not always valid. Each entry
has an aging time. If an entry is not updated within the aging time, it is deleted. If the entry
is updated before its aging time expires, the aging timer is reset.
l Manual creation: Automatically created MAC address entries cannot distinguish packets
of authorized users from attack packets. If a hacker sets the source MAC address of attack
packets to the MAC address of an authorized user and connects to another interface of the
S3700, the S3700 learns an incorrect MAC address entry. The packets that should be
forwarded to the authorized user are forwarded to the hacker. To improve interface security,
you can manually create MAC address entries to bind MAC addresses of authorized users
to specified interfaces. This prevents hackers from intercepting data of authorized users.
Manually created MAC address entries take precedence over automatically created MAC
address entries.
Classification of MAC Address Entries
MAC address entries are classified into the following types:
l Dynamic MAC address entries that are learned by an interface after MAC address learning
is enabled.
l Static MAC address entries that are configured manually. Static MAC address entries take
precedence over dynamic MAC address entries.
l Blackhole MAC address entries that are the manually configured and used to discard data
frames with the specified source or destination MAC addresses. Blackhole MAC address
entries take precedence over dynamic MAC address entries.
Packet Forwarding Based on the MAC Address Table
The S3700 forwards packets based on the MAC address table in either of the following modes:
l Unicast mode: If the destination MAC address of a packet can be found in the MAC address
table, the S3700 forwards the packet through the outbound interface specified in the
matching entry.
177
l Broadcast mode: If a packet is a broadcast or multicast packet or its destination MAC
address cannot be found in the MAC address table, the S3700 broadcasts the packet to all
the interfaces except the inbound interface of the packet.
7.2 MAC Address Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the MAC address features supported by the S3700 and provides usage
scenarios of the features to help you complete configuration tasks quickly and accurately.
You can configure the following MAC address features to improve device security and control
the number of entries in the MAC address table:
l Create static MAC address entries for MAC addresses of fixed upstream devices or trusted
user devices to improve communication security.
l Configure blackhole MAC address entries to protect the S3700 from attacks.
l Set a proper aging time for dynamic MAC addresses to prevent sharp increase of dynamic
MAC address entries.
You can use the following methods to improve security or meet special requirements:
l Disable MAC address learning. This method can be used on a network where the topology
seldom changes or forwarding paths are specified in static MAC address entries. This
method prevents users with unknown MAC addresses from accessing the network, protects
the network from MAC address attacks, and improves network security.
l Limit the number of MAC addresses that can be learned. MAC address limiting protects
the S3700 from MAC address attacks on an insecure network.
l Enable port security. If a network requires high security, port security can be configured
on the interfaces connected to trusted devices. The port security function prevents devices
with untrusted MAC addresses from accessing these interfaces and improves device
security.
l Configure MAC address anti-flapping. If an interface is connected to a trusted upstream
device or server, you can set a high MAC address learning priority for the interface. The
MAC address learned by the interface will not be overridden by an entry learned by another
interface. This protects the S3700 from MAC address attacks.
l Configure MAC spoofing defense. This function ensures that a MAC address learned on
an interface will not be learned on other interfaces, protecting the system against MAC
spoofing attacks.
l Configure MAC address flapping detection. This function reduces impact of loops on the
S3700.
l Discard packets with an all-0 MAC address. A faulty device may send packets with an all-0
source or destination MAC address to the S3700. You can configure the S3700 to discard
such packets and send a trap to the network management system (NMS). You can locate
the faulty device according to the trap message.
l Enable MAC address triggered ARP entry update. This function enables the S3700 to
update the corresponding ARP entry when the outbound interface in a MAC address entry
changes.
l Enable port bridge. This function enables an interface to process packets in which the source
and destination MAC addresses are the same. It can be configured on an S3700 connected
to a device without Layer 2 forwarding capability or an S3700 functioning as an access
device in a data center.
178
NOTE
Only the S3700HI supports MAC address anti-flapping.
The S3700HI does not support MAC spoofing defense.
Disabling MAC Address Learning
When an S3700 enabled with MAC address learning receives an Ethernet frame, it records the
source MAC address and inbound interface of the Ethernet frame in a MAC address entry. When
receiving other Ethernet frames destined for this MAC address, the S3700 forwards the frames
through the corresponding outbound interface according to the MAC address entry. The MAC
address learning function reduces broadcast packets on a network.
After MAC address learning is disabled on an interface, the S3700 does not learn source MAC
addresses of packets received by the interface.
Limiting the Number of Learned MAC Addresses
The S3700 can limit the number of MAC addresses learned on an interfaceor a VLAN. When
the number of learned MAC address entries reaches the limit, the S3700 stops learning MAC
addresses. When the S3700 receives packets with unknown source MAC addresses, it generates
an alarm to alert you if it is configured to do so. This method protects user devices and the
network from MAC address attacks.
Port Security
The port security function changes MAC addresses learned by an interface to secure dynamic
MAC addresses or sticky MAC addresses. It prevents devices with untrusted MAC addresses
from accessing an interface and improves device security.
Differences between secure dynamic MAC addresses and sticky MAC addresses are:
l Secure dynamic MAC addresses are learned after port security is enabled and will not be
aged out by default. You can set the aging time of secure dynamic MAC addresses so that
they can be aged out. Secure dynamic MAC addresses will be lost after the device restarts
and the device needs to learn the MAC addresses again.
l Sticky MAC addresses are learned after the sticky MAC function is enabled. Sticky MAC
addresses will not be aged out and will exist after the S3700 restarts.
MAC Address Anti-flapping
MAC address flapping occurs on a network when the network has a loop or is attacked. To
prevent MAC address flapping, you can set MAC address learning priorities for interfaces so
that MAC addresses can be learned by correct interfaces. When the same MAC address is learned
by interfaces with different priorities, the MAC address entry learned by the interface with the
highest priority overrides the MAC address entries learned by other interfaces. You can also
determine whether to allow MAC address flapping between interfaces with the same priority.
MAC Address Flapping Detection
MAC address flapping occurs on a network when the network has a loop or is attacked. The
S3700 can detect MAC address flapping and perform a specified action, for example, block the
interface, to minimize impact of MAC address flapping on the network. You can also configure
the S3700 only to send trap messages to the network management system when the S3700 detects
MAC address flapping.
179
7.3 Configuring a Static MAC Address Entry
A static MAC address entry specifies an outbound interface for packets destined for a specified
MAC address. Static MAC address entries protect the S3700 from MAC address attacks.
You can configure a static MAC address entry if an interface is connected to an upstream device
or a server, as shown in Figure 7-1. Attackers may set the source MAC address of packets to
the server MAC address and send the packets to the Switch to intercept data of the server. To
protect the server and ensure communication between users and the server, you can configure a
static MAC address entry in which the destination MAC address is the server MAC address and
the outbound interface is the interface connected to the server.
Figure 7-1 Networking diagram of static MAC address entry configurations
Network Server
Switch
VLAN2
VLAN4 LSW
PC1 PC2

None.
Data Preparation
To configure a static MAC address entry, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Destination MAC address, destination outbound interface number and ID of the
VLAN which the outbound interface belongs to

180
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
mac-address static mac-address interface-type interface-number vlan vlan-id1
A static MAC address entry is configured.
NOTE
Static MAC address entries take precedence over dynamic MAC address entries.
----End
Checking the Configuration
Run the display mac-address static [ vlan vlan-id | interface-type interface-number ]
*
[ verbose ] command to view static MAC address entries.
7.4 Configuring a Blackhole MAC Address Entry
You can configure a blackhole MAC address entry so that the S3700 can discard packets with
the specified source or destination MAC address.
To protect user devices or network devices from MAC address attacks, you can configure
untrusted MAC addresses as blackhole MAC addresses. Packets with source or destination MAC
addresses matching the blackhole MAC address entries are discarded.
None.
Data Preparation
To configure a blackhole MAC address entry, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Destination or source MAC address and ID of VLAN to which the outbound interface
belongs to

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
181
Step 2 Run:
mac-address blackhole mac-address [ vlan vlan-id ]
A blackhole MAC address entry is configured.
----End
Run the display mac-address blackhole [ vlan vlan-id ] [ verbose ] command to view blackhole
MAC address entries.
7.5 Setting the Aging Time of Dynamic MAC Address
Entries
Dynamic MAC address entries are created by the S3700 and can be aged out. Setting a proper
aging time prevents sharp increase of MAC address entries.
Dynamical MAC address entries are learned by the S3700 from source MAC addresses of
received packets. The system starts an aging timer for dynamic MAC address entry. If a dynamic
MAC address entry is not updated within a certain period (twice the aging time), this entry is
deleted. If the entry is updated within this period, the aging timer of this entry is reset. A shorter
aging time enables the S3700 to respond to network topology changes more quickly.
The network topology changes frequently, and the S3700 will learn many MAC addresses. After
the aging time of dynamic MAC address entries is set, the S3700 can delete unneeded MAC
address entries to prevent sharp increase of MAC address entries.
None.
Data Preparation
To set the aging time of dynamic MAC address entries, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Aging time

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
182
Step 2 Run:
mac-address aging-time aging-time
The aging time of dynamic MAC address entries is set.
By default, the aging time of dynamic MAC address entries is 300 seconds.
----End
l Run the display mac-address aging-time command to check whether the aging time of
dynamic MAC address entries is set properly.
7.6 Disabling MAC Address Learning
If a fixed device is connected to an interface, you can disable MAC address learning on the
interface. This prevents other devices from accessing the interface and improves device security.
Before disabling MAC address learning, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
As shown in Figure 7-2, an interface of the Switch is connected to a server. To protect the server,
configure the server MAC address as a static MAC address, disable MAC address learning on
the interface, and configure the interface to discard the packets with unknown MAC addresses.
The configuration prevents other servers or terminals from accessing the interface and improves
network stability and security.
Figure 7-2 Disabling MAC address learning
mac-address
learning disable
Switch
Server

183
None.
Data Preparation
To disable MAC address learning, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Interface type and number
2 VLAN ID

7.6.2 Disabling MAC Address Learning on an Interface
Disabling MAC address learning on an interface can improve security of the device connected
to the interface.
Context
When an S3700 enabled with MAC address learning receives an Ethernet frame, it records the
source MAC address and inbound interface of the Ethernet frame in a MAC address entry. When
receiving other Ethernet frames destined for this MAC address, the S3700 forwards the frames
through the corresponding outbound interface according to the MAC address entry. The MAC
address learning function reduces broadcast packets on a network. After MAC address learning
is disabled on an interface, the S3700 does not learn source MAC addresses of packets received
by the interface.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
mac-address learning disable [ action { discard | forward } ]
MAC address learning is disabled on the interface.
By default, MAC address learning is enabled on an interface.
You can configure an action for the S3700 to perform when a packet with an unknown MAC
address is received on the interface. By default, the S3700 forwards such packets based on the
MAC address table. When the action is set to discard, the S3700 searches for the source MAC
address of the packet in the MAC address table. If the source MAC address is found in the MAC
address table, the S3700 forwards the packet according to the MAC address entry. If the source
MAC address is not found, the S3700 discards the packet.
184
NOTE
If you set the action to forward when disabling MAC address learning, untrusted terminals can still access
the network. This action only controls the number of learned MAC address entries.
----End
7.6.3 Disabling MAC Address Learning in a VLAN
Disabling MAC address learning in a VLAN can protect users in this VLAN from MAC address
attacks.
Context
After MAC address learning is disabled in a VLAN, the S3700 checks source MAC addresses
of packets received by interfaces in the VLAN. If the source MAC address of a packet is in the
MAC address table, the S3700 forwards the packet; otherwise, the S3700 broadcasts the packet.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
mac-address learning disable
MAC address learning is disabled in the VLAN.
By default, MAC address learning is enabled in a VLAN.
----End
After disabling MAC address learning on an interface or in a VLAN, use the following
commands to verify the configuration.
Procedure
command to view the current configuration of an interface.
l Run the display vlan command to check the VLAN configuration.
----End
7.7 Limiting the Number of Learned MAC Addresses
This section describes how to limit the number of MAC addresses learned on an interface or in
a VLAN.
185
Before limiting the number of learned MAC addresses, familiarize yourself with the applicable
As shown in Figure 7-3, an insecure residential network or enterprise often receives packets
with bogus MAC addresses. The capacity of a MAC address table is limited; therefore, if hackers
forge a large number of packets with different source MAC addresses and send the packets to
the Switch, the MAC address table of the Switch becomes full quickly. When the MAC address
table is full, the Switch cannot learn source MAC addresses of valid packets. A limit can be set
for the number of learned MAC addresses. When the number of learned MAC addresses reaches
the limit, the Switch stops learning MAC addresses. When the Switch receives packets with
unknown source MAC addresses, it can be configured to generate an alarm. This protects the
network from MAC address attacks.
Figure 7-3 Limiting the number of MAC addresses on an insecure network
VLAN2
Switch
LSW1
LSW2
Internet
VLAN2 VLAN2
MAC- Limit

Before limiting the number of learned MAC addresses, complete the following task:
l Deleting the existing MAC address entries from the interface or VLAN where you want to
limit the number of learned MAC addresses
Data Preparation
To limit the number of learned MAC addresses, you need the following data.
186
No. Data
1 Maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on an interface or a VLAN

7.7.2 Limiting the Number of MAC Addresses Learned on an
Interface
When MAC address limiting is configured on an interface and the number of learned MAC
addresses on the interface reaches the limit, the S3700 stops learning MAC addresses on this
interface. When the interface receives packets with unknown source MAC addresses, it can be
configured to generate an alarm. This protects the network from MAC address attacks.
Context
The MAC address limiting rule applies to all MAC addresses, including trusted MAC addresses.
If a user from an enterprise or a family uses bogus MAC addresses to attack the network, users
in the enterprise or family are not allowed to access the network, but other users on the network
are not affected.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
mac-limit maximum max-num
The maximum number of MAC addresses learned on the interface is set.
By default, the number of MAC addresses learned on an interface is not limited.
When the number of learned MAC addresses reaches the limit, the switch forwards the packets
with new source MAC addresses but does not add the new MAC addresses to the MAC address
table.
Step 4 Run:
mac-limit alarm { disable | enable }
The S3700 is configured to (or not to) send a trap to the NMS when the number of learned MAC
addresses reaches the limit.
By default, the S3700 sends a trap to the NMS when the number of learned MAC addresses
reaches the limit.
----End
187
7.7.3 Limiting the Number of MAC Addresses Learned in a VLAN
When MAC address limiting is configured in a VLAN and the number of learned MAC addresses
in the VLAN reaches the limit, the S3700 stops learning MAC addresses in this VLAN. When
the interface receives packets with unknown source MAC addresses, it can be configured to
generate an alarm. This protects the network from MAC address attacks.
Context
The MAC address limiting rule applies to all MAC addresses, including trusted MAC addresses.
If a user from an enterprise or a family uses bogus MAC addresses to attack the network, users
in the enterprise or family are not allowed to access the network, but other users on the network
are not affected.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
mac-limit maximum max-num
The maximum number of MAC addresses learned in the VLAN is set.
By default, the number of MAC addresses learned in a VLAN is not limited.
When the number of learned MAC addresses reaches the limit, the switch forwards the packets
with new source MAC addresses but does not add the new MAC addresses to the MAC address
table.
Step 4 Run:
mac-limit alarm { disable | enable }
The S3700 is configured to (or not to) send a trap to the NMS when the number of learned MAC
By default, the S3700 sends a trap to the NMS when the number of learned MAC addresses
reaches the limit.
----End
After completing the configuration of MAC address limiting, use the following command to
verify the configuration.
188
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display mac-limit [ interface-type interface-number | vlan vlan-id ] command to view
the MAC address limiting rule.
----End
7.8 Configuring Port Security
The port security function prevents devices with untrusted MAC addresses from accessing an
interface. This function is applicable to the networks that require high access security.
The port security function changes MAC addresses learned by an interface to secure dynamic
MAC addresses or sticky MAC addresses. It prevents devices with untrusted MAC addresses
from accessing an interface and improves device security.
If a network requires high access security, you can configure port security on specified interfaces.
MAC addresses learned by these interfaces change to secure dynamic MAC addresses or sticky
MAC addresses. When the number of learned MAC addresses reaches the limit, the interface
does not learn new MAC addresses and allows only the devices with the learned MAC addresses
to communicate with the S3700. This prevents devices with untrusted MAC addresses from
accessing these interfaces, improving security of the S3700 and the network.
Before configuring port security on an interface, complete the following tasks:
l Disabling MAC address limiting on the interface
l Disabling MUX VLAN on the interface
l Disabling MAC address authentication on the interface
l Disabling 802.1x authentication on the interface
l Disabling MAC address security for DHCP snooping on the interface
Data Preparation
To configure port security on an interface, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Secure dynamic MAC: interface type and number, limit on the number of learned
MAC addresses, action to perform when the limit is exceeded, and aging time of
secure dynamic MAC addresses
2 Sticky MAC: interface type and number, limit on the number of learned MAC
addresses, and action to perform when the limit is exceeded

189
7.8.2 Configuring the Secure Dynamic MAC Function on an
Interface
After port security is enabled on an interface, MAC addresses learned by the interface change
to secure dynamic MAC addresses. When the number of secure dynamic MAC addresses reaches
the limit, the interface does not learn new MAC addresses and allows only the devices with the
learned MAC addresses to communicate with the S3700. You can configure a protection action
for the S3700 to perform when it receives a packet with a new source MAC address.
Context
By default, secure dynamic MAC addresses will not be aged out. You can set the aging time of
secure dynamic MAC addresses so that they can be aged out. Secure dynamic MAC addresses
will be lost after the device restarts and the device needs to learn the MAC addresses again.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
port-security enable
Port security is enabled.
By default, port security is disabled on an interface.
NOTE
You can set the limit on the number of secure dynamic MAC addresses, aging time of secure dynamic
MAC addresses, and protection action only when port security is enabled.
port-security max-mac-num max-number
The limit on the number of secure dynamic MAC addresses is set.
By default, the limit on the number of secure dynamic MAC addresses is 1.
port-security protect-action { protect | restrict | shutdown }
The protection action is configured.
The default action is restrict.
l protect: discards packets with new source MAC addresses when the number of learned MAC
l restrict: discards packets with new source MAC addresses and sends a trap message when
the number of learned MAC addresses exceeds the limit.
190
l shutdown: shuts down the interface when the number of learned MAC addresses exceeds
the limit.
port-security aging-time time [ type { absolute | inactivity } ]
The aging time of secure dynamic MAC addresses is set.
By default, secure dynamic MAC addresses will not be aged out.
----End
7.8.3 Configuring the Sticky MAC Function on an Interface
After the sticky MAC function is enabled on an interface, MAC addresses learned by the
interface change to sticky MAC addresses. When the number of sticky MAC addresses reaches
the limit, the interface does not learn new MAC addresses and allows only the devices with the
learned MAC addresses to communicate with the S3700. You can configure a protection action
for the S3700 to perform when it receives a packet with a new source MAC address.
Context
The sticky MAC function changes MAC addresses learned by an interface to sticky MAC
addresses. Sticky MAC addresses will not be aged out and will exist after the S3700 restarts.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
Port security is enabled.
By default, port security is disabled on an interface.
Step 4 Run:
port-security mac-address sticky
The sticky MAC function is enabled on the interface.
By default, the sticky MAC function is disabled on an interface.
port-security max-mac-num max-number
The limit on the number of sticky MAC addresses is set.
By default, the limit on the number of sticky MAC addresses is 1.
191
port-security protect-action { protect | restrict | shutdown }
The protection action is configured.
The default action is restrict.
l protect: discards packets with new source MAC addresses when the number of learned MAC
l restrict: discards packets with new source MAC addresses and sends a trap message when
the number of learned MAC addresses exceeds the limit.
l shutdown: shuts down the interface when the number of learned MAC addresses exceeds
the limit.
port-security mac-address sticky mac-address vlan vlan-id
A sticky MAC address entry is configured.
----End
After completing the configuration of port security, you can verify the configuration and view
secure dynamic MAC address entries or sticky MAC address entries.
Procedure
command to view the current configuration of an interface.
l Run the display mac-address sticky [ vlan vlan-id | interface-type interface-number ]
*
[ verbose ] command to view sticky MAC address entries.
l Run the display mac-address security [ vlan vlan-id | interface-type interface-number ]
*
[ verbose ] command to view secure dynamic MAC address entries.
----End
7.9 Configuring MAC Address Anti-Flapping
This section describes how to prevent MAC address flapping between interfaces.
Before configuring MAC address anti-flapping, familiarize yourself with the applicable
As shown in Figure 7-4, an interface of the Switch is connected to a server. To prevent
unauthorized users from using the server MAC address to intercept data of the server, you can
set a high MAC address learning priority on the interface. When the same MAC address is
learned by the server-side interface and other interfaces, the entry learned by the server-side
interface overrides the MAC address entries learned by other interfaces. Therefore, the Switch
192
will not learn MAC addresses of unauthorized users and only authorized users can access the
server and use network resources.
Figure 7-4 Networking diagram for MAC address anti-flapping
Switch
Server
MAC:11-22-33
MAC:11-22-33

NOTE
The S3700SI and S3700EI do not support MAC Address Anti-flapping.
None.
Data Preparation
To configure MAC address anti-flapping, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 (Optional) MAC address learning priority of each interface

7.9.2 Setting the MAC Address Learning Priority of an Interface
To prevent MAC address flapping, set different MAC address learning priorities for interfaces.
When interfaces learn the same MAC address, the MAC address entry learned by the interface
with the highest priority overrides the MAC address entries learned by the other interfaces.
Context
Setting different MAC address learning priorities for interface prevents MAC address flapping.
If an attacker uses the MAC address of an unauthorized network device to connect to the
S3700 after the network device is powered off, the S3700 learns the bogus MAC address. After
the network device is powered on, the S3700 can learn the correct MAC address entry.
193
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
mac-learning priority priority-id
The MAC address learning priority of the interface is set.
By default, the MAC address learning priority of an interface is 0. A greater priority value
indicates a higher MAC address learning priority.
----End
7.9.3 Prohibiting MAC Address Flapping Between Interfaces with
the Same Priority
Prohibiting MAC address flapping between interfaces with the same priority can improve
network security.
Context
When MAC address flapping between interfaces with the same priority is prohibited, these
interfaces cannot learn the same MAC addresses simultaneously. If an attacker uses the MAC
address of an unauthorized network device to connect to the S3700 after the network device is
powered off, the S3700 learns the bogus MAC address. After the network device is powered on,
the S3700 cannot learn the correct MAC address entry.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
undo mac-learning priority priority-id allow-flapping
MAC address flapping between the interfaces with a specified priority is prohibited.
By default, MAC address flapping between interfaces with the same priority is allowed.
----End
194
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display current-configuration command to check the MAC address learning priorities
of interfaces.
----End
7.10 Configuring MAC Address Flapping Detection
This section describes how to configure MAC address flapping detection.
Before configuring MAC address flapping detection, familiarize yourself with the applicable
As shown in Figure 7-5, a loop occurs on the network, which will cause MAC address flapping.
After MAC address flapping detection is configured in a VLAN, the Switch checks all MAC
addresses in the VLAN to detect MAC address flapping.
The Switch checks whether a MAC address moves from one interface to another in the VLAN.
If MAC address flapping occurs, it performs the configured action, for example, blocks the
interface to remove the loop. This function reduces MAC address flapping caused by loops and
broadcast storms. You can also configure the Switch only to send trap messages to the network
management system when the S3700 detects MAC address flapping.
Figure 7-5 Networking diagram for MAC address flapping detection
Switch

None.
195
Data Preparation
To configure MAC flapping detection, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 ID of the VLAN where MAC address flapping needs to be configured
2 Blocking time for the interface where MAC address flapping occurs
3 Number of detection attempts before an interface is permanently blocked

7.10.2 Configuring MAC Address Flapping Detection
After MAC address flapping detection is configured in a VLAN, the S3700 checks all MAC
addresses in the VLAN to detect MAC address flapping. When MAC address flapping occurs
on an interface, the S3700 blocks the interface, blocks the MAC address, or just reports a trap
according to the configuration.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
vlan vlan-id
Step 3 Run:
loop-detect eth-loop { [ block-mac ] block-time block-time retry-times retry-times
| alarm-only }
MAC address flapping detection is configured in the VLAN.
When the S3700 detects MAC address flapping in the VLAN, it performs either of the following
actions:
l Block the interface or MAC address. When the block-mac keyword is used in the command,
the S3700 does not block the interface but blocks the traffic from the flapping MAC address.
l Send a trap to the network management system.
----End
7.10.3 (Optional) Unblocking a Blocked Interface or MAC Address
After an interface or a MAC address is permanently blocked because of MAC address flapping,
the interface or MAC address can be restored only by using the reset loop-detect eth-loop
command in the corresponding VLAN view.
Context
After MAC address flapping detection is configured in a VLAN, the system checks all MAC
addresses in the VLAN to detect MAC address flapping. If MAC address flapping occurs on an
196
interface, the system blocks the interface. After a specified period of time, the system unblocks
the interface. If no MAC address flapping is detected within 20 seconds, the system completely
unblocks the interface and starts detection. If MAC address flapping is detected again within 20
seconds, the system blocks the interface. This process repeats for a specified number of times.
If MAC address flapping persists, the interface is permanently blocked.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
reset loop-detect eth-loop vlan vlan-id { all | interface { interface-type
interface-number } | mac-address mac-address }
The specified interface or MAC address is unblocked.
Before using the reset loop-detect eth-loop command, run the display loop-detect eth-loop
command to check the blocked interface or MAC address.
----End
After configuring MAC address flapping detection, use the following commands to verify the
configuration and view information about permanent interfaces and MAC addresses.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display loop-detect eth-loop [ vlan vlan-id ] command to check information about
MAC address flapping detection on a VLAN.
----End
7.11 Enabling MAC Spoofing Defense
MAC spoofing defense ensures that a MAC address learned on an interface will not be learned
on other interfaces, protecting the system against MAC spoofing attacks.
A user device may send bogus packets with a server's MAC address to prevent other users from
accessing the real server. To prevent such attacks, enable MAC spoofing defense on the network-
side interface connected to the server so that the interface becomes a trusted interface. MAC
addresses learned by this interface will not be learned by other interfaces; therefore, the MAC
address entry of the server cannot be modified by attack packets.
NOTE
The S3700HI does not support MAC spoofing defense.
Before configuring MAC spoofing defense, complete the following task:
197
l Powering on the S3700 and ensuring that it functions properly
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
mac-spoofing-defend enable
Global MAC spoofing defense is enabled.
By default, global MAC spoofing defense is disabled.
Step 3 Run:
Step 4 Run:
mac-spoofing-defend enable
MAC spoofing defense is enabled on the interface so that the interface becomes a trusted
interface.
By default, MAC spoofing defense is disabled on an interface.
----End
Run the display current-configuration command to check the configuration of MAC spoofing
defense.
7.12 Configuring the S3700 to Discard Packets with an All-0
MAC Address
You can configure the S3700 to discard packets with an all-0 source or destination MAC address.
A faulty network device may send packets with an all-0 source or destination MAC address to
the S3700. You can configure the S3700 to discard such packets and send a trap to the network
management system (NMS). You can locate the faulty device according to the trap message.
l Powering on the S3700 and ensuring that it functions properly
Data Preparation
None.
198
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
drop illegal-mac enable
The S3700 is configured to discard packets with an all-0 MAC address.
By default, the S3700 does not discard packets with an all-0 MAC address.
drop illegal-mac alarm
The S3700 is configured to send a trap to the NMS when receiving packets with an all-0 MAC
address.
By default, the S3700 does not send a trap to the NMS when receiving packets with an all-0
MAC address.
NOTE
The S3700 sends only one trap after receiving packets with an all-0 MAC address. To enable the S3700 to
send a trap again, run the drop illegal-mac alarm command.
----End
Run the display current-configuration command to check whether the S3700 is configured to
discard the packets with an all-0 MAC address.
7.13 Enabling MAC Address Triggered ARP Entry Update
The MAC address triggered ARP entry update function enables the S3700 to update the
corresponding ARP entry when the outbound interface in a MAC address entry changes.
Each network device uses an IP address to communicate with other devices. On an Ethernet
network, a device sends and receives Ethernet data frames based on MAC addresses. The ARP
protocol maps IP addresses to MAC addresses. When a device communicates with a device on
a different network segment, it finds the MAC address and outbound interface of a packet
according to the corresponding ARP entry.
If a user host moves from one interface to another, the MAC address of the host is learned by
the new interface, so the outbound interface mapping the MAC address changes. The
corresponding ARP entry, however, is updated until the aging time expires. Before the ARP
entry aging time expires, the device sends data frames based on the original ARP entry. This
causes data frame loss. The MAC address triggered ARP entry update function enables the
S3700 to update the corresponding ARP entry when the outbound interface in a MAC address
entry changes.
199
None.
Data Preparation
None.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
mac-address update arp
The MAC address triggered ARP entry update function is enabled.
By default, the S3700 does not update the corresponding ARP entry when the outbound interface
in a MAC address entry changes.
NOTE
l This command takes effect only for dynamic ARP entries. Static ARP entries are not updated when
the corresponding MAC address entries change.
l The mac-address update arp command does not take effect after ARP anti-spoofing is enabled by
using the arp anti-attack entry-check enable command.
l After the mac-address update arp command is run, the S3700 updates an ARP entry only if the
outbound interface in the corresponding MAC address entry changes.
----End
Run the display current-configuration command to check whether the MAC address triggered
ARP entry update function is enabled.
7.14 Enabling Port Bridge
The port bridge function enables an interface to process packets in which the source and
destination MAC addresses are the same.
By default, an interface does not forward frames whose source and destination MAC addresses
are both learned by this interface. When the interface receives such a frame, it discards the frame
as an invalid frame. After the port bridge function is enabled on the interface, the interface
forwards such a frame if the destination MAC address of the frame is in the MAC address table.
The port bridge function is used in the following scenarios:
200
l The S3700 connects to a device that does not support Layer 2 forwarding. When users
connected to this device communicate with each other, user packets are sent to the S3700
and forwarded by the S3700. In this scenario, the port bridge function must be enabled.
l The S3700 is used as an access switch in a data center and is connected to servers. Each
server is configured with multiple virtual machines. The virtual machines need to transmit
data to each other. To improve the data transmission rate and server performance, enable
the port bridge functions on the interfaces connected to the servers so that the S3700
forwards data packets between the virtual machines.
Data Preparation
No. Data
1 Interface type and number

Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
port bridge enable
The port bridge function is enabled.
By default, the port bridge function is disabled on an interface.
----End
Run the display current-configuration command to check whether the port bridge function is
enabled.
This section provides several examples for the configuration of the MAC address table.
7.15.1 Example for Configuring the MAC Address Table
As shown in Figure 7-6, the MAC address of the user host PC1 is 0002-0002-0002 and the MAC
address of the user host PC2 is 0003-0003-0003. PC1 and PC2 are connected to the Switch
201
through the LSW. The LSW is connected to Eth 0/0/1 of the Switch. Interface Eth 0/0/1 belongs
to VLAN 2. The MAC address of the server is 0004-0004-0004. The server is connected to Eth
0/0/2 of the Switch. Interface Eth 0/0/2 belongs to VLAN 2.
l To prevent hackers from attacking the network with MAC addresses, you need to add a
static entry to the MAC table of the Switch for each user host. When sending packets
through Eth 0/0/1, the Switch changes the VLAN ID to VLAN 4 to which the LSW belongs.
In addition, you need to set the aging time of the dynamic entries in the MAC address table
to 500 seconds.
l To prevent hackers from forging the MAC address of the server and stealing user
information, you can configure the packet forwarding based on static MAC address entries
on the Switch.
Figure 7-6 Networking diagram of MAC address table configurations
Network
Switch
Server
PC1 PC2
MAC address: 2-2-2 MAC address: 3-3-3
VLAN4 LSW
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
VLAN2
MAC address: 4-4-4

1. Create a VLAN and add interfaces to the VLAN.
2. Add static MAC address entries.
3. Set the aging time of dynamic MAC address entries.
Data Preparation
l MAC address of PC1: 0002-0002-0002
l MAC address of PC2: 0003-0003-0003
l MAC address of the server: 0004-0004-0004
l VLAN to which the Switch belongs: VLAN 2
l Interface connecting the Switch to the LSW: Eth 0/0/1
l Interface connecting the Switch to the server: Eth 0/0/2
202
l VLAN ID required to be changed to when the Switch sends packets through the outgoing
interface: VLAN 4
l Aging time of dynamic entries in the MAC address table of the Switch: 500 seconds
Procedure
Step 1 Add static MAC address entries.
# Create VLAN 2; add Eth 0/0/1 0/0/2 to VLAN 2; configure VLAN mapping on Eth 0/0/1.
[Quidway] vlan 2
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port vlan-mapping vlan 4 map-vlan 2
# Configure static MAC address entries.
[Quidway] mac-address static 2-2-2 ethernet 0/0/1 vlan 2
Step 2 Set the aging time of dynamic MAC address entries.
[Quidway] mac-address aging-time 500
# Run the display mac-address command in any view. You can check whether the static MAC
address entries are successfully added.
[Quidway] display mac-address static vlan 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAC Address VLAN/VSI Learned-From Type
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0002-0002-0002 2/- Eth0/0/1 static
0003-0003-0003 2/- Eth0/0/1 static
0004-0004-0004 2/- Eth0/0/2 static
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total items displayed = 3
# Run the display mac-address aging-time command in any view. You can check whether the
aging time of dynamic entries is set successfully.
[Quidway] display mac-address aging-time
Aging time: 500 seconds
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 2
#
203
mac-address aging-time 500
#
#
#
mac-address static 0002-0002-0002 Ethernet0/0/1 vlan 2
#
return
7.15.2 Example for Configuring the Limitation on MAC Address
Learning Based on VLANs
As shown in Figure 7-7, user network 1 is connected to Eth 0/0/1 on the Switch through an
LSW. User network 2 is connected to Eth 0/0/2 on the Switch through another LSW. Eth 0/0/1
and Eth 0/0/2 belong to VLAN 2. To prevent MAC address attacks and control the number of
access users, you need to limit the MAC address learning in VLAN 2.
Figure 7-7 Networking diagram for configuring the limitation on MAC address learning based
on VLAN
Network
User
network 1
User
network 2
VLAN 2
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/2
Switch
LSW
LSW

204
2. Configure the limitation on MAC address learning based on VLANs.
Data Preparation
l VLAN to which the interfaces belong: VLAN 2
l User interfaces: Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2
l Maximum number of learned MAC addresses: 100
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the limitation on MAC address learning.
[Quidway] vlan 2
# Configure the rule of limiting MAC address learning in VLAN 2: A maximum of 100 MAC
addresses can be learned; packets are still forwarded and an alarm is generated when the number
of learned MAC addresses reaches the limit, but new MAC addresses are not added to the MAC
address table.
[Quidway] vlan 2
[Quidway-vlan2] mac-limit maximum 100 alarm enable
# Run the display mac-limit command in any view. You can check whether the rule of limiting
MAC address learning is successfully configured.
<Quidway> display mac-limit
MAC Limit is enabled
Total MAC Limit rule count : 1
PORT VLAN/VSI/SI SLOT Maximum Rate(ms) Action Alarm
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
- 2 - 100 - forward enable
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 2
#
205
vlan 2
mac-limit maximum 100
#
#
#
return
7.15.3 Example for Configuring Interface Security
As shown in Figure 7-8, a company wants to prevent the computers of non-employees from
accessing the intranet of the company to protect information security. To achieve this goal, the
company needs to enable the sticky MAC function on the interface connected to computers of
employees and set the maximum number of MAC addresses learned by the interface to be the
same as the number of trusted computers.
Figure 7-8 Networking diagram of interface security configuration
Switch
SwitchA
Internet
PC1 PC2 PC3
VLAN 10
Eth0/0/1

1. Create a VLAN and set the link type of the interface to trunk.
2. Enable the interface security function.
3. Enable the sticky MAC function on the interface.
206
4. Configure the security protection action on the interface.
5. Set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the interface.
Data Preparation
l VLAN allowed by the interface
l Type and number of the interface connected to computers of employees
l Security protection action
l Maximum number of MAC addresses learned by the interface
Procedure
Step 1 Create a VLAN and set the link type of the interface to trunk.
[Quidway] vlan 10
Step 2 Configure the interface security function.
# Enable the interface security function.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port-security enable
Enable the sticky MAC function.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port-security mac-address sticky
# Configure the security protection action.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port-security protect-action protect
# Set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the interface.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] port-security max-mac-num 4
To enable the interface security function on other interfaces, repeat the preceding steps.
If PC1 is replaced by another PC, this PC cannot access the intranet of the company.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10
#
port-security protect-action protect
207
port-security mac-address sticky
port-security max-mac-num 4
#
return
7.15.4 Example for Configuring MAC Address Anti-Flapping
The MAC address anti-flapping function protects servers of an enterprise or VIP customers from
attacks.
As shown in Figure 7-9, employees of an enterprise need to access the server connected to a
Switch interface. If an attacker uses the server MAC address as the source MAC address to send
packets to another interface, the server MAC address is learned on the interface. Employees
cannot access the server, and important data will be intercepted by the attacker.
MAC address anti-flapping can be configured to protect the server from attacks.
Figure 7-9 Networking diagram for MAC address anti-flapping
LSW
Server
Eth0/0/1
PC1
PC4
PC2 PC3
VLAN10
VLAN 10
Switch
Eth0/0/2
MAC:11-22-33
MAC:11-22-33

2. Configure MAC address anti-flapping on the server-side interface.
Data Preparation
208
l VLAN that the server-side and user-side interfaces belong to: VLAN 10
l Server-side interface: Ethernet0/0/1
l User-side interface: Ethernet0/0/2
l MAC address learning priority of the server-side interface: 2
Procedure
Step 1 Create a VLAN and add interfaces to the VLAN.
# Add Ethernet0/0/1 and Ethernet0/0/2 to VLAN 10.
[Quidway] vlan 10
[Quidwayvlan10] quit
Step 2 Configure MAC anti-flapping.
# Set the MAC address learning priority of Ethernet0/0/1 to 2.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] mac-learning priority 2
# Run the display current-configuration command in any view to check whether the MAC
address learning priority of Ethernet0/0/1 is set correctly.
<Quidway> display current-configuration
#
mac-learning priority 2
#
return
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 10
#
mac-learning priority 2
#
#
return
209
8 STP/RSTP Configuration
About This Chapter
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) trims a ring network into a loop-free tree network. It prevents
replication and circular propagation of packets, provides multiple redundant paths for Virtual
LAN (VLAN) data traffic, and enables load balancing. The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP) develops rapid convergence and introduces the edge port and its protection function
based on STP.
8.1 STP/RSTP Overview
STP is a management protocol on the data link layer. It is used to block redundant links on the
Layer 2 network and trim a network into a loop-free tree. RSTP is a refinement of STP and
introduces rapid convergence of the network topology.
8.2 Configuring Basic STP/RSTP Functions
STP/RSTP is used to block redundant links on the Layer 2 network and trim a network into a
loop-free tree topology.
8.3 Configuring STP/RSTP Parameters on an Interface
A feedback mechanism is provided to confirm topology convergence. Thus, rapid convergence
is implemented for RSTP.
8.4 Configuring RSTP Protection Functions
RSTP protection functions are as follows, and you can configure one or more functions as
required.
8.5 Configuring STP/RSTP Interoperability Between Huawei Devices and Non-Huawei Devices
To supports STP/RSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices,
proper parameters are required on Huawei devices running STP/RSTP to ensure nonstop
communication.
8.6 Maintaining STP/RSTP
STP/RSTP maintenance includes resetting STP/RSTP statistics.
This section shows typical usage scenarios of STP/RSTP by describing networking
requirements, configuration roadmap, and data preparation, and provides related configuration
files.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 8 STP/RSTP Configuration
210
8.1 STP/RSTP Overview
STP is a management protocol on the data link layer. It is used to block redundant links on the
Layer 2 network and trim a network into a loop-free tree. RSTP is a refinement of STP and
introduces rapid convergence of the network topology.
8.1.1 STP/RSTP Overview
Introduction
On a complex network, loops are inevitable. With the requirement for network redundancy
backup, network designers tend to deploy multiple physical links between two devices, one of
which is the master and the others are the backup. Loops are likely or bound to occur in such a
situation.
Loops will cause broadcast storms, thereby exhausting network resources and paralyzing the
network. Loops also cause flapping of MAC address tables and thus damages MAC address
entries.
The devices running STP discover loops on the network by exchanging information with each
other and trim the ring topology into a loop-free tree topology by blocking a certain interface.
In this manner, replication and circular propagation of packets are prevented on the network. In
addition, it is prevented that the processing performance of devices is degraded when
continuously processing repeated packets.
STP, however, converges the network topology slowly. In 2001, the IEEE published document
802.1w to introduce an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP). RSTP is developed based on STP but outperforms STP.
Concepts
l Root bridge
A tree topology must have a root. Therefore, the root bridge is introduced by STP/RSTP.
There is only one root bridge on the entire STP/RSTP-capable network. The root bridge is
the logical center but is unnecessarily the physical center of the entire network. The root
bridge may be served by another switching device along with the network topology change.
l ID
There are Bridge IDs (BIDs) and port IDs (PIDs).
BID
IEEE 802.1D defines that a BID is composed of a 2-bit bridge priority and a bridge
MAC address. That is, BID (8 bits) = Bridge priority (2 bits) + Bridge MAC address (6
bits).
On the STP-capable network, the device with the smallest BID is selected as the root
bridge. The bridge priority that is allowed to be configured on a Huawei device ranges
from 0 to 61440. By default, the bridge priority is 32768.
PID
211
A 16-bit PID is composed of a 4-bit port priority and a 12-bit port number.
The PID is used when the designated port needs to be selected. That is, when the root
path costs and the sender BIDs of two ports are the same, the port with a smaller PID
is selected as the designated port. As shown in Figure 8-1, the root path costs and sender
BIDs of port A and port B on S2 are the same. Port A has a smaller PID, and is thus
selected as the designated port on the local segment. The port priority that can be
configured on a Huawei device ranges from 0 to 240, with the step 16. That is, the port
priority can be 0, 16, or 32. By default, the port priority is 128.
l Path cost
A path cost is port-specific, which is used by STP/RSTP as a reference to select a link.
STP/RSTP calculates the path cost to select the robust link and blocks redundant links to
trim the network into a loop-free tree topology.
On an STP/RSTP-capable network, the accumulative cost of the path from a certain port
to the root bridge is the sum of the costs of the segment paths into which the path is separated
by the ports on the transit bridges.
l Port roles
STP-capable port
Root port
The root port is the port that is nearest to the root bridge. The root port is determined
based on the path cost. Among all the ports where STP is enabled on the network
bridge, the port with the smallest root path cost is the root port. There is only one
root port on an STP-capable device, but there is no root port on the root bridge.
Designated Port
The designated port on a switching device forwards bridge protocol data units
(BPDUs) to the downstream switching device. All ports on the root bridge are
designated ports. A designated port is selected on each network segment. The device
where the designated port resides is called the designated bridge on the network
segment.
RSTP-capable port
Compared with STP, RSTP has two additional types of ports, namely, the alternate port
and backup port. More port roles are defined to simplify the knowledge and deployment
of STP.
212
Figure 8-1 Diagram of port roles
S2 S3
A
A B
A a
S2 S3
A
A B
A
a
B
b
S1
Root bridge
S1
Root bridge
Root port
Designated port
Alternate port
Backup port

As shown in Figure 8-1, RSTP defines four port roles: root port, designated port,
alternate port, and backup port.
The functions of the root port and designated port are the same as those defined in STP.
The description of the alternate port and backup port is as follows:
From the perspective of configuration BPDU transmission:
The alternate port is blocked after learning the configuration BPDUs sent by
other bridges.
The backup port is blocked after learning the configuration BPDUs sent by itself.
From the perspective of user traffic:
The alternate port backs up the root port and provides an alternate path from the
designated bridge to the root bridge.
The backup port backs up the designated port and provides an alternate path from
the root node to the leaf node.
After all ports are assigned roles, topology convergence is completed.
213
l Port status
STP port state
Table 8-1 shows the port status of an STP-capable port.
Table 8-1 STP port state
Port
state
Purpose Description
Forward
ing
The port in the Forwarding state
forwards not only user traffic but
also BPDUs.
Only the root port and designated
port can enter the Forwarding state.
Learnin
g
When a port is in the Learning state,
a device creates a MAC address
table based on the received user
traffic but does not forward user
traffic.
This is a transition state, which is
designed to prevent temporary
loops.
Listenin
g
When a port is in the Listening
state, the root bridge, root port, and
designated port are to be selected.
This is a transition state.
Blockin
g
The port in the Blocking state
receives and forwards only BPDUs
but does not forward user traffic.
This is the final state of a blocked
port.
Disabled The port in the Disabled state
forwards neither BPDUs nor user
traffic.
The port is Down.

RSTP port state
Table 8-2 shows the port status of an RSTP-capable port.
Table 8-2 RSTP port state
Port state Description
Forwarding A port in the Forwarding state can send and receive BPDUs as
well as forward user traffic.
Learning This is a transition state. A port in the Learning state learns
MAC addresses from user traffic to construct a MAC address
table.
In the Learning state, the port can send and receive BPDUs, but
cannot forward user traffic.
Discarding A port in the Discarding state can only receive BPDUs.

214
CAUTION
A Huawei datacom device is in MSTP mode by default. After a device experiences the
transition from the MSTP mode to the STP mode, an STP-capable port supports the same
port states as those supported by an MSTP-capable port, including the Forwarding,
Learning, and Discarding states. For details, see Table 8-2.
l Three timers
Hello Timer
Sets the interval at which BPDUs are sent.
Forward Delay Timer
Sets the time spent in the Listening and Learning states.
Max Age
Sets the maximum lifetime of a BPDU on the network. When the Max Age time expires,
the connection to the root bridge fails.
Comparison between STP, RSTP, and MSTP
Table 8-3 shows the comparison between STP, RSTP, and MSTP.
Table 8-3 Comparison between STP, RSTP, and MSTP
Spanning
Tree
Protocol
Characteristics Applicable
Environment
Precautions
STP A loop-free tree is
generated. Thus, broadcast
storms are prevented and
redundancy is
implemented.
Irrespective of different
users or services, all
VLANs share one
spanning tree.
NOTE
l If the current
switching device
supports STP and
RSTP, RSTP is
recommended.
l If the current
switching device
supports STP or
RSTP, and MSTP,
MSTP is
recommended. See
MSTP
Configuration.
RSTP l A loop-free tree is
generated. Thus,
broadcast storms are
prevented and
redundancy is
implemented.
l A feedback mechanism
is provided to confirm
topology convergence.
Thus, rapid
convergence is
implemented.
215
Spanning
Tree
Protocol
Characteristics Applicable
Environment
Precautions
MSTP l In an MSTP region, a
loop-free tree is
generated. Thus,
prevented and
redundancy is
implemented.
l A feedback mechanism
is provided to confirm
Thus, rapid
convergence is
implemented.
l MSTP implements
load balancing among
VLANs. Traffic in
different VLANs is
transmitted along
different paths.
User or service-specific
load balancing is
required. Traffic for
different VLANs is
forwarded through
different spanning
trees, which are
independent of each
other.

8.1.2 STP/RSTP Features Supported by the S3700
Before configuring STP/RSTP, familiarize yourself with the concepts of basic STP/RSTP
functions, topology convergence, STP/RSTP protection, and STP/RSTP interoperability
between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices. This will help you complete the configuration
task quickly and accurately.
loop-free tree topology. The basic configuration roadmap of STP/RSTP is as follows:
1. Select a switching device (functioning as a root bridge) from switching devices for each
spanning tree. You can configure the priorities of the switching devices to preferentially
select a root bridge.
2. In each spanning tree, calculate the shortest paths from the other switching devices to the
root bridge, and select a root port for each non-root switching device. You can configure
the cost of the path from a switching device to the root bridge to preferentially select a root
port.
3. In each spanning tree, select a designated port for each connection according to the bridge
ID, the cost of path and port IDs. If the devices have the same bridge ID and the cost of
path, You can configure the port priorities to preferentially select a designated port.
STP/RSTP also supports the following features to meet requirements of special applications and
extended functions:
l A feedback mechanism is provided to confirm topology convergence. Thus, rapid
convergence is implemented.
l RSTP provides the following protection functions, as listed in Table 8-4.
216
l Supports STP/RSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices.
Proper parameters are required on Huawei devices running STP/RSTP to ensure nonstop
communication.
Table 8-4 RSTP Protection Function
Protection
Function
Scenario Configuration Impact
BPDU
protection
An edge port changes to be
a non-edge port after
receiving a BPDU, which
triggers spanning tree
recalculation. If an attacker
keeps sending bogus
BPDUs to a switching
device, network flapping
occurs.
After BPDU protection is enabled on the
switching device, the switching device
shuts down the edge port if the edge port
receives an RST BPDU, and notifies the
NMS of the shutdown event. The attributes
of the edge port are not changed.
TC
protection
Generally, after receiving
TC BPDUs (packets for
advertising network
topology changes), a
switching device needs to
delete MAC entries and
ARP entries. Frequent
deletion operations will
exhaust CPU resources.
TC protection is used to suppress TC-
BPDUs. The number of times that TC-
BPDUs are processed by a switching
device within a given time period is
configurable. If the number of TC-BPDUs
that the switching device receives within a
given time exceeds the specified threshold,
the switching device handles TC-BPDUs
only for the specified number of times.
Excess TC-BPDUs are processed by the
switching device as a whole for once after
the timer (that is, the specified time period)
expires. This protects the switching device
from frequently deleting MAC entries and
ARP entries, thus avoiding over-burdened.
Root
protection
Due to incorrect
configurations or
malicious attacks on the
network, a root bridge may
receive BPDUs with a
higher priority.
Consequently, the
legitimate root bridge is no
longer able to serve as the
root bridge, and the
network topology is
illegitimately changed,
triggering spanning tree
recalculation. This may
transfer traffic from high-
speed links to low-speed
links, causing traffic
congestion.
If a designated port is enabled with the root
protection function, the role of the port
cannot be changed. Once a designated port
that is enabled with root protection
receives RST BPDUs with a higher
priority, the port enters the Discarding state
and does not forward packets. If the port
does not receive any RST BPDUs with a
higher priority before a period (generally
two Forward Delay periods) expires, the
port automatically enters the Forwarding
state.
217
Protection
Function
Loop
protection
A root port or an alternate
port will age if link
congestion or a one-way
link failure occurs. After
the root port ages, a
switching device may re-
select a root port
incorrectly and after the
alternate port ages, the port
enters the Forwarding
state. Loops may occur in
such a situation.
After loop protection is configured, if the
root port or alternate port does not receive
RST BPDUs from the upstream switching
device for a long time, the switching device
notifies the NMS that the port enters the
Discarding state. The blocked port remains
in the Blocked state and no longer forwards
packets. This prevents loops on the
network. The root port restores the
Forwarding state after receiving new
BPDUs.

8.2 Configuring Basic STP/RSTP Functions
STP/RSTP is commonly configured on a switching device to trim a ring network to a loop-free
network. STP/RSTP configurations on the switching device involve STP/RSTP working mode
configuration. If you need to interfere in the spanning tree calculation, the following methods
are available:
l Setting a priority for a switching device: The lower the numerical value, the higher the
priority of the switching device and the more likely the switching device becomes a root
bridge; the higher the numerical value, the lower the priority of the switching device and
the less likely that the switching device becomes a root bridge.
l Setting a path cost for a port: With the same calculation method, the lower the numerical
value, the smaller the cost of the path from the port to the root bridge and the more likely
the port becomes a root port; the higher the numerical value, the larger the cost of the path
from the port to the root bridge and the less likely that the port becomes a root port.
l Setting a priority for a port: The lower the numerical value, the more likely the port becomes
a designated port; the higher the numerical value, the less likely that the port becomes a
designated port.
Before configuring basic STP/RSTP functions, familiarize yourself with the applicable
environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This will help
situation.
218
entries.
STP/RSTP can be deployed on a network to eliminate loops. If a loop is detected, STP/RSTP
blocks one port to eliminate the loop.
As shown in Figure 8-2, Switch A, Switch B, Switch C, and Switch D form a ring network, and
STP/RSTP is enabled on the ring network to eliminate loops.
Figure 8-2 Diagram of a ring network
SwitchA
SwitchC
SwitchB
SwitchD
PC1
PC2
Network
Blocked port
Root
Bridge

NOTE
If the current switching device supports STP and RSTP, RSTP is recommended.
Before configuring basic STP/RSTP functions, complete the following task:
l Connecting interfaces and setting physical parameters for the interfaces to ensure that the
physical status of the interfaces is Up
Data Preparation
To configure basic STP/RSTP functions, you need the following data.
219
No. Data
1 (Optional) Priority of a switching device
2 (Optional) Priority of a port
3 (Optional) Path cost of a port

8.2.2 Configuring the STP/RSTP Mode
Before configuring basic STP/RSTP functions, you need to configure the working mode of a
switching device to STP/RSTP. RSTP is compatible with STP.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp mode { stp | rstp }
The working mode of the switching device is configured as STP/RSTP.
By default, the working mode of the S3700 is MSTP.
----End
8.2.3 (Optional) Configuring Switching Device Priorities
The lower the numerical value is, the higher priority a switching device has and the more likely
the switching device will be selected as a root bridge.
Context
On an STP/RSTP-capable network, there is only one root bridge and it is the logic center of the
entire spanning tree. In root bridge selection, the switching device with high performance and
network hierarchy is generally selected as a root bridge; however, the priority of such a device
may be not that high. Thus setting a high priority for the switching device is necessary so that
the device can function as a root bridge.
Other devices with low performance and network hierarchy are not fit to be a root bridge.
Therefore, set low priorities for these devices.
CAUTION
If an S3700 is configured as the root switch or secondary root switch, the priority of the
S3700 cannot be set. If you want to set the priority of the S3700, you must disable the root switch
or secondary root switch.
220
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp priority priority
The priority of a switching device is configured.
The default priority value of a switching device is 32768.
NOTE
l To configure a switching device as a primary root bridge, you can run the stp root primary command
directly. The priority value of this switching device is 0.
l To configure a switching device as a secondary root bridge, run the stp root secondary command. The
priority value of this switching device is 4096.
A switching device cannot act as a primary root bridge and a secondary root bridge at the same time.
----End
8.2.4 (Optional) Setting the Path Cost for a Port
The STP/RSTP path cost determines root port selection. The port from which to the root port
costs the least is selected as the root port.
Context
A path cost is port-specific, which is used by STP/RSTP as a reference to select a link.
The range of the path cost value is determined by the calculation method. After the calculation
method is determined, you are recommended to set a relatively small path cost value for the port
at a high link rate.
Use the Huawei proprietory calculation method as an example. Different link rates correspond
to default path cost values of ports. For details, see Table 8-5.
Table 8-5 Mappings between link rates and path cost values
Link Rate Recommended
value
Recommended
Value Range
Value Range
10 Mbit/s 2000 200-20000 1-200000
100 Mbit/s 200 20-2000 1-200000
1 Gbit/s 20 2-200 1-200000
10 Gbit/s 2 2-20 1-200000
Over 10 Gbit/s 1 1-2 1-200000

221
On a network where loops occur, you are recommended to set a relatively large path cost for the
port at a low link rate. STP/RSTP puts the port with the large path cost in the Blocking state and
blocks the link where this port resides.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp pathcost-standard { dot1d-1998 | dot1t | legacy }
A path cost calculation method is configured.
By default, the IEEE 802.1t standard method is used to calculate the default path cost.
All switching devices on a network must use the same calculation method for path costs.
Step 3 Run:
Step 4 Run:
stp cost cost
A path cost is set for the port.
l When the Huawei proprietory calculation method is used, cost ranges from 1 to 200000.
l When the IEEE 802.1d standard method is used, cost ranges from 1 to 65535.
l When the IEEE 802.1t standard method is used, cost ranges from 1 to 200000000.
----End
8.2.5 (Optional) Configuring Port Priorities
The lower the numerical value, the more likely the port on a switching device becomes a
designated port; the higher the numerical value, the more likely the port is to be blocked.
Context
Whether a port on a switching device will be selected as a designated port is determined by its
priority. For details, see 8.1.1 STP/RSTP Overview.
If you expect to block a port on a switching device to eliminate loops, set the port priority value
to be larger than the default value when the devices have the same bridge ID and the cost of
path. This port will be blocked in designated port selection.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
222
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
stp port priority priority
The port priority is configured.
The default priority value of a port on a switching device is 128.
----End
8.2.6 Enabling STP/RSTP
After STP/RSTP is enabled, spanning trees are calculated.
Context
After STP/RSTP is enabled on a ring network, STP/RSTP immediately calculates spanning trees
on the network. Configurations on the switching device, such as the switching device priority
and port priority, will affect spanning tree calculation. Any change of the configurations may
cause network flapping. Therefore, to ensure rapid and stable spanning tree calculation, perform
basic configurations on the switching device and its ports and enable STP/RSTP.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp enable
STP/RSTP is enabled on the switching device.
By default, the STP/RSTP function is enabled on a S3700.
----End
After basic STP/RSTP functions are configured, you can view the information such as the port
role and port status to check whether the spanning tree calculation is correctly performed.
Prerequisite
All configurations of basic STP/RSTP functions are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display stp [ interface interface-typeinterface-number ] [ brief ] command to view
spanning-tree status and statistics.
----End
223
8.3 Configuring STP/RSTP Parameters on an Interface
A feedback mechanism is provided to confirm topology convergence. Thus, rapid convergence
is implemented for RSTP.
STP does not implement rapid convergence; however, STP parameters, such as the network
diameter, hello time, Max Age time, and Forward Delay time, may affect network convergence.
RSTP is a refinement of STP and implements rapid convergence. In addition to the preceding
parameters, such parameters as the type of the link where the port resides, rapid transition
mechanism, and maximum number of sent BPDUs port parameters also affect STP/RSTP
For the parameters of devices running STP/RSTP, see Table 8-6.
Table 8-6 Parameters affecting the STP/RSTP topology convergence
Paramete
r
Parameter
Description
Commands Description
System
parameter
network
diameter, timer
value (Hello
Time, Forward
Delay period,
Max Age time),
and timeout
period for
waiting for
BPDUs from
the upstream (3
x hello time x
time factor)
l stp bridge-diameter
diameter
l stp timer hello hello-time
l stp timer forward-delay
forward-delay
l stp timer max-age max-age
l stp timer-factor factor
It is recommended that you
set the network diameter to
determine the timer value.
The switching device
automatically calculates
the Forward Delay period,
Hello time, and Max Age
time based on the network
diameter. Then, you can
run the stp timer-factor
factor command to set the
timeout period for waiting
for BPDUs from the
upstream (3 x hello time x
time factor).
224
Paramete
r
Parameter
Description
Port
parameter
Link type of a
port
l stp point-to-point { auto |
force-false | force-true }
A P2P link helps
implement the rapid
convergence.
l If the port works in full-
duplex mode, the link
where the port resides is
a P2P link.
l If the port works in
half-duplex mode, you
can forcibly switch the
link where the port
resides to a P2P link.
l In other cases, you can
enable the port to
automatically
determine whether to
connect to the P2P link.
Port transition
to the RSTP
mode
l stp mcheck On a switching device
running RSTP, if an
interface is connected to a
device running STP, the
interface automatically
transitions to the STP
mode.
Enabling MCheck on the
interface is required When
the interface fail to
automatically transition to
the RSTP mode.
Maximum
number of
BPDUs sent by
the interface
within each
Hello time
l stp transmit-limit packet-
number
If the maximum number of
BPDUs sent by the
interface within each Hello
time is set properly, the rate
at which BPDUs are sent
can be restricted, which
prevents RSTP from
consuming too many
bandwidths when network
flapping occurs.
225
Paramete
r
Parameter
Description
Edge ports l stp edged-port enable
l error-down auto-recovery
cause cause-item interval
interval-value
The ports connecting to
terminals do not participate
in STP/RSTP calculation.
If a port is configured as an
edge port, the port does not
participate in STP/RSTP
calculation.
After BPDU protection is
configured on a switching
device, an edge port is shut
down when receiving
BPDUs. The port can be
configured to
automatically go Up after a
specific delay.

Before configuring parameters affecting STP/RSTP rapid convergence, familiarize yourself
with the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required
data. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly and accurately.
On some specific networks, RSTP parameters will affect the speed of network convergence.
Configuring proper RSTP parameters is required.
NOTE
The default configurations of the parameters described in this section help implement RSTP rapid
convergence. Therefore, the configuration process and all involved procedures described in this section
are optional. You can perform some of the configurations as required.
Before configuring STP/RSTP parameters, complete the following task:
l Configuring basic STP/RSTP functions
Data Preparation
To configure STP/RSTP parameters, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Network diameter
2 Hello time, forwarding delay time, maximum aging time, and timeout period for
waiting for BPDUs from the upstream (3 x hello time x time factor)
3 Link type of a port
226
No. Data
4 Whether a port is enabled with rapid transition mechanism
5 Whether a port needs to transition to the RSTP mode
6 Maximum number of sent BPDUs
7 Whether a port needs to be configured as an edge port
8 Whether auto recovery needs to be configured for an edge port being shut down
9 Whether a port needs to clear statistics of the spanning tree
10 Whether an edge port needs to be configured as a BPDU filter

8.3.2 Setting System Parameters
STP/RSTP parameters that may affect network convergence include the network diameter, hello
time, and timeout period for waiting for BPDUs from the upstream (3 x hello time x time factor).
Therefore, STP/RSTP parameters need to be set properly to help implement rapid network
convergence.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp bridge-diameter diameter
The network diameter is configured.
By default, the network diameter is 7.
l RSTP uses a single spanning tree instance on the entire network, which cannot prevent the
performance from deteriorating when the network scale grows. Therefore, the network
diameter cannot be larger than 7.
l It is recommended that you run the stp bridge-diameter diameter command to set the
network diameter. Then, the switching device calculates the optimal Forward Delay period,
Hello time, and Max Age period based on the set network diameter.
Step 3 Run:
stp timer-factor factor
The timeout period for waiting for BPDUs from the upstream of a switching device is set.
By default, the timeout period of a switching device is 9 times as long as the Hello time.
Step 4 (Optional) To set the Forward Delay period, Hello time, and Max Age period, perform the
following operations:
l Run the stp timer forward-delay forward-delay command to set the Forward Delay period
for a switching device.
227
The default Forward Delay period of a switching device is 1500, in centiseconds.
l Run the stp timer hello hello-time command to set the Hello time for a switching device.
The default Hello time of a switching device is 200, in centiseconds.
l Run the stp timer max-age max-age command to set the Max Age period for a switching
device.
The default Max Age period of a switching device is 2000, in centiseconds.
NOTE
The values of the Hello time, Forward Delay period, and Max Age period must comply with the following
formulas. Otherwise, networking flapping occurs.
l 2 (Forward Delay - 1.0 second) >= Max Age
l Max Age >= 2 (Hello Time + 1.0 second)
----End
8.3.3 Setting Port Parameters
Port parameters that may affect RSTP topology convergence include the link type and maximum
number of sent BPDUs. Proper port parameters help RSTP to implement rapid topology
convergence.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp point-to-point { auto | force-false | force-true }
The link type is configured for a port.
By default, a port automatically determines whether to connect to a P2P link. The P2P link
supports rapid network convergence.
l If the Ethernet port works in full-duplex mode, the port is connected to a P2P link. In this
case, force-true can be configured to implement rapid network convergence.
l If the Ethernet port works in half-duplex mode, you can configure stp point-to-point force-
true to forcibly set the link type to P2P to implement rapid network convergence.
Step 4 Run:
stp mcheck
MCheck is enabled.
On a switching device running RSTP, if a port is connected to a device running STP, the port
automatically transitions to the STP interoperable mode.
Enabling MCheck on the port is required because the port may fail to automatically transition
to the RSTP mode in the following situations:
228
l The switching device running STP is shut down or moved.
l The switching device running STP transitions to the RSTP mode.
NOTE
If you run the stp mcheck command in the system view, the MCheck operation is performed on all the
interfaces.
Step 5 Run:
stp transmit-limit packet-number
The maximum number of BPDUs sent by a port within each Hello time is set.
By default, the maximum number of BPDUs that a port sends within each Hello time is 147.
stp edged-port enable
The port is configured as an edge port.
If a device port is connected to a terminal, you can run this command to configure the port as
an edge port.
By default, the port is a non-edge port.
Step 7 Run:
quit
error-down auto-recovery cause cause-item interval interval-value
The auto recovery function on an edge port is configured. That is, enable the port in the error-
down state to automatically go Up, and set the delay for the transition from Down to Up.
There is no default value for the recovery time. Therefore, you must specify a delay when
configuring this command.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When the topology of a spanning tree changes, the forwarding paths to associated VLANs are
changed. Then, ARP entries corresponding to those VLANs on the switching device need to be
updated. STP/RSTP processes ARP entries in either fast or normal mode.
l In fast mode, ARP entries to be updated are directly deleted.
l In normal mode, ARP entries to be updated are rapidly aged.
The remaining lifetime of ARP entries to be updated is set to 0. The switching device rapidly
processes these aged entries. If the number of ARP aging probe attempts is not set to 0,
ARP implements aging probe for these ARP entries.
In either fast or normal mode, MAC entries are directly deleted.
You can run the stp converge { fast | normal } command in the system view to configure the
STP/RSTP convergence mode.
By default, the STP/RSTP convergence is configured as normal.
229
NOTE
The normal mode is recommended. If the fast mode is adopted, ARP entries will be frequently deleted,
causing the CPU usage on the MPU or LPU to reach 100%. As a result, network flapping frequently occurs.
You can verify that the configurations take effect after configuring STP/RSTP parameters that
affect the topology convergence.
Prerequisite
The parameters that affect the topology convergence have been configured.
Procedure
l Run the display stp [ interface interface-type interface-number ] [ brief ] command to
view spanning-tree status and statistics.
----End
8.4 Configuring RSTP Protection Functions
RSTP protection functions are as follows, and you can configure one or more functions as
required.
Before configuring RSTP protection functions, familiarize yourself with the applicable
RSTP provides the following protection functions, as listed in Table 8-7.
Table 8-7 RSTP Protection Function
Protection
Function
BPDU
protection
An edge port changes to be a
non-edge port after
keeps sending bogus BPDUs
to a switching device,
network flapping occurs.
switching device, the switching device shuts
down the edge port if the edge port receives
an RST BPDU, and notifies the NMS of the
shutdown event. The attributes of the edge
port are not changed.
230
Protection
Function
TC protection Generally, after receiving
advertising network
delete MAC entries and ARP
entries. Frequent deletion
operations will exhaust CPU
resources.
TC protection is used to suppress TC-BPDUs.
The number of times that TC-BPDUs are
processed by a switching device within a
given time period is configurable. If the
number of TC-BPDUs that the switching
device receives within a given time exceeds
the specified threshold, the switching device
handles TC-BPDUs only for the specified
number of times. Excess TC-BPDUs are
processed by the switching device as a whole
for once after the timer (that is, the specified
time period) expires. This protects the
switching device from frequently deleting
MAC entries and ARP entries, thus avoiding
over-burdened.
Root
protection
Due to incorrect
configurations or malicious
attacks on the network, a
root bridge may receive
BPDUs with a higher
priority. Consequently, the
root bridge, and the network
topology is illegitimately
changed, triggering
spanning tree recalculation.
This may transfer traffic
from high-speed links to
low-speed links, causing
traffic congestion.
If a designated port is enabled with the root
protection function, the role of the port cannot
be changed. Once a designated port that is
enabled with root protection receives RST
BPDUs with a higher priority, the port enters
the Discarding state and does not forward
packets. If the port does not receive any RST
BPDUs with a higher priority before a period
(generally two Forward Delay periods)
expires, the port automatically enters the
Forwarding state.
Loop
protection
congestion or a one-way link
failure occurs. After the root
port ages, a switching device
may re-select a root port
enters the Forwarding state.
Loops may occur in such a
situation.
After loop protection is configured, if the root
port or alternate port does not receive RST
BPDUs from the upstream switching device
for a long time, the switching device notifies
the NMS that the port enters the Discarding
state. The blocked port remains in the
Blocked state and no longer forwards packets.
This prevents loops on the network. The root
port restores the Forwarding state after
receiving new BPDUs.

Before configuring basic RSTP functions, complete the following task:
231
l Configuring basic RSTP functions
NOTE
Configuring an edge port on the switching device before configuring BPDU protection.
Data Preparation
To configure basic RSTP functions, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number of the port on which root protection is to be enabled
2 Number of the port on which loop protection is to be enabled

8.4.2 Configuring BPDU Protection on a Switching Device
After BPDU protection is enabled on a switching device, the switching device shuts down an
edge port if the edge port receives a BPDU, and notifies the NMS of the shutdown event.
Context
Edge ports are directly connected to user terminals and normally, the edge ports will not receive
BPDUs. Some attackers may send pseudo BPDUs to attach the switching device. If the edge
ports receive the BPDUs, the switching device automatically configures the edge ports as non-
edge ports and triggers new spanning tree calculation. Network flapping then occurs. BPDU
protection can be used to protect switching devices against malicious attacks.
NOTE
Do as follows on a switching device having an edge port:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp bpdu-protection
BPDU protection is enabled on the switching device.
By default, BPDU protection is not enabled on the switching device.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
To allow an edge port to automatically start after being shut down, you can run the error-down
auto-recovery cause cause-item interval interval-value command to configure the auto
recovery function and set the delay on the port. After the delay expires, the port automatically
goes Up. interval interval-value ranges from 30 to 86400, in seconds. Note the following when
setting this parameter:
232
l The smaller the interval-value is set, the sooner the edge port becomes Up, and the more
frequently the edge port alternates between Up and Down.
l The larger the interval-value is set, the later the edge port becomes Up, and the longer the
service interruption lasts.
8.4.3 Configuring TC Protection on a Switching Device
After TC protection is enabled, you can set the number of times for a switching device to process
TC BPDUs within a given time. TC protection avoids frequent deletion of MAC address entries
and ARP entries, thereby protecting switching devices.
Context
An attacker may send pseudo TC BPDUs to attack switching devices. Switching devices receive
a large number of TC BPDUs in a short time and delete entries frequently, which burdens system
processing and degrades network stability.
TC protection is used to suppress TC BPDUs. The number of times that TC BPDUs are processed
by a switching device within a given time period is configurable. If the number of TC BPDUs
that the switching device receives within a given time exceeds the specified threshold, the
switching device handles TC BPDUs only for the specified number of times. Excess TC-BPDUs
are processed by the switching device as a whole for once after the specified time period expires.
This protects the switching device from frequently deleting MAC entries and ARP entries, thus
avoiding overburden.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp tc-protection
TC protection is enabled for a switching device.
By default, TC protection is enabled on the switching device.
Step 3 Run:
stp tc-protection threshold threshold
The threshold of the number of times the switching device handles the received TC BPDUs and
updates forwarding entries within a given time is set.
NOTE
The value of the given time is consistent with the RSTP Hello time set by using the stp timer hello hello-
time command.
----End
8.4.4 Configuring Root Protection on a Port
The root protection function on a switching device protects a root bridge by preserving the role
of a designated port.
233
Context
Due to incorrect configurations or malicious attacks on the network, a root bridge may receive
BPDUs with a higher priority. Consequently, the legitimate root bridge is no longer able to serve
as the root bridge, and the network topology is incorrectly changed, triggering spanning tree
recalculation. This also may cause the traffic that should be transmitted over high-speed links
to be transmitted over low-speed links, leading to network congestion. The root protection
function on a switching device is used to protect the root bridge by preserving the role of the
designated port.
NOTE
Root protection is configured on a designated port. Root protection takes effect only on a designated port.
Do as follows on the root bridge.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
stp root-protection
Root protection is configured on the switching device.
By default, root protection is disabled.
----End
8.4.5 Configuring Loop Protection on a Port
The loop protection function suppresses the loops caused by link congestion.
Context
On a network running RSTP, a switching device maintains the root port status and status of
blocked ports by receiving BPDUs from an upstream switching device. If the switching device
cannot receive BPDUs from the upstream because of link congestion or unidirectional-link
failure, the switching device re-selects a root port. The original root port becomes a designated
port and the original blocked ports change to the Forwarding state. This may cause network
loops. To address such a problem, configure loop protection.
After loop protection is configured, if the root port or alternate port does not receive BPDUs
from the upstream switching device, the root port is blocked and the switching device notifies
the NMS that the port enters the Discarding state. The blocked port remains in the Blocked state
and no longer forwards packets. This prevents loops on the network. The root port restores the
Forwarding state after receiving new BPDUs.
234
NOTE
An alternate port is a backup port of a root port. If a switching device has an alternate port, you need to
configure loop protection on both the root port and the alternate port.
Do as follows on a root port and an alternate port on a switching device.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
stp loop-protection
Loop protection for the root port or the alternate port is configured on the switching device.
By default, loop protection is disabled.
----End
After RSTP protection functions are configured, you can verify that the configurations take
effect.
Prerequisite
All configurations of RSTP protection functions are complete.
Procedure
view the status of a spanning tree, including the status of protection functions on a switching
device
----End
8.5 Configuring STP/RSTP Interoperability Between
Huawei Devices and Non-Huawei Devices
To supports STP/RSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices,
proper parameters are required on Huawei devices running STP/RSTP to ensure nonstop
communication.
Before configuring STP/RSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei
devices, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration
235
tasks, and obtain the required data. This will help you complete the configuration task quickly
and accurately.
On a network running STP/RSTP, inconsistent protocol packet formats and BPDU keys may
lead to a communication failure. Configuring proper STP/RSTP parameters on Huawei devices
ensures interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices.
Before configuring STP/RSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei
devices, complete the following task:
l Configuring basic STP/RSTP functions
Data Preparation
To configure STP/RSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices, you
need the following data.
No. Data
1 BPDU format

8.5.2 Configuring the Proposal/Agreement Mechanism
To enable Huawei Datacom devices to communicate with non-Huawei devices, a proper rapid
transition mechanism needs to be configured on Huawei devices based on the Proposal/
Agreement mechanism on non-Huawei devices.
Context
The rapid transition mechanism is also called the Proposal/Agreement mechanism. Switching
devices currently support the following modes:
l Enhanced mode: The current interface counts a root port when it counts the synchronization
flag bit.
An upstream device sends a Proposal message to a downstream device, requesting rapid
status transition. After receiving the message, the downstream device sets the port
connected to the upstream device to a root port and blocks all non-edge ports.
The upstream device then sends an Agreement message to the downstream device. After
the downstream device receives the message, the root port transitions to the Forwarding
state.
The downstream device responds the Proposal message with an Agreement message.
After receiving the message, the upstream device sets the port connected to the
downstream device as a designated port. The designated port then transitions to the
Forwarding state.
l Common mode: The current interface ignores the root port when it counts the
synchronization flag bit.
236
connected to the upstream device to a root port and blocks all non-edge ports. The root
port then transitions to the Forwarding state.
The downstream device responds the Proposal message with an Agreement message.
Forwarding state.
When Huawei datacom devices are interworking with non-Huawei devices, select either mode
depending on the Proposal/Agreement mechanisms on non-Huawei devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
stp no-agreement-check
The common rapid transition mechanism is configured.
By default, the interface uses the enhanced rapid transition mechanism.
----End
After MSTP parameters are configured for the interoperability between Huawei devices and
non-Huawei devices, you can verify that the configurations take effect.
Prerequisite
Parameters have been configured to ensure MSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and
non-Huawei devices.
Procedure
view spanning-tree status.
----End
8.6 Maintaining STP/RSTP
STP/RSTP maintenance includes resetting STP/RSTP statistics.
237
8.6.1 Clearing STP/RSTP Statistics
You can run the reset commands to reset STP/RSTP statistics to 0.
Context
CAUTION
STP/RSTP statistics cannot be restored after you clear them. Therefore, exercise caution when
using the reset commands.
After you confirm that STP/RSTP statistics need to be cleared, run the following command in
the user view.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the reset stp [ interface interface-type interface-number ] statistics command to clear
spanning-tree statistics.
----End
This section shows typical usage scenarios of STP/RSTP by describing networking
requirements, configuration roadmap, and data preparation, and provides related configuration
files.
8.7.1 Example for Configuring Basic STP Functions
This example shows how to configure basic STP functions.
situation.
network. Loops also cause flapping of MAC address tables and damages MAC address entries.
STP can be deployed on a network to eliminate loops by blocking some ports. On the network
shown in Figure 8-3, after SwitchA, SwitchB, SwitchC, and SwitchD running STP discover
loops on the network by exchanging information with each other, they trim the ring topology
into a loop-free tree topology by blocking a certain port. In this manner, replication and circular
propagation of packets are prevented on the network and the switching devices are released from
processing duplicated packets, thereby improving their processing performance.
238
Figure 8-3 Networking diagram of configuring basic STP functions
PC1
SwitchA
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Network
SwitchC SwitchB
STP
Blocked port
SwitchD
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2
PC2
Eth0/0/2
Root
Bridge

1. Configure basic STP functions, including:
(1) Configure the STP mode for the ring network.
(2) Configure primary and secondary root bridges.
(3) Set path costs for ports to block certain ports.
(4) Enable STP to eliminate loops.
NOTE
STP is not required on the interfaces connected to terminals because these interfaces do not
need to participate in STP calculation.
Data Preparation
l EthInterface number, as shown in Figure 8-3
l Primary root bridge SwitchA and secondary root bridge SwitchD
l Path cost of a port to be blocked (20000 is used in this example)
239
Procedure
Step 1 Configure basic STP functions.
1. Configure the STP mode for the devices on the ring network.
# Configure the STP mode on SwitchA.
[SwitchA] stp mode stp
# Configure the STP mode on SwitchB.
[SwitchB] stp mode stp
# Configure the STP mode on SwitchC.
[SwitchC] stp mode stp
# Configure the STP mode on SwitchD.
[SwitchD] stp mode stp
2. Configure primary and secondary root bridges.
# Configure SwitchA as a primary root bridge.
[SwitchA] stp root primary
# Configure SwitchD as a secondary root bridge.
[SwitchD] stp root secondary
3. Set path costs for ports in each spanning tree to block certain ports.
NOTE
l The values of path costs depend on path cost calculation methods. Use the Huawei proprietary
calculation method as an example to set the path costs of the ports to be blocked to 20000.
l All switching devices on a network must use the same path cost calculation method.
# Set the path cost of Eth0/0/1 on SwitchC to 20000.
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] stp cost 20000
4. Enable STP to eliminate loops.
l Disable STP on interfaces connected to PCs.
# Disable STP on Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchB.
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/2] stp disable
# Disable STP on Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchC.
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/2] stp disable
l Enable STP globally.
# Enable STP globally on SwitchA.
[SwitchA] stp enable
# Enable STP globally on SwitchB.
[SwitchB] stp enable
240
# Enable STP globally on SwitchC.
[SwitchC] stp enable
# Enable STP globally on SwitchD.
[SwitchD] stp enable
l Enable BPDU on all the interfaces except the interfaces connected to terminals.
# Enable BPDU on Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchA.
# Enable BPDU on Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/3 on SwitchB.
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] bpdu enable
# Enable BPDU on Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/3 on SwitchC.
# Enable BPDU on Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchD.
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/1] bpdu enable
After the previous configurations, run the following commands to verify the configuration when
the network is stable:
# Run the display stp brief command on SwitchA to view the interface status and protection
type. The displayed information is as follows:
[SwitchA] display stp brief
MSTID Port Role STP State Protection
0 Ethernet0/0/1 DESI FORWARDING NONE
After SwitchA is configured as a root bridge, Eth 0/0/2 and Eth 0/0/1 connected to SwitchB and
SwitchD respectively are elected as designated ports in spanning tree calculation.
# Run the display stp interface ethernet 0/0/1 brief command on SwitchB to view status of
Eth 0/0/1. The displayed information is as follows:
[SwitchB] display stp interface ethernet 0/0/1 brief
Eth 0/0/1 is elected as a designated port in spanning tree calculation and is in the Forwarding
state.
241
# Run the display stp brief command on SwitchC to view the interface status and protection
[SwitchC] display stp brief
0 Ethernet0/0/1 ALTE DISCARDING NONE
0 Ethernet0/0/3 ROOT FORWARDING NONE
Eth 0/0/1 is elected as an alternate port in spanning tree calculation and is in the Discarding state.
Eth 0/0/3 is elected as a root port in spanning tree calculation and is in the Forwarding state.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname
SwitchA
#
stp mode
stp
stp instance 0 root
primary
#
return
#
sysname
SwitchB
#
stp mode
stp
#
stp disable
#
return
#
sysname
SwitchC
#
stp mode
stp
#
stp instance 0 cost
20000
#
stp disable
#
return
#
sysname
SwitchD
#
stp mode
stp
stp instance 0 root
secondary
242
#
return
8.7.2 Example for Configuring Basic RSTP Functions
This example describes how to configure basic RSTP functions.
On a complex network, loops often occur. To implement network redundancy backup, network
designers tend to deploy multiple physical links between two devices, one of which is the master
device and the others are backup devices. Loops are likely or bound to occur in such a situation.
Loops will cause broadcast storms, exhausting network resources and making the network break
down. Loops also cause flapping of MAC address tables and damage MAC address entries.
RSTP can be deployed on a network to eliminate loops by blocking some ports. On the network
shown in Figure 8-4, after SwitchA, SwitchB, SwitchC, and SwitchD running RSTP detect
loops on the network by exchanging information with each other, they trim the ring topology
into a loop-free tree topology by blocking a certain port. In this manner, packets are not replicated
and looped on the network and switching devices do not need to process duplicate packets,
improving their processing performance.
Figure 8-4 Networking diagram of basic RSTP functions
PC1
SwitchA
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Network
SwitchC SwitchB
RSTP
Blocked port
SwitchD
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2
PC2
Eth0/0/2
Root
Bridge

243
1. Configure basic RSTP functions, including:
(1) Configure the RSTP mode for the ring network.
(2) Configure primary and secondary root bridges.
(3) Set path costs for ports in each MSTI to block certain ports.
(4) Enable RSTP to eliminate loops.
NOTE
RSTP is not required on the interfaces connected to terminals because these interfaces do not
need to participate in RSTP calculation.
2. Configure RSTP protection functions, for example, root protection on a designated port of
a root bridge in each MSTI.
Data Preparation
l Eth interface number, as shown in Figure 8-4
l Primary root bridge SwitchA and secondary root bridge SwitchD
l Path cost of a port to be blocked (20000 is used in this example)
Procedure
Step 1 Configure basic RSTP functions.
1. Configure the RSTP mode for the devices on the ring network.
# Configure the RSTP mode on SwitchA.
[SwitchA] stp mode rstp
# Configure the RSTP mode on SwitchB.
[SwitchB] stp mode rstp
# Configure the RSTP mode on SwitchC.
[SwitchC] stp mode rstp
# Configure the RSTP mode on SwitchD.
[SwitchD] stp mode rstp
2. Configure primary and secondary root bridges.
# Configure SwitchA as a primary root bridge.
[SwitchA] stp root primary
# Configure SwitchD as a secondary root bridge.
[SwitchD] stp root secondary
3. Set path costs for ports to block certain ports.
244
NOTE
l The values of path costs depend on path cost calculation methods. Use the Huawei proprietary
calculation method as an example to set the path costs of the ports to be blocked to 20000.
l All switching devices on a network must use the same path cost calculation method.
# Set the path cost of Eth0/0/1 on SwitchC to 20000.
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] stp cost 20000
4. Enable RSTP to eliminate loops.
l Disable RSTP on interfaces connected to PCs.
# Disable RSTP on Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchB.
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/2] stp disable
# Disable RSTP on Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchC.
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/2] stp disable
l Enable RSTP globally.
# Enable RSTP globally on SwitchA.
# Enable RSTP globally on SwitchB.
# Enable RSTP globally on SwitchC.
# Enable RSTP globally on SwitchD.
l Enable BPDU on all the interfaces except the interfaces connected to terminals.
# Enable BPDU on Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchA.
# Enable BPDU on Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/3 on SwitchB.
# Enable BPDU on Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/3 on SwitchC.
# Enable BPDU on Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchD.
245
Step 2 Configure RSTP protection functions.
# Enable root protection on Eth 0/0/1 on SwitchA.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] stp root-protection
# Enable root protection on Eth 0/0/2 on SwitchA.
After the previous configurations, run the following commands to verify the configuration when
the network is stable:
# Run the display stp brief command on SwitchA to view the interface status and protection
[SwitchA] display stp brief
0 Ethernet0/0/1 DESI FORWARDING ROOT
After SwitchA is configured as a root bridge, Eth 0/0/2 and Eth 0/0/1 connected to SwitchB and
SwitchD respectively are elected as designated ports in spanning tree calculation. The root
protection function is enabled on the designated ports.
# Run the display stp interface ethernet 0/0/1 brief command on SwitchB to view status of
Eth 0/0/1. The displayed information is as follows:
[SwitchB] display stp interface ethernet 0/0/1 brief
Eth 0/0/1 is elected as a designated port in spanning tree calculation and is in the Forwarding
state.
# Run the display stp brief command on SwitchC to view the interface status and protection
[SwitchC] display stp brief
Eth 0/0/1 is elected as an alternate port in spanning tree calculation and is in the Discarding state.
Eth 0/0/3 is elected as a root port in spanning tree calculation and is in the Forwarding state.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname SwitchA
#
246
stp mode
rstp
stp instance 0 root
primary
#
stp root-
protection
#
stp root-
protection
#
return
#
sysname SwitchB
#
stp mode
rstp
#
stp disable
#
return
#
sysname SwitchC
#
stp mode
rstp
#
stp instance 0 cost
20000
#
stp disable
#
return
#
sysname SwitchD
#
stp mode
rstp
stp instance 0 root
secondary
#
return
247
9 MSTP Configuration
About This Chapter
The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) trims a ring network into a loop-free tree network.
It prevents replication and circular propagation of packets, provides multiple redundant paths
for Virtual LAN (VLAN) data traffic, and enables load balancing.
9.1 MSTP Overview
MSTP enables multiple VLANs to be grouped into a spanning-tree instance, forming a VLAN
mapping table. Each instance has a spanning-tree topology independent of other spanning-tree
instances. This architecture provides multiple forwarding paths for data traffic and enables load
balancing.
9.2 Configuring Basic MSTP Functions
MSTP based on the basic STP/RSTP function divides a switching network into multiple regions,
each of which has multiple spanning trees that are independent of each other. MSTP isolates
user traffic and service traffic, and load-balances VLAN traffic.
9.3 Configuring MSTP Multi-process
After an MSTP device binds its ports to different processes, the MSTP device performs the
MSTP calculation based on processes, and only relevant ports in each process take part in MSTP
calculation.
9.4 Configuring MSTP Parameters on an Interface
MSTP implements RSTP rapid convergence. To achieve rapid convergence, you need to
configure proper MSTP parameters.
9.5 Configuring MSTP Protection Functions
MSTP protection functions are as follows, and you can configure one or more functions as
required.
9.6 Configuring MSTP Interoperability Between Huawei Devices and Non-Huawei Devices
To enable Huawei devices to interwork with non-Huawei devices, configure proper parameters
and functions, including the BPDU format, MSTP protocol packet format, and digest snooping
function, on the Huawei devices running MSTP.
9.7 Maintaining MSTP
MSTP maintenance includes resetting MSTP statistics.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 9 MSTP Configuration
248
This section provides a configuration example of MSTP.
249
9.1 MSTP Overview
MSTP enables multiple VLANs to be grouped into a spanning-tree instance, forming a VLAN
mapping table. Each instance has a spanning-tree topology independent of other spanning-tree
instances. This architecture provides multiple forwarding paths for data traffic and enables load
balancing.
9.1.1 MSTP Introduction
The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) incorporates the functions of the Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP) and Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), and outperforms them. It enables
rapid convergence and provides load balancing across redundant paths.
Background
STP and RSTP are used in a LAN to prevent loops. The devices running STP/RSTP discover
loops on the network by exchanging information with each other and trim the ring topology into
a loop-free tree topology by blocking a certain interface. Replication and circular propagation
of packets are thus prevented on the network and the processing performance of devices is
improved by avoiding repeated packets on the network.
STP and RSTP both have a defect: All VLANs on a LAN use one spanning tree, and thus inter-
VLAN load balancing cannot be performed. Once a link is blocked, the link will no longer
transmit traffic, wasting bandwidth and causing a failure in forwarding certain VLAN packets.
To fix the defect of STP and RSTP, the IEEE released the 802.1s standard in 2002, defining
MSTP. MSTP compatible with STP and RSTP implements rapid convergence and provides
multiple paths to load balance VLAN traffic.
Table 9-1 shows the comparison between STP, RSTP, and MSTP.
250
Table 9-1 Comparison between STP, RSTP, and MSTP
Spannin
g Tree
Protocol
s
Characteristics Application Scenarios Precautions
STP A loop-free tree is
generated. Thus,
prevented and
redundancy is
implemented.
Irrespective of different
users or services, all
VLANs share one
spanning tree.
NOTE
l If the current
switching device
supports only STP,
STP is
recommended. For
details, see STP/
RSTP
Configuration.
l If the current
switching device
supports both STP
and RSTP, RSTP is
recommended. For
details, see STP/
RSTP
Configuration.
l If the current
switching device
supports STP or
RSTP, and MSTP,
MSTP is
recommended.
RSTP l A loop-free tree is
generated. Thus,
prevented and
redundancy is
implemented.
l A feedback
mechanism is
provided to confirm
topology
convergence. Thus,
rapid convergence is
implemented.
MSTP l A loop-free tree or
some loop-free trees
are generated. Thus,
prevented and
redundancy is
implemented.
l A feedback
mechanism is
provided to confirm
topology
convergence. Thus,
rapid convergence is
implemented.
l MSTP implements
load balancing among
VLANs. Traffic in
different VLANs is
transmitted along
different paths.
User or service-specific
load balancing is
required. Traffic for
different VLANs is
forwarded through
different spanning trees,
which are independent of
each other.

Introduction
251
situation.
entries.
MSTP, compatible with STP and RSTP, isolates service traffic and user traffic by using multiple
instances and provides multiple paths to load balance VLAN traffic.
If MSTP is deployed in the LAN shown in Figure 9-1, MSTIs are generated, as shown in Figure
9-1.
Figure 9-1 Multiple spanning trees in an MST region
SwitchA
SwitchE SwitchB
SwitchC SwitchF
SwitchD
Host C Host A
Host D Host B
(VLAN3) (VLAN2)
(VLAN3) (VLAN2)
VLAN3
VLAN2
VLAN2
VLAN2
VLAN3
VLAN2
VLAN3
VLAN3
VLAN2 VLAN3
VLAN2 VLAN3
MSTI2 (root switch: SwitchF)
MSTI1 (root switch: SwitchD) VLAN2 --> MSTI1
VLAN3 --> MSTI2
VLAN3
VLAN2

l MSTI 1 uses Switch D as the root switching device to forward packets of VLAN 2.
l MSTI 2 uses Switch F as the root switching device to forward packets of VLAN 3.
Devices within the same VLAN can communicate with each other and packets of different
VLANs are load-balanced along different paths.
Basic MSTP Concepts
l MST region
An MST region contains multiple switching devices and network segments between them.
The switching devices have the following characteristics:
MSTP-enabled
Same region name
Same VLAN-to-instance mapping
Same MSTP revision number
252
A LAN can comprise several MST regions that are directly or indirectly connected.
Multiple switching devices can be grouped into an MST region by using MSTP
configuration commands.
As shown in Figure 9-2, the MST region D0 contains the switching devices S1, S2, S3,
and S4, and has three MSTIs.
Figure 9-2 MST region
D0
S1
other VLANs MSTI0
S2
S4
S3
VLAN1 MSTI1
VLAN2,VLAN3 MSTI2
MSTI1
root switch:S3
MSTI2
root switch:S2
MSTI0 (IST)
root switch:S1
AP1
Master Bridge

l VLAN mapping table
The VLAN mapping table is an attribute of the MST region. It describes mappings between
VLANs and MSTIs.
Figure 9-2 shows the mappings in the VLAN mapping table of the MST region D0:
VLAN 1 is mapped to MSTI 1.
VLAN 2 and VLAN 3 are mapped to MSTI 2.
Other VLANs are mapped to MSTI 0.
l Regional root
Regional roots are classified into Internal Spanning Tree (IST) and MSTI regional roots.
In the region B0, C0, and D0 on the network shown in Figure 9-4, the switching devices
closest to the Common and Internal Spanning Tree (CIST) root are IST regional roots.
An MST region can contain multiple spanning trees, each called an MSTI. An MSTI
regional root is the root of the MSTI. On the network shown in Figure 9-3, each MSTI has
its own regional root.
253
Figure 9-3 MSTI
Root
VLAN
10&20&30
V
L
A
N
1
0
&
2
0
VLAN 20&30
VLAN
10&30
V
L
A
N
3
0
VLAN
10&30
V
L
A
N
2
0
VLAN 10
MST Region
Root
MSTI
corresponding to
VLAN 10
Root
MSTI
corresponding to
VLAN 20
MSTI
corresponding to
VLAN 30
MSTI links
MSTI links blocked by the protocol

MSTIs are independent of each other. An MSTI can correspond to one or more VLANs,
but a VLAN can be mapped to only one MSTI.
l CIST root
254
Figure 9-4 MSTP network
CIST Root
A0
B0
C0
D0
Region Root
Region Root
Region Root
CST
IST

On the network shown in Figure 9-4, the CIST root is the root bridge of a CIST. The CIST
root is a device in A0.
l CST
A Common Spanning Tree (CST) connects all the MST regions on a switching network.
Each MST region can be considered a node. A CST is calculated by using STP or RSTP
based on all the nodes.
As shown in Figure 9-4, the MST regions are connected to form a CST.
l IST
An IST resides within an MST region.
An IST is a special MSTI with the MSTI ID of 0, called MSTI 0.
An IST is a segment of the CIST in an MST region.
As shown in Figure 9-4, the switching devices in an MST region are connected to form an
IST.
l CIST
A CIST, calculated by using STP or RSTP, connects all the switching devices on a switching
network.
As shown in Figure 9-4, the ISTs and the CST form a complete spanning tree, that is, CIST.
l SST
A Single Spanning Tree (SST) is formed in either of the following situations:
255
A switching device running STP or RSTP belongs to only one spanning tree.
An MST region has only one switching device.
As shown in Figure 9-4, the switching device in B0 is an SST.
l Port roles
Compared with RSTP, MSTP has two additional port types. MSTP ports can be root ports,
designated ports, alternate ports, backup ports, edge ports, master ports, and regional edge
ports.
The functions of root ports, designated ports, alternate ports, backup ports, and edge ports
have been defined in RSTP. Table 9-2 lists all port roles in MSTP.
NOTE
Except edge ports, all ports participate in MSTP calculation.
A port can play different roles in different MSTIs.
Table 9-2 Port roles
Port
Roles
Description
Root port A root port is the non-root bridge port closest to the root bridge. Root bridges
do not have root ports.
Root ports are responsible for sending data to root bridges.
As shown in Figure 9-5, S1 is the root; CP1 is the root port on S3; BP1 is
the root port on S2; DP1 is the root port on S4.
Designat
ed port
The designated port on a switching device forwards bridge protocol data
units (BPDUs) to the downstream switching device.
As shown in Figure 9-5, AP2 and AP3 are designated ports on S1; BP2 is
a designated port on S2; CP2 is a designated port on S3.
Alternate
port
l From the perspective of sending BPDUs, an alternate port is blocked after
a BPDU sent by another switching devices is received.
l From the perspective of user traffic, an alternate port provides an
alternate path to the root bridge. This path is different than using the root
port.
As shown in Figure 9-5, BP2 and AP4 are alternate ports.
Backup
port
l From the perspective of sending BPDUs, a backup port is blocked after
a BPDU sent by itself is received.
l From the perspective of user traffic, a backup port provides a backup/
redundant path to a segment where a designated port already connects.
As shown in Figure 9-5, CP3 is a backup port.
256
Port
Roles
Description
Master
port
A master port is on the shortest path connecting MST regions to the CIST
root.
BPDUs of an MST region are sent to the CIST root through the master port.
Master ports are special regional edge ports, functioning as root ports on
ISTs or CISTs and master ports in instances.
As shown in Figure 9-5, S1, S2, S3, and S4 form an MST region. AP1 on
S1, being the nearest port in the region to the CIST root, is the master port.
Regional
edge port
A regional edge port is located at the edge of an MST region and connects
to another MST region or an SST.
During MSTP calculation, the roles of a regional edge port in the MSTI and
the CIST instance are the same. If the regional edge port is the master port
in the CIST instance, it is the master port in all the MSTIs in the region.
As shown in Figure 9-5, AP1, DP2, and DP3 in an MST region are directly
connected to other regions, and therefore they are all regional edge ports of
the MST region.
As shown in Figure 9-5, AP1 is a regional edge port and also a master port
in the CIST. Therefore, AP1 is the master port in every MSTI in the MST
region.
Edge
port
An edge port is located at the edge of an MST region and does not connect
to any switching device.
Generally, edge ports are directly connected to terminals.
As shown in Figure 9-5, BP3 is an edge port.

Figure 9-5 Port roles
S1
AP2
S2 S3
AP3
CP2 CP3
BP2
CP1 BP1
S4
Root Bridge
MST Region
AP1
AP4
DP1
DP4
DP2
DP3
PC
Root port
Designated port
Alternate port
Backup port
Master port
Edge port
Regional edge port
BP3
257

l Port status
Table 9-3 lists the MSTP port status, which is the same as the RSTP port status.
Table 9-3 Port status
Port
Status
Description
Forwardi
ng
A port in the Forwarding state can send and receive BPDUs as well as
forward user traffic.
Learning This is a transition state. A port in the Learning state learns MAC addresses
from user traffic to construct a MAC address table.
In the Learning state, the port can send and receive BPDUs, but cannot
forward user traffic.
Discardi
ng
A port in the Discarding state can only receive BPDUs.

There is no necessary link between the port status and the port role. Table 9-4 lists the
relationships between port roles and port status.
Table 9-4 Relationships between port roles and port status
Port
Status
Root Port/
Master
Port
Designate
d Port
Regional
Edge Port
Alternate
Port
Backup
Port
Forwardi
ng
Yes Yes Yes No No
Learning Yes Yes Yes No No
Discardi
ng
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes: The port supports this status.
No: The port does not support this status.
9.1.2 MSTP Features Supported by the S3700
Before configuring MSTP, familiarize yourself with the concepts of basic MSTP functions,
topology convergence, MSTP protection, MSTP multi-process, and MSTP interoperability
between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices. This will help you complete the configuration
task quickly and accurately.
MSTP is used to block redundant links on the Layer 2 network and trim a network into a loop-
free tree. In MSTP, multiple MSTIs can be created and VLANs are mapped into different
instances to load-balance VLAN traffic. The basic configuration roadmap of MSTP is as follows:
258
1. In a ring network, divide regions and create different instances for regions.
2. Select a switching device functioning as a root bridge from switching devices for each
instance.
3. In each instance, calculate the shortest paths from the other switching devices to the root
bridge, and select a root port for each non-root switching device.
4. In each instance, select a designated port for each connection according to port IDs.
According to current networking, master ports and backup ports may be involved. For details,
see 9.1.1 MSTP Introduction.
MSTP also supports the following features to meet requirements of special applications and
extended functions:
l Supports the Proposal/Agreement mechanism to implement rapid convergence.
l Supports protection functions as listed in Table 9-5.
l Supports MSTP multi-process in the scenario where MSTP and STP/RSTP are used
together. MSTP multi-process implements independent spanning tree calculation for every
access rings.
l Supports MSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices. Proper
parameters are required on Huawei devices running MSTP to ensure nonstop
communication.
NOTE
Only the S3700HI supports MSTP multi-process.
Table 9-5 MSTP protection
MSTP
Protection
BPDU
protection
non-edge port after
advertising network
resources.
device receives within the given time exceeds
number of times. Excessive TC-BPDUs are
for once after the timeout period expires. This
protects the switching device from frequently
deleting MAC entries and ARP entries, thus
avoiding over-burden.
259
MSTP
Protection
Root
protection
Due to incorrect
BPDUs with a higher
changed, triggering
traffic congestion.
To address this issue, the root protection
function can be configured to protect the root
bridge by preserving the role of the
designated port. With this function, when the
designated port receives RST BPDUs with a
higher priority, the port enters the Discarding
state and does not forward the BPDUs. If the
port does not receive any RST BPDUs with a
higher priority for a certain period (double the
Forward Delay), the port transitions to the
Forwarding state.
Loop
protection
situation.
The loop protection function can be used to
prevent such network loops. If the root port
or alternate port cannot receive RST BPDUs
from the upstream switching device, the root
port is blocked and the switching device
Discarding state. The blocked port remains in
the Blocked state and no longer forwards
packets. This prevents loops on the network.
The root port restores the Forwarding state
after new RST BPDUs are received.
Share-link
protection
In the scenario where a
switching device is dual-
homed to a network, when
the share link of multiple
processes fails, loops may
occur.
Share-link protection can address such a
problem. This function forcibly changes the
working mode of the local switching device
to RSTP. Share-link protection needs to be
used together with root protection to avoid
network loops.

MSTP Multi-process
l Background
As shown in Figure 9-6, SwitchA, SwitchB, and SwitchC are connected through Layer 2
links, and are all enabled with MSTP. The CEs on the rings support only STP/RSTP.
Multiple access rings exist and these rings access the MST region by using different
interfaces on SwitchA and SwitchB.
260
Figure 9-6 Networking diagram of MSTP multi-process
SwitchA
SwitchB
SwitchC
PE1
PE2
CE
CE
CE CE
CE
CE
Instance1:VLAN2~100
Instance2:VLAN101~200
Process 1
Process 2
Process 3
Ring2
Ring1 Ring3

On the network shown in Figure 9-6, multiple Layer 2 rings, Ring 1, Ring 2, and Ring 3
exists. STP must be enabled on these rings to prevent loops. SwitchA and SwitchB are
connected to multiple access rings and these rings are isolated from each other and do not
need intercommunication. STP then will not calculate out one spanning tree for all these
access rings. Instead, STP on each access ring calculates the trees independently.
MSTP supports multiple spanning tree instances (MSTIs) only when all devices support
MSTP and the devices are configured with the same MST region. In the networking, the
CEs connected to switching devices, however, support only STP/RSTP. According to
MSTP, switching devices consider that they are in different regions with CEs after receiving
STP/RSTP messages sent from the CEs. Therefore, only one spanning tree is calculated
for the ring formed by switching devices and CEs and the access rings are not independent
of each other.
In this case, MSTP multi-process can be used. Multiple MSTP processes can be configured
on SwitchA and SwitchB. Each MSTP process has the same function and supports MSTIs.
Each MSTP process corresponds to one access ring.
After MSTP multi-process is enabled, each MSTP process can manage some interfaces on
a device. That is, Layer 2 interfaces on the device are divided and managed by multiple
MSTP processes. Each MSTP process runs the standard MSTP.
NOTE
CEs that support MSTP can also be configured with MSTP multi-process.
After a device properly starts, there is a default MSTP process with the ID 0. MSTP configurations
in the system view and interface view both belong to this process.
l Share link
As shown in Figure 9-6, the link between SwitchA and SwitchB is a Layer 2 link running
MSTP. The share link between SwitchA and SwitchB is different from the links connecting
261
switching devices to CEs. The ports on the share link need to participate in the calculation
for multiple access rings and MSTP processes. This allows SwitchA and SwitchB to
identify from which MST BPDUs are sent.
In addition, a port on the share link participates in the calculation for multiple MSTP
processes, and obtains different status. As a result, the port cannot determine its status.
To prevent this situation, it is defined that a port on a share link always adopts its status in
MSTP process 0 when participating in the calculation for multiple MSTP processes.
NOTE
The S3700 does not support the Per-VLAN Spanning Tree (PVST) protocol and cannot process PVST
packets. You can configure the S3700 to transparently transmit PVST packets. For details, see 11 Layer
2 Protocol Transparent Transmission Configuration.
9.2 Configuring Basic MSTP Functions
MSTP based on the basic STP/RSTP function divides a switching network into multiple regions,
each of which has multiple spanning trees that are independent of each other. MSTP isolates
user traffic and service traffic, and load-balances VLAN traffic.
MSTP is commonly configured on a switching device to trim a ring network to a loop-free
network. MSTP configurations on the switching device involve MSTP working mode
configuration and MST region configuration and activation. If you need to interfere in the
spanning tree calculation, the following methods are available:
l Setting a priority for a switching device in an MSTI: The lower the numerical value, the
higher the priority of the switching device and the more likely the switching device becomes
a root bridge; the higher the numerical value, the lower the priority of the switching device
and the less likely that the switching device becomes a root bridge.
l Setting a path cost for a port in an MSTI: With the same calculation method, the lower the
numerical value, the smaller the cost of the path from the port to the root bridge and the
more likely the port becomes a root port; the higher the numerical value, the larger the cost
of the path from the port to the root bridge and the less likely that the port becomes a root
port.
l Setting a priority for a port in an MSTI: The lower the numerical value, the more likely the
port becomes a designated port; the higher the numerical value, the less likely that the port
becomes a designated port.
Before configuring basic MSTP functions, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This will help you complete
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
situation.
entries.
262
MSTP can be deployed on a network to eliminate loops. If a loop is detected, MSTP blocks one
or more ports to eliminate the loop. In addition, MSTIs can be configured to load-balance VLAN
traffic.
As shown in Figure 9-7, Switches A, B, C, and D all support MSTP. It is required to create
MSTI 1 and MSTI 2, configure a root bridge for each MSTI, and set the ports to be blocked to
load-balance traffic of VLANs 1 to 10 and VLANs 11 to 20 among different paths.
Figure 9-7 Networking diagram of configuring basic MSTP functions
SwitchA
SwitchC
SwitchB
SwitchD
PC1
PC2
Root Switch:SwitchA
Root Switch:SwitchB
MSTI1:
MSTI2:
Blocked port
Blocked port
MST Region
Network
VLAN1~10
VLAN11~20
MSTI1
MSTI2

263
NOTE
If the current device supports MSTP, configuring MSTP is recommended.
Before configuring basic MSTP functions, complete the following task:
physical status of the interfaces is Up
l Configuring VLAN features of the ports
Data Preparation
To configure basic MSTP functions, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 MSTP working mode
2 MST region name, VLAN-to-instance mapping, and MSTP revision number
3 (Optional) ID of an MSTI
4 (Optional) Priority of a switching device in an MSTI
5 (Optional) Priority of a port in an MSTI
6 (Optional) Path cost of a port in an MSTI

9.2.2 Configuring the MSTP Mode
Before configuring basic MSTP functions, you need to configure the working mode of a
switching device to MSTP. MSTP is compatible with STP and RSTP.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp mode mstp
The working mode of the switching device is configured as MSTP. By default, the working
mode is MSTP.
STP and MSTP cannot recognize packets of each other but MSTP and RSTP can. If a switching
device is configured to work in MSTP mode and is connected to some switching devices running
STP, the switching device automatically transits the working mode of the interfaces connected
to the switching devices running STP to STP and other interfaces still run MSTP. This enables
devices running different spanning tree protocols to interwork with each other.
----End
264
9.2.3 Configuring and Activating an MST Region
MSTP divides a switching network into multiple MST regions. After an MST region name,
VLAN-to-instance mappings, and an MSTP revision number are configured, activating the MST
region is necessary. After this step is done, MST region configuration is complete.
Context
An MST region contains multiple switching devices and network segments between them. These
switching devices are directly connected and have the same region name, same VLAN-to-
instance mapping, same configuration revision number after MSTP is enabled. One switching
network can have multiple MST regions and multiple switching devices can be grouped into
one MST region by using MSTP configuration commands.
CAUTION
Two switching devices belong to the same MST region when they have the same:
l Name of the MST region
l Mapping between VLANs and MSTIs
l Revision level of the MST region
Do as follows on a switching device that needs to join an MST region:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp region-configuration
The MST region view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
region-name name
The name of an MST region is configured.
By default, the MST region name is the MAC address of the management network interface on
the MPU of the switching device.
Step 4 Perform either of the following steps to configure VLAN-to-instance mappings.
l Run the instance instance-id vlan { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] }&<1-10> command to configure
VLAN-to-instance mappings.
l Run the vlan-mapping modulo modulo command to enable VLAN-to-instance mapping
assignment based on a default algorithm.
By default, all VLANs in an MST region are mapped to MSTI 0.
265
NOTE
l The instance instance-id vlan { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] }&<1-10> command is recommended because
VLAN-to-instance mapping assignments cannot meet actual mapping requirements.
l In the command, vlan-mapping modulo indicates that the formula (VLAN ID-1)%modulo+1 is used.
In the formula, (VLAN ID-1)%modulo means the remainder of (VLAN ID-1) divided by the value of
modulo. This formula is used to map a VLAN to the corresponding MSTI. The calculation result of
the formula is ID of the mapping MSTI.
revision-level level
The MSTP revision number is set.
By default, the MSTP revision number is 0.
If the revision number of the MST region is not 0, this step is necessary.
NOTE
The change of related MST region configurations (especially change of the VLAN mapping table) causes
the recalculation of spanning trees and the route flapping in a network. Therefore, after an MST region
name, VLAN-to-instance mappings, and an MSTP revision number is configured, activating the MST
region is necessary. You can run the check region-configuration command in the MST region view to check
whether region configurations are correct. After confirming that region configurations are correct, run the
active region-configuration command to activate MST region configurations.
Step 6 Run:
active region-configuration
MST region configurations are activated so that the configured region name, VLAN-to-instance
mappings, and revision number can take effect.
If this step is not done, the preceding configurations cannot take effect.
If you have changed MST region configurations on the switching device after MSTP starts, run
the active region-configuration command to activate the MST region so that the changed
configurations can take effect.
----End
9.2.4 (Optional) Setting a Priority for a Switching Device in an MSTI
The lower the numerical value is, the higher priority a switching device has and the more likely
the switching device will be selected as a root bridge.
Context
In an MSTI, there is only one root bridge and it is the logic center of the MSTI. In root bridge
selection, the switching device with high performance and network hierarchy is generally
selected as a root bridge; however, the priority of such a device may be not that high. Thus setting
a high priority for the switching device is necessary so that the device can function as a root
bridge.
Other devices with low performance and network hierarchy are not fit to be a root bridge.
Therefore, set low priorities for these devices.
266
CAUTION
If an S3700 is configured as the root switch or secondary root switch, the priority of the
S3700 cannot be set. If you want to set the priority of the S3700, you must disable the root switch
or secondary root switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp [ instance instance-id ] priority priority
A priority is set for the switching device in an MSTI.
The default priority value of the switching device is 32768.
If the instance is not designated, a priority is set for the switching device in MSTI0.
NOTE
l To configure a switching device as a primary root bridge, you can run the stp [ instance instance-id ]
root primary command directly. The priority value of this switching device is 0.
l To configure a switching device as a secondary root bridge, run the stp [ instance instance-id ] root
secondary command. The priority value of this switching device is 4096.
In an MSTI, a switching device cannot act as a primary root bridge and a secondary root bridge at the
same time.
----End
9.2.5 (Optional) Setting a Path Cost of a Port in an MSTI
The MSTP path cost determines root port selection in an MSTI. The port with the lowest path
cost to the root bridge is selected as a root port.
Context
A path cost is port-specific, which is used by MSTP as a reference to select a link.
Path costs of a port are an important basis for calculating spanning trees. If you set different path
costs for a port in different MSTIs, you can make VLAN traffic be transmitted along different
physical links and thus carry out VLAN load balancing.
On a network where loops occur, you are recommended to set a relatively large path cost for the
port at a low link rate. MSTP puts the port with the large path cost in the Blocking state and
blocks the link where this port resides.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
267
Step 2 Run:
stp pathcost-standard { dot1d-1998 | dot1t | legacy }
A path cost calculation method is configured.
By default, the IEEE 802.1t standard method is used to calculate the default path cost.
All switching devices on a network must use the same path cost calculation method.
Step 3 Run:
Step 4 Run:
stp instance instance-id cost cost
A path cost is set for the port in the current MSTI.
l When the Huawei proprietory calculation method is used, cost ranges from 1 to 200000.
l When the IEEE 802.1d standard method is used, cost ranges from 1 to 65535.
l When the IEEE 802.1t standard method is used, cost ranges from 1 to 200000000.
----End
9.2.6 (Optional) Setting a Port Priority in an MSTI
The lower the numerical value, the more likely the port on a switching device becomes a
designated port; the higher the numerical value, the more likely the port is to be blocked.
Context
In spanning tree calculation, priorities of ports on switching devices in MSTIs determine
designated port selection.
If you expect to block a port on a switching device in an MSTI to eliminate loops, set the port
priority value to be larger than the default value. This port will be blocked in designated port
selection.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
stp instance instance-id port priority priority
A port priority is set in an MSTI.
By default, the port priority is 128.
268
The value range of the priority is from 0 to 240, with the step 16. That is, the port priority can
be 0, 16, or 32.
----End
9.2.7 Enabling MSTP
After basic MSTP functions are configured on a switching device, enabling the MSTP function
is required so that MSTP can work properly.
Context
After MSTP is enabled on a ring network, MSTP immediately calculates spanning trees on the
network. Configurations on the switching device, such as, the switching device priority and port
priority, will affect spanning tree calculation. Any change of the configurations may cause
network flapping. Therefore, to ensure rapid and stable spanning tree calculation, perform basic
configurations on the switching device and its ports and enable MSTP.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp enable
MSTP is enabled on the switching device.
By default, the MSTP function is enabled on a S3700.
----End
After basic MSTP functions are configured, verify that the configurations take effect.
Prerequisite
All configurations of basic MSTP functions are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display stp [ instance instance-id ][ interface { interface-type interface-
number } ] [ brief ] command to view spanning-tree status and statistics.
l Run the display stp region-configuration command to view configurations of activated
MST regions.
l Run the display stp region-configuration [ digest ] command to view the digest
configurations of activated MST regions.
----End
269
9.3 Configuring MSTP Multi-process
After an MSTP device binds its ports to different processes, the MSTP device performs the
MSTP calculation based on processes, and only relevant ports in each process take part in MSTP
calculation.
Before configuring MSTP multi-process, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
the configuration task quickly and accurately.
On the networking with both Layer 2 single-access rings and multi-access rings deployed,
switching devices bear both Layer 2 and Layer 3 services. To enable different rings to bear
different services, deploy MSTP multi-process. Spanning trees of different processes are
calculated independently and do not affect each other.
As shown in Figure 9-8, Switches A, B, and C are connected through Layer 2 links, and are all
enabled with MSTP. The CEs on the on rings support only STP/RSTP. Multiple access rings
exist and these rings access the MSTP region through different interfaces on Switches A and B.
Figure 9-8 Networking diagram of MSTP multi-process
SwitchA
SwitchB
SwitchC
PE1
PE2
CE
CE
CE CE
CE
CE
Instance1:VLAN2~100
Process 1
Process 2
Process 3
Ring2
Ring1 Ring3

270
Before configuring MSTP multi-process, complete the following task:
l Configuring basic MSTP functions
Data Preparation
To configure MSTP multi-process, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 IDs of MSTP processes
2 Priority of a switching device in an MSTI

9.3.2 Creating an MSTP Process
A process ID uniquely identifies an MSTP multi-process. After an MSTP device binds its ports
to different processes, the MSTP device performs the MSTP calculation based on processes, and
only relevant ports in each process take part in MSTP calculation.
Context
Do as follows on the devices connected to access rings:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp process process-id
An MSTP process is created and the MSTP process view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
stp mode mstp
A working mode is configured for the MSTP process.
The default mode is MSTP.
NOTE
l After a device starts, there is a default MSTP process with the ID 0. MSTP configurations in the system
view and interface view belong to this process. The default working mode of this process is MSTP.
l To add an interface to an MSTP process with the ID of non-zero, run the stp process command and
then the stp binding process command.
----End
271
9.3.3 Adding an Interface to an MSTP Process - Access Links
The links connecting MSTP devices and access rings are called access links. After being added
to MSTP processes, interfaces on the access links can participate in MSTP calculation.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
stp binding process process-id
The current interface is added to the MSTP process.
----End
9.3.4 Adding an Interface to an MSTP Process - Share Link
The link shared by multiple access rings are called a share link. The interfaces on the share link
need to participate in MSTP calculation in multiple access rings in different MSTP processes.
After being added to MSTP processes, interfaces on the access links can participate in MSTP
calculation.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The interface specified in this command must be an interface on the share link between the
devices configured with MSTP multi-process but not the interfaces that connect an access ring
and a device.
Step 3 Run:
stp binding process process-id [ to process-id ] link-share
272
The interface is added to multiple MSTP processes to complete MSTP calculation.
NOTE
For a process with share links, you must run the stp enable command globally. For an interface that is
added to the process in link-share mode, you must run the stp enable command in the interface view.
----End
9.3.5 Configuring Priorities and Root Protection in MSTP Multi-
process
You can configure priorities and root protection in MSTP multi-process to protect links over
access rings.
Context
To prevent loops over the access ring after the share links fails, configure priorities and root
protection in MSTP multi-process.
Root protection is configured on the access interface of a device with second highest priority.
l For detailed configuration of priorities in MSTP multi-process, see 9.2.4 (Optional)
Setting a Priority for a Switching Device in an MSTI.
l For detailed configuration of root protection in MSTP multi-process, see 9.5.4 Configuring
Root Protection on an Interface.
NOTE
The MSTP priority of a downstream device must be lower than that of a UPE.
9.3.6 Configuring TC Notification in MSTP Multi-process
After the TC notification function is configured for MSTP multi-process, the current MSTP
process can notify the MSTIs in other specified MSTP processes to refresh MAC address entries
and ARP entries after receiving a TC-BPDU. Nonstop services are ensured.
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The view of the created MSTP process is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
stp tc-notify process 0
TC notification is enabled in the MSTP process.
273
After the stp tc-notify process 0 command is run, the current MSTP process notifies the MSTIs
in MSTP process 0 to update MAC entries and ARP entries after receiving a TC-BPDU. This
prevents services from being interrupted.
----End
After MSTP multi-process is configured, check whether the configurations take effect.
Prerequisite
All configurations of MSTP multi-process are complete.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display stp [ process process-id ] [ instance instance-id ] [ interface interface-type
interface-number | slot slot-id ] [ brief ] command to view spanning-tree status and statistics.
----End
9.4 Configuring MSTP Parameters on an Interface
MSTP implements RSTP rapid convergence. To achieve rapid convergence, you need to
configure proper MSTP parameters.
Before configuring basic MSTP parameters, familiarize yourself with the applicable
In some specific networks, MSTP parameters will affect the speed of network convergence.
Configuring proper MSTP parameters is required.
NOTE
The default parameters also can be used to complete MSTP rapid convergence. Therefore, the configuration
procedures and steps in this command task are all optional.
Before configuring MSTP parameters, complete the following task:
Data Preparation
To configure MSTP parameters, you need the following data.
274
No. Data
1 Network diameter
2 Hello time, forwarding delay time, maximum aging time, and timeout period for
waiting for BPDUs from the upstream (3 x hello time x time factor)
3 Maximum hop count in an MST region
4 Link type of a port
5 Whether to Rapid transition mechanism
6 Whether to transition to the RSTP mode
7 Maximum number of sent BPDUs
8 Whether a port needs to be configured as an edge port
9 Whether auto recovery needs to be configured for an edge port being shut down
10 Whether a port needs to clear statistics of the spanning tree
11 Whether an edge port needs to be configured as a BPDU filter

9.4.2 Configuring System Parameters
MSTP parameters that may affect network convergence include the network diameter, hello
time, and timeout period for waiting for BPDUs from the upstream (3 x hello time x time factor).
Configure proper MSTP parameters to implement rapid network convergence.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
The MSTP process view is displayed.
NOTE
This step is needed only when you perform configurations in an MSTP process with a non-zero ID. If you
perform configurations in the MSTP process 0, skip is step.
Step 3 Run:
stp bridge-diameter diameter
The network diameter is configured.
By default, the network diameter is 7.
275
l RSTP uses a single spanning tree instance on the entire network, which cannot prevent the
performance from deteriorating when the network scale grows. Therefore, the network
diameter cannot be larger than 7.
l It is recommended that you run the stp bridge-diameter diameter command to set the
network diameter. Then, the switching device calculates the optimal Forward Delay period,
Hello time, and Max Age period based on the set network diameter.
Step 4 Run:
stp timer-factor factor
The timeout period for waiting for BPDUs from the upstream of a switching device is set.
By default, the timeout period of a switching device is 9 times as long as the Hello time.
Step 5 (Optional) To set the Forward Delay period, Hello time, and Max Age period, perform the
following operations:
l Run the stp timer forward-delay forward-delay command to set the Forward Delay period
for a switching device.
The default Forward Delay period of a switching device is 1500, in centiseconds.
l Run the stp timer hello hello-time command to set the Hello time for a switching device.
The default Hello time of a switching device is 200, in centiseconds.
l Run the stp timer max-age max-age command to set the Max Age period for a switching
device.
The default Max Age period of a switching device is 2000, in centiseconds.
NOTE
The values of the Hello time, Forward Delay period, and Max Age period must comply with the following
formulas. Otherwise, networking flapping occurs.
l 2 (Forward Delay - 1.0 second) >= Max Age
l Max Age >= 2 (Hello Time + 1.0 second)
Step 6 Run:
stp max-hops hop
The maximum hop count is set for the MST region.
By default, the maximum hop count of the MST region is 20.
Step 7 Run:
stp mcheck
MCheck is enabled.
On a switching device running MSTP, if an interface is connected to a device running STP, the
interface automatically transitions to the STP mode.
Enabling MCheck on the interface is required because the interface may fail to automatically
transition to the MSTP mode in the following situations:
l The switching device running STP transitions to the MSTP mode.
276
NOTE
If you run the stp mcheck command in the system view, the MCheck operation is performed on all the
interfaces.
----End
9.4.3 Configuring Port Parameters
Port parameters that may affect MSTP topology convergence include the link type and maximum
number of sent BPDUs. Configure proper port parameters to implement rapid topology
convergence.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
stp point-to-point { auto | force-false | force-true }
The link type is configured for a port.
By default, a port automatically determines whether to connect to a P2P link. The P2P link
supports rapid network convergence.
l If the Ethernet port works in full-duplex mode, the port is connected to a P2P link. In this
case, force-true can be configured to implement rapid network convergence.
l If the Ethernet port works in half-duplex mode, you can configure stp point-to-point force-
true to forcibly set the link type to P2P to implement rapid network convergence.
Step 4 Run:
stp mcheck
MCheck is enabled.
On a switching device running MSTP, if an interface is connected to a device running STP, the
interface automatically transitions to the STP mode.
Enabling MCheck on the interface is required because the interface may fail to automatically
transition to the MSTP mode in the following situations:
l The switching device running STP transitions to the MSTP mode.
Step 5 Run:
stp transmit-limit packet-number
The maximum number of BPDUs sent by a port within each Hello time is set.
By default, the maximum number of BPDUs that a port sends within each Hello time is 147.
277
The port is configured as an edge port.
If a device port is connected to a terminal, you can run this command to configure the port as
an edge port.
By default, the port is a non-edge port.
Step 7 Run:
quit
error-down auto-recovery cause cause-item interval interval-value
The auto recovery function on an edge port is configured. That is, enable the port in the error-
down state to automatically go Up, and set the delay for the transition from Down to Up.
There is no default value for the recovery time. Therefore, you must specify a delay when
configuring this command.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
When the topology of a spanning tree changes, the forwarding paths to associated VLANs are
changed. Then, ARP entries corresponding to those VLANs on the switching device need to be
updated. MSTP processes ARP entries in either fast or normal mode.
l In fast mode, ARP entries to be updated are directly deleted.
l In normal mode, ARP entries to be updated are rapidly aged.
The remaining lifetime of ARP entries to be updated is set to 0. The switching device rapidly
processes these aged entries. If the number of ARP aging probe attempts is not set to 0,
ARP implements aging probe for these ARP entries.
In either fast or normal mode, MAC entries are directly deleted.
You can run the stp converge { fast | normal } command in the system view to configure the
MSTP convergence mode.
By default, the MSTP convergence is configured as normal.
NOTE
The normal mode is recommended. If the fast mode is adopted, ARP entries will be frequently deleted,
causing the CPU usage on the MPU or LPU to reach 100%. As a result, network flapping frequently occurs.
After MSTP parameters are configured, check whether the configurations take effect.
Prerequisite
The configurations of MSTP parameters are complete.
278
Procedure
l Run the display stp [ instance instance-id ] [ interface { interface-type interface-
----End
9.5 Configuring MSTP Protection Functions
MSTP protection functions are as follows, and you can configure one or more functions as
required.
Before configuring MSTP protection functions, familiarize yourself with the applicable
MSTP provides the following protection functions, as listed in Table 9-6.
Table 9-6 MSTP protection
MSTP
Protection
BPDU
protection
non-edge port after
advertising network
resources.
device receives within the given time exceeds
number of times. Excessive TC-BPDUs are
for once after the timeout period expires. This
protects the switching device from frequently
deleting MAC entries and ARP entries, thus
avoiding over-burden.
279
MSTP
Protection
Root
protection
Due to incorrect
BPDUs with a higher
changed, triggering
traffic congestion.
To address this issue, the root protection
function can be configured to protect the root
bridge by preserving the role of the
designated port. With this function, when the
designated port receives RST BPDUs with a
higher priority, the port enters the Discarding
state and does not forward the BPDUs. If the
port does not receive any RST BPDUs with a
higher priority for a certain period (double the
Forward Delay), the port transitions to the
Forwarding state.
Loop
protection
situation.
The loop protection function can be used to
prevent such network loops. If the root port
or alternate port cannot receive RST BPDUs
from the upstream switching device, the root
port is blocked and the switching device
Discarding state. The blocked port remains in
the Blocked state and no longer forwards
packets. This prevents loops on the network.
The root port restores the Forwarding state
after new RST BPDUs are received.
Share-link
protection
In the scenario where a
switching device is dual-
homed to a network, when
the share link of multiple
processes fails, loops may
occur.
Share-link protection can address such a
problem. This function forcibly changes the
working mode of the local switching device
to RSTP. Share-link protection needs to be
used together with root protection to avoid
network loops.

NOTE
l After a device normally starts, there is a default MSTP process with the ID 0. MSTP configurations in
the system view and interface view both belong to this process.
l For more information about MSTP multi-process configuration, see 9.3 Configuring MSTP Multi-
process.
Before configuring MSTP protection functions on a switching device, complete the following
task:
280
NOTE
Configuring an edge port on the switching device before configuring BPDU protection.
Data Preparation
To configure MSTP protection functions on a switching device, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Number of the port on which root protection is to be enabled
2 Number of the port on which loop protection is to be enabled

9.5.2 Configuring BPDU Protection on a Switching Device
After BPDU protection is enabled on a switching device, the switching device shuts down an
edge port if the edge port receives a BPDU, and notifies the NMS of the shutdown event.
Context
Edge ports are directly connected to user terminals and normally, the edge ports will not receive
BPDUs. Some attackers may send pseudo BPDUs to attach the switching device. If the edge
ports receive the BPDUs, the switching device automatically sets the edge ports as non-edge
ports and triggers new spanning tree calculation. Network flapping then occurs. BPDU
protection can be used to protect switching devices against network attacks.
NOTE
Do as follows on a switching device having an edge port:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
NOTE
Step 3 Run:
stp bpdu-protection
BPDU protection is enabled on the switching device.
By default, BPDU protection is not enabled on the switching device.
----End
281
9.5.3 Configuring TC Protection on a Switching Device
After TC protection is enabled, you can set the number of times for an MSTP process to process
TC-BPDUs within a given time. TC protection avoids frequent deletion of MAC address entries
and ARP entries, thereby protecting switching devices.
Context
An attacker may send pseudo TC-BPDUs to attack switching devices. Switching devices receive
a large number of TC BPDUs in a short time and delete entries frequently, which burdens system
processing and degrades network stability.
TC protection is used to suppress TC-BPDUs. The number of times that TC-BPDUs are
processed by a switching device within a given time period is configurable. If the number of
TC-BPDUs that the switching device receives within a given time exceeds the specified
threshold, the switching device handles TC-BPDUs only for the specified number of times.
Excessive TC-BPDUs are processed by the switching device as a whole for once after the timer
(that is, the specified time period) expires. This protects the switching device from frequently
deleting MAC entries and ARP entries, thus avoiding over-burdened.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
NOTE
Step 3 Run:
stp tc-protection
TC protection is enabled for the MSTP process.
By default, TC protection is enabled on the switching device.
Step 4 Run:
stp tc-protection threshold threshold
The threshold of the number of times the MSTP process handles the received TC-BPDUs and
updates forwarding entries within a given time is set.
NOTE
The value of the given time is consistent with the MSTP Hello time set by using the stp timer hello hello-
time command.
----End
282
9.5.4 Configuring Root Protection on an Interface
The root protection function on a switching device protects a root bridge by preserving the role
of a designated port.
Context
Due to incorrect configurations or malicious attacks on the network, a root bridge may receive
BPDUs with a higher priority. Consequently, the legitimate root bridge is no longer able to serve
as the root bridge, and the network topology is illegitimately changed, triggering spanning tree
recalculation. This also may cause the traffic that should be transmitted over high-speed links
to be transmitted over low-speed links, leading to network congestion. The root protection
function on a switching device is used to protect the root bridge by preserving the role of the
designated port.
NOTE
Root protection is configured on a designated port. It takes effect only when being configured on the port
that functions as a designated port on all MSTIs. If root protection is configured on other types of ports, it
does not take effect.
Do as follows on a root bridge in an MST region:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The port is bound to an MSTP process.
NOTE
This step is performed only when the interface needs to be bound to an MSTP process with a non-zero ID.
If the interface belongs to process 0, skip this step.
Step 4 Run:
stp root-protection
Root protection is configured on the switching device.
By default, root protection is disabled.
----End
9.5.5 Configuring Loop Protection on an Interface
The loop protection function suppresses the loops caused by link congestion.
283
Context
On a network running MSTP, a switching device maintains the root port status and status of
blocked ports by receiving BPDUs from an upstream switching device. If the switching device
cannot receive BPDUs from the upstream because of link congestion or unidirectional-link
failure, the switching device re-selects a root port. The original root port becomes a designated
port and the original blocked ports change to the Forwarding state. This may cause network
loops. To address such a problem, configure loop protection.
After loop protection is configured, if the root port or alternate port does not receive BPDUs
from the upstream switching device, the root port is blocked and the switching device notifies
the NMS that the port enters the Discarding state. The blocked port remains in the Blocked state
and no longer forwards packets. This prevents loops on the network. The root port restores the
Forwarding state after receiving new BPDUs.
NOTE
An alternate port is a backup port of a root port. If a switching device has an alternate port, you need to
configure loop protection on both the root port and the alternate port.
Do as follows on a root port and an alternate port on a switching device in an MST region:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The port is bound to an MSTP process.
NOTE
This step is performed only when the interface needs to be bound to an MSTP process with a non-zero ID.
If the interface belongs to process 0, skip this step.
Step 4 Run:
stp loop-protection
Loop protection for the root port is configured on the switching device.
By default, loop protection is disabled.
----End
9.5.6 Configuring Share-Link Protection on a Switching Device
The share-link protection function on a switching device helps automatically transition to the
RSTP working mode. It can also be used together with root protection to avoid network loops.
284
Context
Share-link protection is used in the scenario where a switching device is dual homed to a network.
When a share link fails, share-link protection forcibly changes the working mode of a local
switching device to RSTP. This function can also be used together with root protection to avoid
network loops.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
stp link-share-protection
Share-link protection is enabled.
----End
After MSTP protection functions are configured, check whether the configurations take effect.
Prerequisite
All configurations of MSTP protection functions are complete.
Procedure
----End
9.6 Configuring MSTP Interoperability Between Huawei
Devices and Non-Huawei Devices
To enable Huawei devices to interwork with non-Huawei devices, configure proper parameters
and functions, including the BPDU format, MSTP protocol packet format, and digest snooping
function, on the Huawei devices running MSTP.
Before configuring MSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices,
familiarize yourself with the applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and
obtain the data required for the configuration. This will help you complete the configuration task
quickly and accurately.
285
On an MSTP network, inconsistent protocol packet formats and BPDU keys may lead to a
communication failure. Configuring proper MSTP parameters on Huawei devices ensures
interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices.
Before configuring MSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices,
complete the following task:
Data Preparation
To configure MSTP interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices, you
need the following data.
No. Data
1 BPDU format
2 MSTP protocol packet format

9.6.2 Configuring a Proposal/Agreement Mechanism
To enable Huawei Datacom devices to communicate with non-Huawei devices, configure a
proper rapid transition mechanism on Huawei devices according to the Proposal/Agreement
mechanism on non-Huawei devices.
Context
The rapid transition mechanism is also called the Proposal/Agreement mechanism. Switching
devices currently support the following modes:
l Enhanced mode: The current interface counts a root port when it computes the
connected to the upstream device as a root port and blocks all non-edge ports.
The upstream device then sends an Agreement message to the downstream device. After
the downstream device receives the message, the root port transitions to the Forwarding
state.
The downstream device then responds to the Proposal message with an Agreement
message. After receiving the message, the upstream device sets the port connected to
the downstream device as a designated port, and the designated port transitions to the
Forwarding state.
l Common mode: The current interface ignores the root port when it computes the
286
connected to the upstream device as a root port and blocks all non-edge ports. The root
port then transitions to the Forwarding state.
The downstream device responds to the Proposal message with an Agreement message.
Forwarding state.
When Huawei Datacom devices are interworking with non-Huawei devices, select either mode
depending on the Proposal/Agreement mechanism on non-Huawei devices.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The interface is bound to an MSTP process.
NOTE
This step binds an interface to an MSTP process with a non-zero ID. If the interface belongs to process 0,
skip this step.
Step 4 Run:
stp no-agreement-check
The common rapid transition mechanism is configured.
By default, the interface uses the enhanced rapid transition mechanism.
----End
9.6.3 Configuring the MSTP Protocol Packet Format on an Interface
MSTP protocol packets can be transmitted in auto, dot1s, or legacy mode. The default mode is
auto.
Context
MSTP protocol packets have two formats: dot1s (IEEE 802.1s standard packets) and legacy
(proprietary protocol packets). The auto mode is introduced to allow an interface to automatically
use the format of MSTP protocol packets sent from the remote interface. In this manner, the two
interfaces use the same MSTP protocol packet format.
Do as follows on a switching device in an MST region:
287
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
NOTE
skip this step.
Step 4 Run:
stp compliance { auto | dot1s | legacy }
The MSTP protocol packet format is configured on the interface.
The auto mode is used by default.
NOTE
If the format of MSTP packets is set to dot1s on one end and legacy on the other end, the negotiation fails.
----End
9.6.4 Enabling the Digest Snooping Function
When a Huawei device is connected to a non-Huawei device, if the region names, revision
numbers, and VLAN-to-instance mappings configured on the two devices are consistent but the
BPDU keys are different, the two devices cannot communicate. To address this problem, enable
the digest snooping function on the Huawei device.
Context
Do as follows on a switching device in an MST region:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
288
NOTE
skip this step.
Step 4 Run:
stp config-digest-snoop
The digest snooping function is enabled.
----End
After MSTP parameters are configured for the interoperability between Huawei devices and
non-Huawei devices, check whether the configurations take effect.
Prerequisite
All the configurations for the interoperability between Huawei devices and non-Huawei devices
are complete.
Procedure
----End
9.7 Maintaining MSTP
MSTP maintenance includes resetting MSTP statistics.
9.7.1 Clearing MSTP Statistics
You can run the reset commands to reset MSTP statistics to 0.
Context
CAUTION
MSTP statistics cannot be restored after you clear them. Therefore, exercise caution when using
the reset commands.
After you confirm that MSTP statistics need to be cleared, run the following command in the
user view.
289
Procedure
Step 1 Run the reset stp [ interface interface-type interface-number ] statistics command to clear
spanning-tree statistics.
----End
This section provides a configuration example of MSTP.
9.8.1 Example for Configuring Basic MSTP Functions
SwitchA, SwitchB, SwitchC, and SwitchD run MSTP. In this example, MSTP runs on Layer 2
interfaces of the Switches.
Figure 9-9 Networking diagram of basic MSTP configurations
SwitchA SwitchB
SwitchD SwitchC
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2 Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2 Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3

1. Add SwitchA and SwitchC to MST region RG1, and create MSTI1.
2. Add SwitchB and SwitchD to MST region RG2, and create MSTI1.
3. Configure SwitchA as the CIST root.
4. In RG1, configure SwitchA as the CIST regional root and regional root of MSTI1.
Configure the root protection function on Eth 0/0/2 and the Eth 0/0/1 on SwitchA.
5. In RG2, configure SwitchB as the CIST regional root and SwitchD as the regional root of
MSTI1.
6. On SwitchC and SwitchD, connect Eth 0/0/1 to a PC and configure Eth 0/0/1 as an edge
port. Enable BPDU protection on SwitchC and SwitchD.
290
7. Configure the Switches to calculate the path cost by using the algorithm of Huawei.
Data Preparation
l Region that SwitchA and SwitchC belong to: RG1
l Region that SwitchB and SwitchD belong to: RG2
l Numbers of the Eth interfaces, as shown in Figure 9-9
l VLAN IDs: 1-20
Procedure
Step 1 Configure SwitchA.
# Configure the MST region on SwitchA.
<SwitchA> system-view
[SwitchA] stp region-configuration
[SwitchA-mst-region] region-name RG1
[SwitchA-mst-region] instance 1 vlan 1 to 10
# Activate the configuration of the MST region.
[SwitchA-mst-region] active region-configuration
[SwitchA-mst-region] quit
# Set the priority of SwitchA in MSTI0 to 0 to ensure that SwitchA functions as the CIST root.
[SwitchA] stp instance 0 priority 0
# Set the priority of SwitchA in MSTI1 to 1 to ensure that SwitchA functions as the regional
root of MSTI1.
[SwitchA] stp instance 1 priority 0
# Configure SwitchA to use Huawei private algorithm to calculate the path cost.
[SwitchA] stp pathcost-standard legacy
# Create VLANs 2 to 20.
[SwitchA] vlan batch 2 to 20
# Add Eth 0/0/2 to the VLANs.
[SwitchA] interface Ethernet 0/0/2
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 1 to 20
# Enable root protection on the Eth 0/0/1.
291
# Enable root protection on the Eth 0/0/2.
# Enable MSTP.
Step 2 Configure SwitchB.
# Configure the MST region on SwitchB.
[SwitchB] stp region-configuration
[SwitchB-mst-region] region-name RG2
[SwitchB-mst-region] instance 1 vlan 1 to 10
[SwitchB-mst-region] active region-configuration
[SwitchB-mst-region] quit
# Set the priority of SwitchB in MSTI0 to 4096 to ensure that SwitchB functions as the CIST
root.
[SwitchB] stp instance 0 priority 4096
# Configure SwitchB to use Huawei private algorithm to calculate the path cost.
[SwitchB] stp pathcost-standard legacy
[SwitchB] vlan batch 2 to 20
[SwitchB] interface Ethernet 0/0/1
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 1 to 20
[SwitchB] interface Ethernet 0/0/2
# Enable MSTP.
Step 3 Configure SwitchC.
# Configure the MST region on SwitchC.
[SwitchC] stp region-configuration
[SwitchC-mst-region] region-name RG1
[SwitchC-mst-region] instance 1 vlan 1 to 10
[SwitchC-mst-region] active region-configuration
[SwitchC-mst-region] quit
# Configure SwitchC to use Huawei private algorithm to calculate the path cost.
292
[SwitchC] stp pathcost-standard legacy
# Enable BPDU protection.
[SwitchC] stp bpdu-protection
[SwitchC] vlan batch 2 to 20
[SwitchC] interface Ethernet 0/0/2
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 1 to 20
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/3] port trunk allow-pass vlan 1 to 20
# Configure Eth 0/0/1 as an edge port.
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] stp edged-port enable
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 20
[SwitchC-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 20
# Enable MSTP.
Step 4 Configure SwitchD.
# Configure the MST region on SwitchD.
[SwitchD] stp region-configuration
[SwitchD-mst-region] region-name RG2
[SwitchD-mst-region] instance 1 vlan 1 to 10
[SwitchD-mst-region] active region-configuration
[SwitchD-mst-region] quit
# Set the priority of SwitchD in MSTI1 to 0 to ensure that SwitchD functions as the regional
root of MSTI1.
[SwitchD] stp instance 1 priority 0
# Configure SwitchD to use Huawei private algorithm to calculate the path cost.
[SwitchD] stp pathcost-standard legacy
# Enable BPDU protection.
[SwitchD] stp bpdu-protection
[SwitchD] vlan batch 2 to 20
293
[SwitchD] interface Ethernet 0/0/2
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/2] port trunk allow-pass vlan 1 to 20
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/3] port trunk allow-pass vlan 1 to 20
# Configure Eth 0/0/1 as an edge port.
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/1] stp edged-port enable
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 10
[SwitchD-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 10
# Enable MSTP.
After the preceding configurations are complete and the network topology becomes stable,
perform the following operations to verify the configuration.
# Run the display stp brief command on SwitchA to view the status and protection type on the
interfaces. The displayed information is as follows:
<SwitchA> display stp brief
The priority of SwitchA is the highest in the CIST; therefore, SwitchA is elected as the CIST
root and regional root of RG1. Eth 0/0/2 and Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchA are designated ports in the
CIST.
The priority of SwitchA in MSTI1 is the highest in RG1; therefore, SwitchA is elected as the
regional root of SwitchA. Eth 0/0/2 and Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchA are designated ports in MSTI1.
# Run the display stp interface brief commands on SwitchC. The displayed information is as
follows:
<SwitchC> display stp interface Ethernet 0/0/3 brief
<SwitchC> display stp interface Ethernet 0/0/2 brief
Eth 0/0/3 of SwitchC is the root port in the CIST and MSTI1. Eth 0/0/2 of SwitchC is a designated
port in the CIST and MSTI1.
# Run the display stp brief command on SwitchB. The displayed information is as follows:
<SwitchB> display stp brief
294
1 Ethernet0/0/2 MAST FORWARDING NONE
The priority of SwitchB in the CIST is lower than that of SwitchA; therefore, Eth 0/0/2 of
SwitchB functions as the root port in the CIST. SwitchA and SwitchB belong to different regions;
therefore, Eth 0/0/2 of SwitchB functions as the master port in MSTI1. In MSTI1, the priority
of SwitchB is lower than that of SwitchD; therefore, Eth 0/0/1 of SwitchB functions as the root
port. The priority of SwitchB in the CIST is higher than that of SwitchB; therefore, Eth 0/0/1 of
SwitchB functions as the designated port in the CIST.
# Run the display stp interface brief commands on SwitchD. The displayed information is as
follows:
<SwitchD> display stp interface Ethernet 0/0/3 brief
<SwitchD> display stp interface Ethernet 0/0/2 brief
On SwitchD, Eth 0/0/2 functions as the alternate port in the CIST. SwitchD and SwitchC are in
different regions; therefore, Eth 0/0/2 of SwitchD also functions as the alternate port in MSTI1.
Eth 0/0/3 of SwitchD is the root port in the CIST. The priority of SwitchD is higher than that of
SwitchB in MSTI1; therefore, Eth 0/0/3 also functions as the designated port in MSTI1.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname SwitchA
#
vlan batch 2 to 20
#
stp instance 0 priority 0
stp pathcost-standard legacy
region-name RG1
instance 1 vlan 1 to 10
#
stp root-protection
#
stp root-protection
#
return
#
sysname SwitchB
#
vlan batch 2 to 20
295
#
region-name RG2
#
#
#
return
#
sysname SwitchC
#
vlan batch 2 to 20
#
stp bpdu-protection
region-name RG1
#
#
#
#
return
#
sysname SwitchD
#
vlan batch 2 to 20
#
stp bpdu-protection
region-name RG2
#
#
#
296
#
return
9.8.2 Example for Configuring MSTP Multi-Process for Layer 2
Single-Access Rings and Layer 2 Multi-Access Rings
MSTP multi-process enables different Layer 2 access rings to transmit different services.
On the network with both Layer 2 single-access rings and multi-access rings deployed, switching
devices transmit both Layer 2 and Layer 3 services. To enable different rings to transmit different
services, configure MSTP multi-process. Spanning trees of different processes are calculated
independently.
As shown in Figure 9-10, both Layer 2 single-access rings and dual-access rings are deployed
and switches A and B carry both Layer 2 and Layer 3 services. Switches A and B connected to
dual-access rings are also connected to a single-access ring.
NOTE
In the ring where MSTP multi-process is configured, you are advised not to block the interface directly
connected to the root protection-enabled designated port.
Figure 9-10 Networking for MSTP multi-process for Layer 2 single-access rings and multi-
access rings
SwitchA
SwitchB
SwitchC
PE1
PE2
CE
CE
CE CE
CE
CE
Eth0/0/5
Eth0/0/5
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/4
Eth0/0/4
Eth0/0/3 Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2 Eth0/0/2
Instance1:VLAN2~100
Region name:RG1
Process 1
Process 2
Process 3
Network

297
1. Configure basic MSTP functions, add devices to MST regions, and create MSTIs.
NOTE
l Each ring can belong to only one region.
l Each CE can join only one ring.
2. Configure multiple MSTP processes, including:
(1) Create multiple MSTP processes and add interfaces to relevant processes.
(2) Configure a share-link.
3. Configure MSTP protection functions, including:
l Configure priorities of MSTP processes and enable root protection.
l Configure share-link protection.
4. Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on devices.
Data Preparation
l Name of an MST region and names of MSTIs
l VLAN IDs
l IDs of MSTP processes
Procedure
Step 1 Configure basic MSTP functions, add devices to an MST region, and create MSTIs.
1. Configure MST regions and create MSTIs.
# Configure an MST region and create MSTIs on Switch A.
[SwitchA] stp region-configuration
[SwitchA-mst-region] region-name RG1
[SwitchA-mst-region] active region-configuration
[SwitchA-mst-region] quit
# Configure an MST region and create MSTIs on Switch B.
[SwitchB] stp region-configuration
[SwitchB-mst-region] region-name RG1
[SwitchB-mst-region] active region-configuration
[SwitchB-mst-region] quit
2. Enable MSTP.
# Configure Switch A.
# Configure Switch B.
298
Step 2 Configure multiple MSTP processes.
1. Create multiple MSTP processes and add interfaces to relevant processes.
# Create MSTP processes 1 and 2 on Switch A.
[SwitchA] stp process 1
[SwitchA-mst-process-1] quit
[SwitchA-mst-process-2] quit
# Create MSTP processes 2 and 3 on Switch B.
[SwitchB] stp process 2
[SwitchB-mst-process-2] quit
[SwitchB-mst-process-3] quit
# Add Eth 0/0/3 and Eth 0/0/4 on Switch A to MSTP process 1 and Eth 0/0/2 to MSTP
process 2.
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/4] stp binding process 1
# Add Eth 0/0/3 and Eth 0/0/4 on Switch B to MSTP process 3 and Eth 0/0/2 to MSTP
process 2.
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/4] stp binding process 3
2. Configure a share-link.
[SwitchA] interface ethernet0/0/1
[SwitchA-Ethernet0/0/1] stp binding process 2 link-share
[SwitchB] interface ethernet0/0/1
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/1] stp binding process 2 link-share
3. Enable the MSTP function in MSTP multi-process.
[SwitchA-stp-process-1] stp enable
[SwitchA-stp-process-1] quit
299
[SwitchA-stp-process-2] stp enable
[SwitchB-stp-process-3] stp enable
[SwitchB-stp-process-3] quit
[SwitchB-stp-process-2] stp enable
Step 3 Configure MSTP protection functions.
l Configure priorities of MSTP processes and enable root protection.
[SwitchA-stp-process-1] stp instance 0 root primary
[SwitchB-stp-process-3] stp instance 0 root primary
[SwitchB-stp-process-3] stp instance 3 root primary
[SwitchB-stp-process-2] stp instance 0 root secondary
[SwitchB-stp-process-2] stp instance 2 root secondary
[SwitchB-Ethernet0/0/2] stp root-protection
NOTE
l In each ring, the priority of the MSTP process on the downstream CE must be lower than the priority
of the MSTP process on the switching device.
l For switches A and B on the dual-access ring, you are recommended to configure them as the
primary root bridges of different MSTIs.
l Configure share-link protection.
[SwitchA-stp-process-2] stp link-share-protection
[SwitchB-stp-process-2] stp link-share-protection
Step 4 Create VLANs and add interfaces to VLANs.
# Create VLANs 2 to 200 on Switch A. Add Eth 0/0/3 and Eth 0/0/4 to VLANs 2 to 100, and
add Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to VLANs 101 to 200.
[SwitchA] vlan batch 2 to 200
300
# Create VLANs 101 to 300 on Switch B. Add Eth 0/0/3 and Eth 0/0/4 to VLANs 201 to 300,
and add Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to VLANs 101 to 200.
[SwitchB] vlan batch 101 to 300
l Run the display stp interface brief command on Switch A, and you can view the following
information:
# Eth 0/0/4 is a designated port in the CIST of MSTP process 1 and in MSTI 1.
[SwitchA] display stp process 1 interface GiabitEthernet 0/0/4 brief
[SwitchA] display stp process 2 interface giabitethernet 0/0/2 brief
l Run the display stp interface brief command on Switch B, and you can view the following
information:
[SwitchB] display stp process 3 interface giabitethernet 0/0/4 brief
[SwitchB] display stp process 2 interface giabitethernet 0/0/2 brief
----End
301
Configuration Files
Only the MSTP-related configuration files are listed.
#
sysname
SwitchA
#
vlan batch 2 to
300
#
stp region-
configuration
region-name
RG1
instance 1 vlan 2 to
100
200
300
active region-
configuration
#
stp process
1
stp instance 0 root
primary
stp instance 1 root
primary
stp
enable
stp process
2
stp instance 0 root
primary
stp instance 2 root
primary
stp link-share-
protection
stp
enable
#
port trunk allow-pass vlan 101 to
200
stp binding process 2 link-share
#
200
stp binding process
2
stp root-
protection
#
100
stp binding process
1
#
302
100
stp binding process 1
#
return
#
sysname
SwitchB
#
vlan batch 2 to
300
#
stp region-
configuration
region-name
RG1
100
200
300
active region-
configuration
#
stp process
2
stp instance 0 root
secondary
stp instance 2 root
secondary
stp link-share-
protection
stp
enable
stp process
3
stp instance 0 root
primary
stp instance 3 root
primary
stp
enable
#
200
stp binding process 2 link-
share
#
200
stp binding process
2
stp root-
protection
#
300
stp binding process
3
#
303
300
stp binding process
3
#
return
304
10 SEP Configuration
About This Chapter
As a link layer protocol dedicated to Ethernet rings, SEP blocks redundant links on a network
to prevent logical loops.
10.1 SEP Overview
The Smart Ethernet Protection (SEP) protocol is a dedicated link layer protocol for use on
Ethernet rings. It boasts the high convergence speed, supports diverse topologies, and is able to
display the network topology on any device.
10.2 Configuring Basic SEP Functions
When there is no faulty link on a ring network running SEP, SEP can eliminate loops on the
Ethernet. When a link fault occurs on a ring network running SEP, SEP can immediately restore
the communication links between the nodes.
10.3 Specifying an Interface to Block
By default, the blocked interface is one of the last two interfaces that complete neighbor
negotiation. Sometimes, the negotiated blocked interface, however, may not be the expected
one. An interface can be selected to block as required.
10.4 Configuring SEP Multi-Instance
SEP multi-instance allows two SEP segments to be configured on a physical ring network. After
different protected instances are configured for the SEP segments and VLANs are mapped to
specified protected instances, load balancing and link backup can be implemented for service
traffic.
10.5 Configuring the Topology Change Notification Function
The function of advertising topology changes is configured on the device connecting a lower-
level network to an upper-level network. With this function, the device can notify the remote
device of topology changes of the lower-level and upper-level networks. After being notified of
these topology changes, all the devices on the network where the remote device resides delete
associated MAC addresses and ARP entry in time and relearn the MAC address of the remote
device. This ensures nonstop traffic forwarding.
10.6 Maintaining SEP
This section describes the commands for maintaining SEP, including the commands for clearing
SEP statistics.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 10 SEP Configuration
305
This section describes the networking requirements, configuration roadmap, and data
preparation for a typical SEP application and provides the configuration examples.
306
10.1 SEP Overview
The Smart Ethernet Protection (SEP) protocol is a dedicated link layer protocol for use on
Ethernet rings. It boasts the high convergence speed, supports diverse topologies, and is able to
display the network topology on any device.
10.1.1 SEP Overview
SEP supports open-ring, closed-ring, single-ring, and multi-ring topologies and meets the
requirements of various topologies for redundant protection.
Introduction
Generally, redundant links are used on an Ethernet switching network to provide link backup
and enhance network reliability. The use of redundant links, however, may produce loops,
causing broadcast storms and rendering the MAC address table unstable. As a result, the
communication quality deteriorates, and communication services may even be interrupted.
To solve the loop problem, Huawei datacom devices support the ring network protocols shown
in Table 10-1.
Table 10-1 Ring Network Protocol
Ring
Network
Protocol
Advantage Disadvantage Deployment Scenario
STP/
RSTP/
MSTP
The Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP), Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP), and Multi-
Spanning Tree Protocol
(MSTP) are standard
protocols for breaking
loops on Ethernet
networks. They are
mature and widely
applied. Huawei
devices running one of
them can communicate
with non-Huawei
devices.
The network
convergence time
is at the second
level, which
cannot meet the
requirements of
some real-time
services. The
convergence time
is affected by the
network topology.
They are applicable to Layer 2
networks that have a low
requirement on convergence
time.
307
Ring
Network
Protocol
RRPP The Rapid Ring
Protection Protocol
(RRPP) is a private
protocol of Huawei. It
features short
convergence time (less
than 50 ms) and
supports load balancing
for different types of
traffic.
l A Huawei
device running
RRPP cannot
communicate
with any non-
Huawei
device.
l RRPP has a
high
requirement on
network
topologies.
Logical
topologies
need to be
configured for
a physical
topology, and
primary rings
and sub-rings
need to be
defined for
these logical
topologies.
Therefore,
RRPP is not
applicable to
complex
networks.
It is applicable to single rings,
tangent rings, and intersecting
rings that have a high
requirement on the
convergence time.
308
Ring
Network
Protocol
SEP l SEP is a private
protocol of Huawei.
It boasts short
convergence time
(less than 50 ms).
Huawei devices
running SEP can
communicate with
non-huawei devices
running other types
of ring protocols.
l SEP supports
various types of
networking modes.
For example, a
network running
SEP can
communicate with a
network running
STP, RSTP, MSTP,
or RRPP. SEP
supports all
topologies and the
display of network
topologies.
The blocked
interface, therefore,
can be quickly
located. When a
fault occurs, SEP
can quickly locate
the fault, improving
network
maintainability.
l SEP supports
various policies for
specifying an
interface to block.
This allows the
implementation of
traffic load
balancing.
l The devices on
a SEP-enabled
network must
be Huawei
datacom
devices.
l On a SEP
network, after
network
convergence, a
specified
interface is
blocked to
prevent data
traffic from
passing
through the
interface, even
if the link
where the
interface
resides is a
direct link.
It is applicable to Layer 2
networks that have a high
requirement on convergence
time.

Definitions
The SEP protocol is a dedicated link layer protocol for use on Ethernet ring networks. A SEP
segment is the basic unit of the protocol. A SEP segment is composed of multiple interconnected
309
Layer 2 switching devices that are configured with the same SEP segment ID and control VLAN
ID.
Only two interfaces on a Layer 2 switching device can be added to the same SEP segment. In a
SEP segment, loops can be prevented by starting a protection mechanism to selectively block
certain interfaces and eliminate Ethernet redundant links. When a fault occurs on a ring network,
a device running SEP can quickly unblock the blocked interface to perform link switching. This
maintains normal communication between nodes on the ring network.
Figure 10-1 shows a typical SEP application. CE1 is connected to NPEs through a closed-ring
formed by switches. A VRRP backup group is deployed on the NPEs. Initially, the status of
NPE1 is master and the status of NPE2 is backup. When the link between NPE1 and LSW5 or
a node on the link becomes faulty (it is assumed that the link between LSW1 and LSW5 becomes
faulty), the following situations occur:
l If SEP is not deployed on the closed-ring, CE1 still forwards traffic along the original path,
causing traffic interruption.
l If SEP is deployed on the closed-ring, the blocked interface on LSW5 becomes unblocked
and enters the forwarding state. In addition, it sends Link Status Advertisements (LSAs)
to instruct other nodes on the SEP segment to refresh their LSA databases. CE1 sends traffic
along the backup link LSW5->LSW2->LSW4->LSW3->NPE1. This ensures proper traffic
transmission.
310
Figure 10-1 Schematic diagram for SEP
Block Port
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node
a,SEP is not deployed on the closed-ring
b,SEP is deployed on the closed-ring
CE1
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
NPE2
VRRP+peer BFD
NPE1
Master
Backup
IP/MPLS
Core
Core Aggregation Access
CE1
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
NPE2
VRRP+peer BFD
NPE1
Master
Backup
IP/MPLS
Core
SEP
Segment
CE1
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
NPE2
VRRP+peer BFD
NPE1
Master
Backup
IP/MPLS
Core
SEP
Segment

Basic Concepts
Basic SEP concepts are introduced by using Figure 10-1 and Figure 10-2.
311
Figure 10-2 Networking diagram for an open ring running SEP
VLAN/VPLS
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
CE
No-Neighbor Primary Edge Node
Block Port
SEP
Segment
VLAN/VPLS
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
CE
SEP
Segment
No-Neighbor Secondary Edge Node
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node

l SEP segment
A SEP segment is the basic unit of SEP. A SEP segment is composed of multiple
interconnected Layer 2 switching devices configured with the same SEP segment ID and
the same control VLAN ID.
A SEP segment corresponds to a ring-shaped or line-shaped Ethernet topology. Each SEP
segment has a control VLAN, edge interfaces, and common interfaces.
l Control VLAN
In a SEP segment, the control VLAN is used to transmit only SEP packets.
Each SEP segment must be configured with a control VLAN. After being added to a SEP
segment configured with a control VLAN, an interface is added to the control VLAN
automatically.
Different SEP segments can use the same control VLAN.
Unlike a control VLAN, a data VLAN is used to transmit data packets.
l Node
A node is a Layer 2 switching device added to a SEP segment. Only two interfaces on a
node can be added to the same SEP segment.
l Interface role
As defined by SEP, interfaces are classified into common interfaces and edge interfaces.
312
As shown in Table 10-2, edge interfaces are further classified into primary edge interfaces,
secondary edge interfaces, no-neighbor primary edge interfaces, and no-neighbor
secondary edge interfaces.
NOTE
Normally, an edge interface and a no-neighbor edge interface belong to different SEP segments.
Table 10-2 Interface roles
Interfac
e roles
Sub-role Description Deployment
Scenario
Common
port
- In a SEP segment, all interfaces except edge
interfaces and the blocked interface are
common interfaces.
A common interface monitors the status of
its directly connected SEP link and notifies
its neighboring interface of link status
changes in time. The neighboring interface
constantly floods the notification message to
other interfaces in the SEP segment until the
message reaches the primary edge interface.
The primary edge interface then processes
the message.
-
Edge
port
Primary
Edge Port
A SEP segment has only one primary edge
interface. It can either be configured or be
elected.
The primary edge interface initiates
blocked-interface preemption, terminates
packets, and sends packets about topology
changes to other networks.
Open ring
network
Closed ring
network
Multiple-ring
networking
Hybrid SEP
+RRPP ring
networking
Secondary
edge port
A SEP segment has only one secondary edge
elected.
A secondary edge interface terminates
packets, and sends topology change
notification messages to other networks.
No-
neighbor
primary
edge port
The interface at the most marginal edge of a
SEP segment is a no-neighbor primary edge
interface, as shown in Figure 10-2. It is
configured by users.
A no-neighbor primary interface initiates
No-neighbor primary edge interfaces are
used to interconnect Huawei devices and
non-Huawei devices or devices that do not
support SEP.
Hybrid SEP
+MSTP ring
networking
313
Interfac
e roles
Scenario
No-
neighbor
secondary
edge port
A no-neighbor secondary edge interface
terminates packets and sends topology
change notification messages to other
networks.
No-neighbor secondary edge interfaces are
used to interconnect non-Huawei devices
and devices that do not support SEP.

l Blocked interface
In a SEP segment, an interface is blocked to prevent loops.
If you do not specify the interface as a blocked interface, any interface in a SEP segment
may be blocked. Only one interface is blocked in a SEP segment that works properly.
l Status of SEP-enabled interfaces
Table 10-3 shows the status of SEP-enabled interfaces in a SEP segment.
Table 10-3 Interface status
Interface
Status
Description
Forwarding An interface in the forwarding state can forward user traffic, and receive
and send SEP packets.
Discarding An interface in the discarding state only receives and sends SEP packets.

The interface status does not depend on the interface role. An interface may be in forwarding
or discarding state regardless of its role.
The process of breaking a loop by using SEP
1. After a SEP segment is created, the interfaces on each node of the ring network are added
to the SEP segment, and a role is configured for each interface.
2. The neighbor negotiation mechanism is started after the interfaces are added to the SEP
segment. One of the last two interfaces that complete neighbor negotiation becomes a
blocked interface.
3. The blocked interface sends LSAs to instruct other nodes in the SEP segment to update
their LSA databases.
The blocked interface does not allow data packets but SEP protocol packets to pass through.
4. After receiving the LSAs, the nodes update their LSA databases, and then determine
forwarding paths. The loop is successfully broken.
Typical SEP Topologies
l Open ring network
314
Figure 10-3 Networking diagram for an open ring running SEP
VLAN/VPLS
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
CE
PE-AGG1
PE-AGG2
NPE1
NPE2
IP/MPLS Core
SEP
Segment
A
c
c
e
s
s
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
r
e
Block Port
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node
VRRP+peer BFD

As shown in Figure 10-3, the networking consists of the access layer, aggregation layer,
and core layer. The CE is dual-homed to the upstream Layer 2 network through LSW1 to
LSW5. LSW1 to LSW5 form an open ring network. The open ring network is deployed at
the access layer to implement Layer 2 transparent transmission of unicast and multicast
packets. SEP runs at the access layer to implement link redundancy.
On a closed ring network, an edge interface is deployed on each of the two edge devices.
l Closed ring network
315
Figure 10-4 Networking diagram for a closed ring running SEP
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
CE1
NPE1
NPE2
IP/MPLS Core
CE2 CE3
SEP
Segment
A
c
c
e
s
s
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
r
e
Block Port
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node
VRRP+peer BFD

As shown in Figure 10-4, the CEs are dual-homed to the upstream Layer 2 network through
LSW1 to LSW5. The edge devices LSW1 and LSW5 are directly connected to each other.
LSW1 to LSW5 form a closed ring network. The closed ring network is deployed at the
aggregation layer to aggregate unicast and multicast services. SEP runs at the aggregation
layer to implement link redundancy.
On a closed ring network, two edge interfaces are deployed on one edge device.
l Multiple-ring networking
316
Figure 10-5 Networking diagram for multiple rings running SEP
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
Block Port
NPE1
NPE2
IP/MPLS Core
SEP
Segment 1
LSW6
LSW7
LSW8
LSW10 LSW11
LSW12
LSW13
LSW14
LSW9
A
c
c
e
s
s
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
r
e

S
E
P
S
e
g
m
e
n
t

2
S
E
P
S
e
g
m
e
n
t

3
SEP
Segment 4
SEP
Segment 5
VRRP+peer BFD

As shown in Figure 10-5, LSW1 to LSW14 form multiple rings. LSW1 to LSW5 are at
the aggregation layer, and LSW6 to LSW14 are at the access layer. Layer 2 services are
transparently transmitted at the access layer and the aggregation layer. SEP runs at the
aggregation layer and access layer to implement link redundancy. If the topology of a SEP
segment at the access layer changes, a node in the SEP segment sends a Flush-FDB packet
to instruct the other nodes in the SEP segment to refresh their MAC address forwarding
tables and ARP tables. The edge devices in the SEP segment send TC packets to notify
devices at the upper layer that the topology of the SEP segment has changed.
In multi-ring networking, topology change notification among ring networks needs to be
configured.
l Hybrid networking
Hybrid SEP+MSTP ring networking
317
Figure 10-6 Networking diagram for hybrid rings running SEP+MSTP
LSW1 LSW2
LSW3
Block Port
NPE1 NPE2
IP/MPLS Core
A
c
c
e
s
s
SEP
Segment
MSTP
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
r
e
PE1 PE2
PE4
PE3
No-neighbor Primary Edge Node
No-neighbor Secondary Edge Node
Do not Support SEP
VRRP+peer BFD

As shown in Figure 10-6, LSW1 to LSW3 form a SEP segment to access an MSTP
ring. The networking is called hybrid SEP+MSTP ring networking. LSW1 to LSW3
are at the access layer to transparently transmit Layer 2 unicast and multicast packets.
SEP runs at the access layer to implement link redundancy. If the topology of the SEP
segment at the access layer changes, a node in the SEP segment sends a Flush-FDB
packet to instruct the other nodes in the SEP segment to refresh their MAC forwarding
tables and ARP tables. LSW1 and LSW2 in the SEP segment send TC packets to notify
devices at the upper-layer that the topology of the SEP segment has changed.
In hybrid SEP+MSTP ring networking, no-neighbor edge interfaces need to be deployed
on the edge devices of SEP networks, and the SEP networks need to report topology
changes to STP networks.
Hybrid SEP+RRPP ring networking
318
Figure 10-7 Networking diagram for hybrid rings running SEP+RRPP
LSW1 LSW2
LSW3
Block Port
NPE1 NPE2
IP/MPLS Core
A
c
c
e
s
s
SEP
Segment
RRPP
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
r
e
PE1 PE2
PE4
PE3
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node
VRRP+peer BFD

As shown in Figure 10-7, PE1, PE2 and LSW1 to LSW3 form a SEP segment to access
an RRPP ring. The networking is called hybrid SEP+RRPP ring networking. PE1, PE2
and LSW1 to LSW3 are at the access layer to transparently transmit Layer 2 unicast
and multicast packets. SEP runs at the access layer to implement link redundancy. If
the topology of the SEP segment at the access layer changes, a node in the SEP segment
sends a Flush-FDB packet to instruct the other nodes in the SEP segment to refresh their
MAC forwarding tables and ARP tables. PE1 and PE2 in the SEP segment send TC
packets to notify devices at the upper-layer that the topology of the SEP segment has
changed.
In hybrid SEP+RRPP ring networking, the SEP networks need to report topology
changes to RRPP networks on the edge devices of SEP networks.
NOTE
The basic SEP configurations in the preceding topologies are the same, except for the locations and
configurations of the primary edge interface, no-neighbor primary edge interface, secondary edge interface,
and no-neighbor secondary edge interface. For details about these interfaces, see Table 10-2.
319
10.1.2 SEP Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes SEP features supported by the S3700 from the perspective of SEP
configuration logic. Familiarizing yourself with SEP configuration logic helps you complete
configuration tasks quickly and efficiently.
SEP configuration roadmap is as follows:
1. After basic SEP functions are configured on devices, the devices start the SEP negotiation.
One of the last two interfaces that complete neighbor negotiation is blocked to eliminate
redundant links.
NOTE
When logging in to nodes on a SEP semi-ring through Telnet to configure them, note the following
points:
l VLANIF interfaces and their IP address need to be configured, because these nodes are Layer 2
devices. The VLANs to which these VLANIF interfaces correspond must be mapped to the SEP
protection instance.
l Basic SEP functions need to be configured from the node at one end of the semi-ring to the node
at the other end of the semi-ring.
2. In some cases, however, the blocked interface obtained through the SEP calculation may
not be the one you expect to be blocked. You can specify an interface to block as needed.
3. To implement load balancing and make efficient use of bandwidth, protected instances
need to be deployed on a network running SEP and mappings between protected instances
and VLANs need to be worked out.
4. A SEP network usually needs to work together with another network deployed with other
features. To ensure network reliability, if the topology of either of the networks changes,
the other network must be able to detect the topology change and take measures to
implement reliable data transmission. Therefore, the topology change notification function
needs to be enabled on the network running SEP.
Specifying an Interface to Block
In general, a blocked interface is one of the last two interfaces that complete neighbor negotiation.
In some cases, however, the negotiated blocked interface may not be the one you expect to be
blocked. You specify an interface to block as needed. The designated blocking does not,
however, become effective immediately. A preemption mechanism allows a designated interface
to be blocked instead of a previously blocked interface.
l Interface blocking mode
You can configure an interface blocking mode in order to specify the location of a blocked
interface. Table 10-4 lists interface blocking modes.
Table 10-4 Interface blocking mode
Interface Blocking
Mode
Description
Specifying the interface
with the highest priority
as the blocked interface
Is applicable to a large-scale network.
After fault recovery, the interface with the highest priority in
a SEP segment is designated as the blocked interface. In this
mode, the priorities of the interfaces on the SEP segment need
to be set in advanced.
320
Interface Blocking
Mode
Description
in the middle of a SEP
segment as the blocked
interface
Is applicable to a network where traffic is symmetrically
distributed.
After fault recovery, the interface in the middle of a SEP
segment is designated as the blocked interface.
Specifying the blocked
interface based on the
configured hop count
Is applicable to a small-scale network.
After fault recovery, a specified interface can be blocked
based on the hop count. A network planner needs to be
familiar with the topology of the entire SEP segment and the
number of hops from the blocked interface to the primary-
edge interface.
device name and
interface name
After fault recovery, a specified interface can be blocked
based on the device name and the interface name. A network
planner needs to be familiar with the names of devices and
interfaces on the entire SEP segment and ensures that each
device name is unique.

l Preemption
After the interface blocking mode is specified, whether the specified interface will be
blocked is determined by the preemption mode. Table 10-5 lists the preemption modes.
Table 10-5 Preemption mode
Preemption
Mode
Advantage Disadvantage
Non-preemption
mode
SEP is in the non-
preemption mode by
default.
In this mode, blocking
an interface does not
disconnect any link in a
SEP segment.
The blocked interface is one of the last
two interfaces that complete neighbor
negotiation.
Preemp
tion
mode
Delaye
d
preemp
tion
Each time a fault is
rectified, the system
automatically
completes preemption
and ensures that the
specified interface is
blocked.
l Related commands need to be used to
specify the delayed preemption mode
in advance. The preemption delay
does not have a default value, and
therefore related commands must be
used to set the preemption delay.
l After delayed preemption is
configured successfully, a fault needs
to be simulated to ensure that the
specified interface is blocked.
321
Preemption
Mode
Manual
preemp
tion
Whether the specified
interface will be
blocked can be
controlled manually.
l The manual preemption mode needs
to be specified in advance.
l After related faults are rectified and
the preemption action is taken,
manual preemption does not take
effect.
Manual preemption needs to be
configured so that the specified
interface is blocked after the next
fault is rectified. This increases the
maintenance workload.

NOTE
In preemption mode, blocking an interface temporarily disconnects a link in a SEP segment.
SEP Multi-Instance
As shown in Figure 10-8, in regular SEP networking, a physical ring network can be configured
with only one SEP segment in which only one interface can be blocked. If an interface in the
SEP segment in the complete state is blocked, all user data is transmitted only along the path
where the primary edge interface is located. The path where the secondary edge interface is
located is idle, which leads to a waste of bandwidth.
322
Figure 10-8 Networking diagram for SEP multi-instance
LSW1
LSW2
LSW4
LSW3
NPE1
NPE2
IP/MPLS Core
CE2 CE1
SEP
Segment1
Block Port
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node
VRRP+peer BFD
VLAN 100~200
VLAN 201~400
C
o
r
e
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
A
c
c
e
s
s
group 2:Master
group 1:Backup
group 1:Master
group 2:Backup

SEP multi-instance allows two SEP segments to be configured on one physical ring network.
All devices, interface roles, and control VLANs in each SEP segment must be configured by
conforming to basic SEP configurations principles. Each SEP segment has one blocked interface.
Each blocked interface detects whether the physical ring network is complete. The blocked
interfaces in the two SEP segments are independent of each other.
A physical ring network can be configured with one or two SEP segments. Each SEP segment
needs to be configured with a protected instance and each protected instance represents a VLAN
range. The topology calculated by a SEP segment is valid only for that SEP segment.
After different protected instances are configured for SEP segments and the mapping between
protected instances and VLANs is set, a blocked interface is valid only for the VLANs protected
by the SEP segment where the blocked interface resides. Data traffic of different VLANs can
be transmitted along different paths. This implements traffic load balancing and link backup.
323
LSW1
LSW2
LSW4
LSW3
NPE1
NPE2
IP/MPLS Core
CE2 CE1
SEP
Segment2
Block Port
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node
VRRP+peer BFD
Instance1:
VLAN 100~200
Instance2:
VLAN 201~400
C
o
r
e
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
A
c
c
e
s
s
group 2:Master
group 1:Backup
group 1:Master
group 2:Backup
SEP Segment1
P1
P2

As shown in Figure 10-9, the SEP multi-instance ring network that consists of LSW1 to LSW4
has two SEP segments. P1 is the blocked interface in SEP segment 1, and P2 is the blocked
interface in SEP segment 2.
l Protected instance 1 is configured in SEP segment 1 to protect the data of VLAN 100 to
VLAN 200. The data is transmitted along path LSW1->LSW2->NPE1. As the blocked
interface in SEP segment 2, P2 blocks only the data of VLAN 201 to VLAN 400.
l Protected instance 2 is configured in SEP segment 2 to protect the data of VLAN 201 to
VLAN 400. The data is transmitted along path LSW3->LSW4->NPE2. As the blocked
interface in SEP segment 1, P1 blocks only the data of VLAN 100 to VLAN 200.
In the case of a node or a link failure, each SEP segment calculates its own topology
independently, and the nodes in each SEP segment update their LSA databases.
NOTE
Only the S3700HI supports SEP multi-instance.
324
SEP Topology Change Notification
Table 10-6 lists the situations in which the topology of a SEP segment changes.
Table 10-6 SEP topology changes
SEP Topology
Change
Description
Topology
change caused
by an interface
fault
If an interface on a device in a complete SEP segment becomes faulty, the
topology of the SEP segment changes.
An interface fault can be a link fault or a neighboring interface fault.
Topology
change caused
by a fault being
rectified and the
preemption
function taking
effect
One or more faults occur in the SEP segment. When the last fault is rectified
and the blocked interface is preempted, the topology is considered
changed.

Table 10-7 list the situations in which topology changes are reported.
Table 10-7 SEP topology change notification
SEP
Topology
Change
Notification
Scenario Description Solution
Topology
change
notification
from a lower-
layer network
to an upper-
layer network
Networking where a
SEP network is
connected to an
upper-layer network
running other
features such as
SEP, STP, RRPP
and SmartLink
l If the blocked interface in a
lower-layer SEP network is
manually changed, the topology
of the SEP segment changes.
Because the upper-layer
network cannot detect the
topology change, traffic is
interrupted.
l If an interface in a lower-layer
SEP network becomes faulty,
the topology of the SEP segment
changes but the upper-layer
change. As a result, traffic is
interrupted.
Configure
the SEP
topology
change
notification
function.
325
SEP
Topology
Change
Notification
Networking
scenario where a
host is connected to
a SEP network by
using a SmartLink
group
During an active/standby
switchover of member interfaces in
the SmartLink group, the host sends
a SmartLink Flush packet to notify
the connected devices in the SEP
segment of the switchover.
If the connected devices in the SEP
segment cannot identify the
SmartLink Flush packet (that is, if
these connected devices in the SEP
segment cannot detect any topology
change of the lower-layer network),
traffic will be interrupted.
Enable the
edge devices
in the SEP
segment to
process
SmartLink
Flush
packets.
Topology
change
notification
from an upper-
layer network
to a lower-layer
network
Networking
scenario where a
SEP network is
connected to an
upper-layer network
configured with
CFM.
If a fault occurs on the upper-layer
network, the topology of that
network changes but the lower-
layer network cannot detect the
interrupted.
Configure
association
between SEP
and CFM.

10.2 Configuring Basic SEP Functions
When there is no faulty link on a ring network running SEP, SEP can eliminate loops on the
Ethernet. When a link fault occurs on a ring network running SEP, SEP can immediately restore
the communication links between the nodes.
Before configuring basic SEP functions, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
the configuration task quickly and efficiently.
Generally, redundant links are used to connect an Ethernet switching network to an upper-layer
network to provide link backup and enhance network reliability. The use of redundant links,
however, may produce loops, causing broadcast storms and rendering the MAC address table
unstable. As a result, the communication quality deteriorates, and communication services may
even be interrupted. SEP can be deployed on the ring network to block redundant links and
unblock them if a link fault occurs.
326
Before configuring basic SEP functions, complete the following tasks:
l Establishing the ring networking
l Ensuring that the devices are powered on correctly and operate properly
Data Preparation
To configure basic SEP functions, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 SEP segment ID
2 ID of the control VLAN in the SEP segment
3 Role of each interface added to the SEP segment

10.2.2 Configuring an SEP Segment
SEP takes an SEP segment as a basic unit. An SEP segment is composed of multiple
interconnected Layer 2 switching devices configured with the same SEP segment ID and the
same control VLAN ID.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
sep segment segment-id
An SEP segment is created and the view of the SEP segment is displayed.
Before deleting a created SEP segment, you need to check whether there is any interface added
to the SEP segment. If there is an interface added to the SEP segment, run the undo sep
segment segment-id command in the interface view to delete the interface from the SEP segment.
Otherwise, the SEP segment cannot be deleted.
----End
10.2.3 Configuring a Control VLAN
In a SEP segment, a control VLAN is used to transmit SEP packets but not service packets,
enhancing the security of SEP. Each SEP segment must be configured with a control VLAN.
After being added to a SEP segment configured with a control VLAN, an interface is added to
the control VLAN automatically.
327
Context
NOTE
On a SEP network that has no-neighbor edge interfaces, a device that is not in a SEP segment cannot be
added to the control VLAN of the SEP segment. Otherwise, a loop will be caused on the network.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
A SEP segment is created and the view of the SEP segment is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
control-vlan vlan-id
The control VLAN of the SEP segment is configured for transmitting SEP packets.
The control VLAN specified by vlan-id must be newly created and must not have been used by
RRPP or used in port trunk, default, mapping, or stacking mode.
l Different SEP segments can use the same control VLAN.
l If there is an interface added to the SEP segment, you cannot directly delete the control VLAN
of the SEP segment. To delete the control VLAN, run the undo sep segment segment-id
command in the interface view to delete the interface from the SEP segment, and then run
the undo control-vlan command to delete the control VLAN.
l If there is no interface added to the SEP segment, you can run the control-vlan vlan-id
command for multiple times. Only the latest configuration takes effect.
l After the control VLAN is created successfully, the command used to create a common
VLAN will be displayed in the configuration file.
Each SEP segment must be configured with a control VLAN. After an interface is added to
a SEP segment configured with a control VLAN, the interface will be automatically added
to the control VLAN.
If the interface type is Trunk, in the configuration file, the port trunk allow-pass vlan
command is displayed in the view of the interface added to the SEP segment.
If the interface type is Hybrid, in the configuration file, the port hybrid tagged vlan
command is displayed in the view of the interface added to the SEP segment.
----End
10.2.4 Creating a Protected Instance
Interfaces can be added to an SEP segment only after the SEP segment is configured with
protected instances.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
328
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
protected-instance { all | { instance-id1 [ to instance-id2 ] &<1-10> } }
A protected instance is created in a SEP segment.
By default, no protected instance is configured in a SEP segment.
----End
10.2.5 Adding a Layer 2 Interface to a SEP Segment and Configuring
a Role for the Interface
To ensure the normal forwarding of SEP packets in a SEP segment, add Layer 2 interfaces to
the SEP segment and configure different roles for the interfaces.
Context
After an interface is added to SEP segment, the interface sets its interface role to the primary
edge interface if the interface has the right to participate in the election of the primary edge
interface. Then, the interface periodically sends a primary edge interface-election packet without
waiting for the success of neighbor negotiation.
The primary edge interface-election packet contains the role of the interface (primary edge
interface, secondary edge interface, or common interface), the bridge MAC address of the
interface, interface ID, and the status of the topology database.
Table 10-8 lists interface roles.
Table 10-8 Interface roles
Interface
roles
Scenario
Common
port
- In a SEP segment, all interfaces except edge
interfaces and the blocked interface are
common interfaces.
A common interface monitors the status of its
directly connected SEP link and notifies its
neighboring interface of link status changes in
time. The neighboring interface constantly
floods the notification message to other
interfaces in the SEP segment until the
message reaches the primary edge interface.
The primary edge interface then processes the
message.
-
329
Interface
roles
Scenario
Edge port Primary
Edge Port
A SEP segment has only one primary edge
elected.
The primary edge interface initiates blocked-
interface preemption, terminates packets, and
sends packets about topology changes to other
networks.
Open ring
network
Closed ring
network
Multiple-ring
networking
Hybrid SEP
+RRPP ring
networking
Secondary
edge port
A SEP segment has only one secondary edge
elected.
A secondary edge interface terminates packets,
and sends topology change notification
messages to other networks.
No-
neighbor
primary
edge port
The interface at the most marginal edge of a
SEP segment is a no-neighbor primary edge
interface, as shown in Figure 10-2. It is
configured by users.
A no-neighbor primary interface initiates
No-neighbor primary edge interfaces are used
to interconnect Huawei devices and non-
Huawei devices or devices that do not support
SEP.
Hybrid SEP
+MSTP ring
networking
No-
neighbor
secondary
edge port
A no-neighbor secondary edge interface
terminates packets and sends topology change
No-neighbor secondary edge interfaces are
used to interconnect non-Huawei devices and
devices that do not support SEP.

NOTE
Normally, an edge interface and a no-neighbor edge interface belong to different SEP segments.
Before adding a Layer 2 interface to a SEP segment, ensure that STP has been disabled on the interface.
Before adding an interface to a SEP segment,configure a protected instance or a range of protected
instances .
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
330
Step 2 Run:
The view of an Ethernet interface added to the SEP segment is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
stp disable
STP is disabled on the interface.
Step 4 Run:
sep segment segment-id [ edge [ no-neighbor ] { primary | secondary } ]
The Ethernet interface is added to a specified SEP segment and a role is configured for it.
NOTE
On the S3700HI, an interface can be added to two SEP segments.
On the S3700SI and S3700EI, an interface can be added to only one SEP segment.
----End
After basic SEP functions are configured, you can view the information such as the names and
roles of interfaces added to an SEP segment, status of the interfaces on neighbors, and forwarding
status of the local interface.
Prerequisite
The configurations of basic SEP functions are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display sep interface [ interface-type interface-number | segment segment-id ]
[ verbose ] command to check the information about interfaces that reside on the device
and are added to a specified SEP segment.
l Run the display sep topology [ segment segment-id ] [ verbose ] command to check the
topology status of a specified SEP segment.
----End
10.3 Specifying an Interface to Block
By default, the blocked interface is one of the last two interfaces that complete neighbor
negotiation. Sometimes, the negotiated blocked interface, however, may not be the expected
one. An interface can be selected to block as required.
Before specifying an interface to block, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This can help you complete
331
In general, a blocked interface is one of the last two interfaces that complete neighbor negotiation.
In some cases, however, the negotiated blocked interface may not be the one you expect to be
blocked. You specify an interface to block as needed. The designated blocking does not,
however, become effective immediately. A preemption mechanism allows a designated interface
to be blocked instead of a previously blocked interface.
Before specifying an interface to block, complete the following task:
l Configuring Basic SEP Functions
Data Preparation
To specify an interface to block, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Interface blocking mode
2 SEP preemption mode

10.3.2 Setting an Interface Blocking Mode
Each interface in a SEP segment may become a blocked interface. You can specify an interface
to block by configuring an interface blocking mode.
Context
In a SEP segment, an interface is blocked to prevent loops.
You can configure an interface blocking mode in order to specify the location of a blocked
interface. Table 10-9 lists interface blocking modes.
Table 10-9 Interface blocking mode
Interface Blocking
Mode
Description
with the highest priority
as the blocked interface
Is applicable to a large-scale network.
After fault recovery, the interface with the highest priority in a
SEP segment is designated as the blocked interface. In this mode,
the priorities of the interfaces on the SEP segment need to be set
in advanced.
in the middle of a SEP
segment as the blocked
interface
Is applicable to a network where traffic is symmetrically
distributed.
After fault recovery, the interface in the middle of a SEP segment
is designated as the blocked interface.
332
Interface Blocking
Mode
Description
configured hop count
After fault recovery, a specified interface can be blocked based
on the hop count. A network planner needs to be familiar with
the topology of the entire SEP segment and the number of hops
from the blocked interface to the primary-edge interface.
device name and interface
name
After fault recovery, a specified interface can be blocked based
on the device name and the interface name. A network planner
needs to be familiar with the names of devices and interfaces on
the entire SEP segment and ensures that each device name is
unique.

Do as follows on the device where the primary edge interface or the no-neighbor primary edge
interface is located:
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
block port { optimal | middle | hop hop-id | sysname sysname interface interface-
type interface-number }
An interface blocking mode is set.
By default, one of the interfaces at both ends of the last link that is set up or the last link that
recovers from a fault is blocked.
l optimal specifies the interface with the highest priority as the blocked interface.
l middle specifies the interface in the middle of the SEP segment as the blocked interface.
l hop specifies the interface that is hop-id hops away from the primary edge interface as the
blocked interface.
If hop-id is set to 1, it indicates that the blocked interface is the primary edge interface. If
hop-id is set to 2, it indicates that the blocked interface is the neighboring interface of the
primary edge interface. The hop count increases along with the number of downstream
neighbors of the primary edge interface.
l sysname+interface specifies the name of the device where the interface to be blocked
resides.
333
For information on how to select an interface blocking mode, see the preceding table.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
If the interface that has the highest priority is specified to block, run the sep segment segment-
id priority priority command in the view of the interface to be blocked to increase its priority.
When a fault is rectified, the specified interface will be blocked.
The default priority of an interface added to a SEP segment is 64. The priority value of an
interface is an integer ranging from 1 to 128. The greater the priority value, the higher the priority.
10.3.3 Configuring the Preemption Mode
The SEP preemption mode is classified into delay preemption and manual preemption.
Context
After the interface blocking mode is specified, whether the specified interface will be blocked
is determined by the preemption mode. Table 10-10 lists the preemption modes.
Table 10-10 Preemption mode
Preemption
Mode
Non-preemption
mode
SEP is in the non-
preemption mode by
default.
In this mode, blocking an
interface does not
disconnect any link in a
SEP segment.
The blocked interface is one of the last two
interfaces that complete neighbor
negotiation.
Preempt
ion
mode
Delayed
preempt
ion
Each time a fault is
rectified, the system
automatically completes
preemption and ensures
that the specified
interface is blocked.
l Related commands need to be used to
specify the delayed preemption mode in
advance. The preemption delay does not
have a default value, and therefore
related commands must be used to set
the preemption delay.
l After delayed preemption is configured
successfully, a fault needs to be
simulated to ensure that the specified
interface is blocked.
334
Preemption
Mode
Manual
preempt
ion
Whether the specified
interface will be blocked
can be controlled
manually.
l The manual preemption mode needs to
be specified in advance.
l After related faults are rectified and the
preemption action is taken, manual
preemption does not take effect.
Manual preemption needs to be
configured so that the specified
interface is blocked after the next fault
is rectified. This increases the
maintenance workload.

The following conditions must be met to trigger preemption:
l The topology of the SEP segment must be normal.
l The primary edge interface or no-neighbor primary edge interface has been elected in the
SEP segment.
l The function of flexibly specifying a blocked interface is enabled on the device where the
primary edge interface or no-neighbor primary edge interface resides.
Do as follows on the Layer 2 switching device where the primary edge interface or the no-
neighbour primary edge interface is elected.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
preempt { manual | delay seconds }
The preemption mode is configured on the primary edge interface.
By default, the primary edge interface is not configured with the preemption mode, that is, the
non-preemption mode is adopted.
----End
After specifying an interface to block, you can view information about a specified blocked
interface.
335
Prerequisite
The configurations of specifying an interface to block are complete.
Procedure
----End
10.4 Configuring SEP Multi-Instance
SEP multi-instance allows two SEP segments to be configured on a physical ring network. After
different protected instances are configured for the SEP segments and VLANs are mapped to
specified protected instances, load balancing and link backup can be implemented for service
traffic.
Before configuring SEP multi-instance, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
in regular SEP networking, a physical ring network can be configured with only one SEP segment
in which only one interface can be blocked. If an interface in the SEP segment in the complete
state is blocked, all user data is transmitted only along the path where the primary edge interface
is located. The path where the secondary edge interface is located is idle, which leads to a waste
of bandwidth.
336
LSW1
LSW2
LSW4
LSW3
NPE1
NPE2
IP/MPLS Core
CE2 CE1
SEP
Segment2
Block Port
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node
VRRP+peer BFD
Instance1:
VLAN 100~200
Instance2:
VLAN 201~400
C
o
r
e
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
A
c
c
e
s
s
group 2:Master
group 1:Backup
group 1:Master
group 2:Backup
SEP Segment1
P1
P2

To solve the problem of bandwidth waste and to implement traffic load balancing and link
backup, multi-instance can be deployed in the SEP network and mappings between protected
instances and user VLANs need to be set, as shown in Figure 10-10. Data traffic of different
VLANs can be transmitted along different paths.
NOTE
l On the S3700HI, a physical ring network can have two SEP segments.
l Only the S3700HI supports SEP multi-instance.
Before configuring SEP multi-instance, complete the following tasks:
l Specifying an Interface to Block
337
Data Preparation
To configure SEP multi-instance, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 ID of a protected instance in a SEP segment
2 ID of a VLAN mapped to a protected instance

10.4.2 Configuring and Activating Mappings Between Protected
Instances and VLANs
A physical ring network can be configured with one or two SEP segments. To ensure proper
traffic transmission, each SEP segment needs to be configured with a protected instance. After
mappings between protected instances and specified VLANs are configured, load balancing and
link backup can be implemented.
Context
After mappings between protected instances and VLANs are configured, the mappings need to
be activated to implement load balancing and link backup.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The MST region view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
instance instance-id vlan { vlan-id [ to vlan-id ] } &<1-10>
Mappings between protected instances and VLANs are configured.
The value of instance-id specified in this command must be consistent with that of instance-id
specified in the protected-instance command.
Step 4 Run:
Mappings between protected instances and VLANs are activated.
After mappings between protected instances and VLANs take effect, topology changes of a SEP
segment affect only corresponding VLANs. This ensures reliable transmission of user data.
----End
338
After configuring SEP multi-instance on a ring network, you can view the blocked interface in
each SEP segment.
Prerequisite
The configurations of SEP multi-instance are complete.
Procedure
----End
10.5 Configuring the Topology Change Notification
Function
The function of advertising topology changes is configured on the device connecting a lower-
level network to an upper-level network. With this function, the device can notify the remote
device of topology changes of the lower-level and upper-level networks. After being notified of
these topology changes, all the devices on the network where the remote device resides delete
associated MAC addresses and ARP entry in time and relearn the MAC address of the remote
device. This ensures nonstop traffic forwarding.
Before configuring the topology change notification function, familiarize yourself with the
applicable environment, complete the pre-configuration tasks, and obtain the required data. This
will help you complete the configuration task quickly and efficiently.
Currently, the S3700 can report topology changes in two modes, as shown in Table 10-11. You
can select a mode as needed.
339
Table 10-11 SEP topology change notification
SEP
Topology
Change
Notification
Topology
change
notification
from a lower-
layer network
to an upper-
layer network
Networking where a
SEP network is
connected to an
upper-layer network
running other
features such as
SEP, STP, RRPP
and SmartLink
l If the blocked interface in a
lower-layer SEP network is
manually changed, the topology
of the SEP segment changes.
Because the upper-layer
topology change, traffic is
interrupted.
l If an interface in a lower-layer
SEP network becomes faulty,
the topology of the SEP segment
changes but the upper-layer
interrupted.
Configure
the SEP
topology
change
notification
function.
Networking
scenario where a
host is connected to
a SEP network by
using a SmartLink
group
During an active/standby
switchover of member interfaces in
the SmartLink group, the host sends
a SmartLink Flush packet to notify
the connected devices in the SEP
segment of the switchover.
If the connected devices in the SEP
segment cannot identify the
SmartLink Flush packet (that is, if
these connected devices in the SEP
segment cannot detect any topology
change of the lower-layer network),
traffic will be interrupted.
Enable the
edge devices
in the SEP
segment to
process
SmartLink
Flush
packets.
Topology
change
notification
from an upper-
layer network
to a lower-layer
network
Networking
scenario where a
SEP network is
connected to an
upper-layer network
configured with
CFM.
If a fault occurs on the upper-layer
network, the topology of that
network changes but the lower-
layer network cannot detect the
interrupted.
Configure
association
between SEP
and CFM.

Before configuring the topology change notification function, complete the following tasks:
l Specifying an Interface to Block
340
Data Preparation
To configure the topology change notification function, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 SEP segment ID
2 Mode of reporting topology changes
3
Names of the Maintenance Domain (MD) and the Maintenance Association (MA),
ID and type of a MEP, name of the interface on which the Maintenance association
End Point (MEP) resides, name of the interface enabled with Ethernet CFM, and name
of the interface associated with Ethernet CFM

10.5.2 Reporting Topology Changes of a Lower-Layer Network -
SEP Topology Change Notification
SEP runs at the access layer. To help an upper-layer network to detect whether the topology of
the network at the access layer changes, configure the SEP topology change notification function
on the device connecting the lower-layer network to the upper-layer network.
Context
If the topology of a specified SEP segment changes but the topology change is not reported to
the upper-layer network in time, the MAC address tables of the devices on the upper-layer
network retain the MAC address entries generated before the topology of the lower-layer
network changes. As a result, user traffic is interrupted. To ensure nonstop traffic forwarding,
configure the device on the lower-layer network to report topology changes to the upper-layer
network. The objects that are notified of topology changes can be specified as needed.
NOTE
Currently, topology changes of a SEP segment can be reported to other SEP segments, STP networks,
RRPP networks and SmartLink networks
After receiving a packet indicating topology changes of a lower-layer network, a device on an
upper-layer network sends TC packets locally to instruct the other devices on this network to
clear associated MAC addresses and relearn MAC addresses after the topology of the lower-
layer network changes. This ensures nonstop traffic forwarding.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
341
tc-notify { segment { segment-id1 [ to segment-id2 ] } &<1-10> | stp | rrpp | smart-
link send-packet vlan vlan-id }
The topology change of a specified SEP segment is reported to another SEP segment or a network
running other ring protocols such as STP or RRPP.
By default, the topology change of a SEP segment is not reported.
----End
Follow-up Procedure
In the networking scenario where three or more SEP ring networks exist, when a TC notification
packet is sent through multiple links, the upper-layer network will receive it multiple times. This
reduces the efficiency for processing packets on the upper-layer network. Therefore, TC
notification packets need to be suppressed. Suppressing TC notification packets frees the upper-
layer network from processing multiple duplicate packets and protects the devices in the SEP
segment against TC notification packet attacks.
Run the tc-protection interval interval-value command in the SEP-segment view to set the
interval for suppressing TC notification packets.
By default, the interval for suppressing TC notification packets is 2s, and three TC notification
packets with different source addresses are processed within 2s.
NOTE
l In the networking scenario where three or more SEP ring networks exist, this command must be run.
If this command is not run, the default interval for suppressing TC notification packets is used.
l A longer interval ensures stable SEP operating but deteriorates the convergence performance.
10.5.3 Reporting Topology Changes of a Lower-Layer Network -
Enabling the Edge Devices in a SEP Segment to Process SmartLink
Flush Packets
In the networking where a host is connected to a SEP network by using a SmartLink group , if
the active/standby switchover of member interfaces in the SmartLink group occurs, the host
sends SmartLink Flush packets to inform the edge devices in the SEP segment of the switchover.
Therefore, the edge devices in the SEP segment must be able to process SmartLink Flush packets.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
deal smart-link-flush
An edge device in a SEP segment is enabled to process SmartLink Flush packets.
342
After receiving a SmartLink Flush packet, the edge device in a SEP segment floods FLUSH-
FDB packets to notify the other devices in the SEP segment of topology changes.
By default, no device in a SEP segment is enabled to process SmartLink Flush packets.
----End
10.5.4 Reporting Topology Changes of an Upper-Layer Network -
Configuring Association Between SEP and CFM
SEP runs at the access layer or aggregation layer. To help SEP networks to detect whether the
topology of an upper-layer network changes, you must configure association between SEP and
CFM on the device connecting the lower-layer network to the upper-layer network.
Context
When CFM detects a fault on the upper-layer network, the edge device notifies the OAM module
of the fault by sending a CFM packet. Then, on the edge device, the SEP status of the interface
associated with CFM changes to Down.
After the SEP status of the interface associated with CFM on the edge device is Down, an
interface on the peer device of the edge device in the SEP segment needs to send a Flush-FDB
packet to notify other nodes that the topology changes. After a device in the SEP segment
receives the Flush-FDB packet, the blocked interface on the device is unblocked and enters the
Forwarding state. Then, the interface sends a Flush-FDB packet to instruct the other nodes in
the SEP segment to refresh the MAC address forwarding table and the ARP table. Therefore,
the lower-layer network can sense the fault of the upper-layer network, and the reliable
transmission of services is ensured.
NOTE
IEEE 802.1ag defines protocols and practices for Operations, Administration and Maintenance (OAM).
IEEE 802.1ag Ethernet CFM protocols comprise three protocols that work together to help administrators
debug Ethernet networks. These protocols are continuity check, link trace and loopback protocols. CFM
provides network-level OAM and is applicable to large-scaled end-to-end networking.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
oam-mgr
The OAM management view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
oam-bind ingress cfm md md-name ma ma-name egress sep segment segment-id interface
interface-type interface-number
Association between SEP and CFM is configured.
l md md-name: specifies a maintenance domain (MD). The total length of md-name and ma-
name cannot be greater than 44 characters.
343
l ma ma-name: specifies a maintenance association (MA). The total length of md-name and
ma-name cannot be greater than 44 characters.
l interface must have been added to the SEP segment.
----End
After configuring the topology change notification function, you can view the objects that are
notified of topology changes.
Prerequisite
The configurations of the topology change notification function are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display sep interface verbose command to check the configuration of reporting
changes in the lower-layer network topology.
l Run the display this command in the OAM management view to check the configuration
of reporting changes in the upper-layer network topology.
----End
10.6 Maintaining SEP
This section describes the commands for maintaining SEP, including the commands for clearing
SEP statistics.
10.6.1 Clearing SEP Statistics
You can run the reset command to reset the SEP statistics before recollecting SEP statistics.
Context
CAUTION
SEP statistics cannot be restored after being cleared. Therefore, perform the action with caution.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the reset sep interface interface-type interface-number statistics command in the user view
to clear SEP statistics.
----End
10.6.2 Debugging SEP
When a fault occurs during the running of SEP, run the following debugging command in the
user view to display the debugging information and locate the fault.
344
Context
CAUTION
Procedure
Step 1 Run the debugging sep { all | common | error | machine | message | pdu [ [ epa | lsa | nbr |
preempt ] [ transmit | receive ] ] } [ segment segment-id | interface interface-type interface-
number ] command in the user view to debug SEP.
----End
This section describes the networking requirements, configuration roadmap, and data
preparation for a typical SEP application and provides the configuration examples.
10.7.1 Example for Configuring SEP on a Closed Ring Network
In the closed ring networking, CE1 is dual homed to a Layer 2 network through multiple Layer
2 switching devices. The two edge devices connected to the upper-layer Layer 2 network are
directly connected to each other. The closed ring network is deployed at the aggregation layer
to implement Layer 2 transparent transmission of unicast and multicast packets. SEP runs at the
aggregation layer to implement link redundancy.
As shown in Figure 10-11, Layer 2 switching devices LSW1 to LSW5 form a ring network,
which is connected to the core network. SEP runs at the aggregation layer. When the ring network
is normal, SEP blocks the redundant Ethernet links. When a link on the ring fails, SEP can
quickly restore communication between the nodes on the ring.
345
Figure 10-11 Networking diagram of a closed ring SEP network
Block Port
Primary Edge Node
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
SEP
Segment1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Secondary Edge Node
IP/MPLS Core
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
CE1
VLAN
100
A
c
c
e
s
s
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
r
e

1. Configure basic SEP functions.
(1) Configure SEP segment 1 on LSW1 to LSW5 and configure VLAN 10 as the control
VLAN of SEP segment 1.
(2) Add all devices on the ring to SEP segment 1, and configure the roles of Eth0/0/1 and
Eth0/0/3 of LSW1 in SEP segment 1.
(3) On the device where the primary edge port is located, specify that the port with the
highest priority will be blocked.
(4) Set priorities of the ports in the SEP segment.
346
Set the highest priority for Eth0/0/2 of LSW3 and retain the default priority of the
other ports so that Eth0/0/2 of LSW3 will be blocked.
(5) Configure delayed preemption on the device where the primary edge port is located.
2. Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on CE1 and LSW1 to LSW5.
Data Preparation
l SEP segment ID
l Control VLAN of the SEP segment
l Port roles in the SEP segment
l Preemption mode
l Method of selecting the port to block
l Priorities of the ports in the SEP segment
Procedure
Step 1 Configure basic SEP functions.
1. Configure SEP segment 1 on LSW1 to LSW5 and configure VLAN 10 as the control VLAN
of SEP segment 1.
# Configure LSW1.
[Quidway] sysname LSW1
[LSW1] sep segment 1
[LSW1-sep-segment1] control-vlan 10
[LSW1-sep-segment1] protected-instance all
[LSW1-sep-segment1] quit
# Configure LSW2.
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure LSW4.
# Configure LSW5.
347
NOTE
l The control VLAN must be a VLAN that has not been created or used, but the configuration file
automatically displays the command for creating the VLAN.
l Each SEP segment must be configured with a control VLAN. After an interface is added to the
SEP segment configured with a control VLAN, the interface is added to the control VLAN
automatically. The configuration file displays port hybrid tagged vlan under this interface.
2. Add all devices on the ring to SEP segment 1 and configure port roles on the devices.
NOTE
By default, STP is enabled on a Layer 2 interface. Before adding an interface to the SEP segment,
disable STP on the interface.
# On LSW1, configure Eth0/0/1 as the primary edge port and Eth0/0/3 as the secondary
edge port.
[LSW1] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[LSW1-Ethernet0/0/1] stp disable
[LSW1-Ethernet0/0/1] sep segment 1 edge primary
[LSW1-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
[LSW1-Ethernet0/0/3] sep segment 1 edge secondary
# Configure LSW2.
[LSW2-Ethernet0/0/1] sep segment 1
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure LSW4.
# Configure LSW5.
3. Specify a port to block.
# On LSW1 where the primary edge port is located, specify that the port with the highest
priority is blocked.
348
[LSW1-sep-segment1] block port optimal
4. Set the priority of Eth0/0/2 on LSW3.
[LSW3-Ethernet0/0/2] sep segment 1 priority 128
5. Configure the preemption mode.
# Configure the delayed preemption mode on LSW1.
[LSW1-sep-segment1] preempt delay 30
NOTE
l You must set the preemption delay when delayed preemption is adopted because there is no
default delay time.
l After all the faulty ports recover, the edge ports no longer receive fault notification packets. If
the primary edge port does not receive any fault notification packet, it starts the delay timer.
When the delay timer expires, nodes in the SEP segment start blocked port preemption.
To implement delayed preemption in this example, you need to simulate a port fault and then
rectify the fault. For example:
Run the shutdown command on Eth0/0/2 of LSW2 to simulate a port fault, and then run the
undo shutdown command on Eth0/0/2 to rectify the fault.
Step 2 Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on CE1 and LSW1 to LSW5.
For details about the configuration, see the configuration files.
l Run the shutdown command on Eth0/0/1 of LSW3 to simulate a port fault, and then run the
display sep interface command on LSW3 to check whether Eth0/0/2 of LSW3 switches from
the Discarding state to the Forwarding state.
<LSW3> display sep interface ethernet 0/0/2
SEP segment 1
----------------------------------------------------------------
Interface Port Role Neighbor Status Port Status
----------------------------------------------------------------
Eth0/0/2 common up forwarding
----End
Configuration Files
l Configuration file of LSW1
#
sysname LSW1
#
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
block port optimal
preempt delay 30
protected-instance 0 to 48
#
stp disable
sep segment 1 edge primary
#
349
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 10 100 200
stp disable
sep segment 1 edge secondary
#
return
#
sysname LSW2
#
vlan batch 10 100
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
#
sysname LSW3
#
vlan batch 10 100
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
sep segment 1 priority 128
#
#
return
#
sysname LSW4
#
vlan batch 10 100
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
350
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
#
sysname LSW5
#
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
l Configuration file of CE1
#
sysname CE1
#
vlan batch 100
#
#
return
10.7.2 Example for Configuring SEP on a Multi-ring Network
In multi-ring networking, multiple rings consisting of Layer 2 switching devices are deployed
at the access layer and aggregation layer. SEP runs at the access layer and aggregation layer to
implement link redundancy.
As shown in Figure 10-12, multiple Layer 2 switching devices form ring networks at the access
layer and aggregation layer. The ring network at the aggregation layer is connected to the core
351
layer. SEP runs at the access layer and aggregation layer. When the ring network is normal, SEP
blocks the redundant Ethernet links. When a link on the ring fails, SEP can quickly restore
communication between nodes on the ring.
Figure 10-12 Networking diagram of a multi-ring SEP network
Block Port
Primary EdEth Node
Secondary EdEth Node
IP/MPLS Core
Eth0/0/2
C
o
r
e
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
LSW4
LSW5
SEP
Segment 1
LSW6
LSW7
LSW8
LSW10
LSW11
LSW9
A
c
c
e
s
s
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n

S
E
P
S
e
g
m
e
n
t

2
S
E
P
S
e
g
m
e
n
t

3
CE2
VLAN
200
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1
CE1
VLAN
100
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
E
t
h
0
/
0
/
3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2 Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/4
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Control VLAN 10
Control VLAN 20
Control VLAN 30

352
(1) Configure SEP segments 1 to 3 and configure VLAN 10, VLAN 20, and VLAN 30
as their control VLANs.
l Configure SEP segment 1 on LSW1 to LSW5 and configure VLAN 10 as the
control VLAN of SEP segment 1.
l Configure SEP segment 2 on LSW2, LSW3, and LSW6 to LSW8, and configure
VLAN 20 as the control VLAN of SEP segment 2.
l Configure SEP segment 3 on LSW3, LSW4, and LSW9 to LSW11, and configure
VLAN 30 as the control VLAN of SEP segment 3.
(2) Add devices on the rings to the SEP segments and configure port roles on the edge
devices of the SEP segments.
l On LSW1 to LSW5, add the interfaces on the ring at the access layer to SEP
segment 1. Configure the roles of Eth0/0/1 and Eth0/0/3 of LSW1 in SEP segment
1.
l Add Eth0/0/2 of LSW2, Eth0/0/1 and Eth0/0/2 of LSW6 to LSW8, and Eth0/0/2
of LSW3 to SEP segment 2. Configure the roles of Eth0/0/2 of LSW2 and Eth0/0/2
of LSW3 in SEP segment 2.
l Add Eth0/0/1 of LSW3, Eth0/0/1 and Eth0/0/2 of LSW9 to LSW11, and Eth0/0/1
of LSW4 to SEP segment 3. Configure the roles of Eth0/0/1 of LSW2 and Eth0/0/1
of LSW3 in SEP segment 3.
(3) Specify the port to block on the device where the primary edge port is located.
l In SEP segment 1, specify that the port with the highest priority will be blocked.
l In SEP segment 2, specify the device name and port name to block the specified
port.
l In SEP segment 3, specify that the blocked port be selected according to the
configured hop counts of ports.
(4) Configure the preemption mode on the device where the primary edge port is located.
Configure delayed preemption in SEP segment 1 and manual preemption in SEP
segment 2 and SEP segment 3.
(5) Configure the topology change notification function on the edge devices between SEP
segments, namely, LSW2, LSW3, and LSW4.
2. Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on CE1, CE2, and LSW1 to LSW11.
Data Preparation
l SEP segment ID
l Preemption mode
l Priorities of the ports in the SEP segment
353
Procedure
1. Configure SEP segments 1 to 3 and configure VLAN 10, VLAN 20, and VLAN 30 as their
control VLANs, as shown in Figure 10-12.
# Configure LSW1.
# Configure LSW2.
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure LSW4.
# Configure LSW5.
# Configure LSW6 to LSW11.
The configurations of LSW6 to LSW11 are similar to the configurations of LSW1 to LSW5
except for the control VLANs of different SEP segments.
354
NOTE
2. Add devices on the rings to the SEP segments and configure port roles according to Figure
10-12.
NOTE
By default, STP is enabled on a Layer 2 interface. Before adding an interface to the SEP segment,
disable STP on the interface.
# On LSW1, configure Eth0/0/1 as the primary edge port and Eth0/0/3 as the secondary
edge port.
# Configure LSW2.
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure LSW4.
355
# Configure LSW5.
# Configure LSW6 to LSW11.
The configurations of LSW6 to LSW11 are similar to the configurations of LSW1 to LSW5
except for the port roles.
3. Specify the port to block.
# On LSW1 where the primary edge port of SEP segment 1 is located, specify that the port
with the highest priority be blocked.
[LSW1-sep-segment1] block port optimal
# On LSW3, set the priority of Eth0/0/4 to 128, which is the highest priority among the
ports so that Eth0/0/4 will be blocked.
[LSW3-Ethernet0/0/4] sep segment 1 priority 128
Use the default priority for the other ports in SEP segment 1.
# On LSW2 where the primary edge port of SPE segment 2 is located, specify the device
name and port name so that the specified port will be blocked.
Before specifying the port to block, you can use the display sep topology command to
view the current topology information and obtain information about all the ports in the
topology. Then you can select the device name and port name.
[LSW2-sep-segment2] block port sysname LSW7 interface ethernet 0/0/1
# On LSW4 where the primary edge port of SEP segment 3 is located, specify that the
blocked port be selected according to the configured hop counts of ports.
[LSW4-sep-segment3] block port hop 5
NOTE
SEP sets the hop count of the primary edge port to 1 and the hop count of the secondary edge port
to 2. Hop counts of other ports increase at a step of 1 in the downstream direction of the primary port.
# Configure the delayed preemption mode on LSW1.
356
NOTE
l You must set the preemption delay when delayed preemption is adopted because there is no
default delay time.
l After all the faulty ports recover, the edge ports no longer receive fault notification packets. If
the primary edge port does not receive any fault notification packet, it starts the delay timer.
When the delay timer expires, nodes in the SEP segment start blocked port preemption.
To implement delayed preemption in this example, you need to simulate a port fault and then
rectify the fault. For example:
Run the shutdown command on Eth0/0/2 of LSW2 to simulate a port fault, and then run the
undo shutdown command on Eth0/0/2 to rectify the fault.
# Configure the manual preemption mode on LSW2.
[LSW2-sep-segment2] preempt manual
[LSW4-sep-segment3] preempt manual
5. Configure the topology change notification function.
# Configure SEP segment 2 to notify SEP segment 1 of topology changes.
# Configure LSW2.
[LSW2-sep-segment2] tc-notify segment 1
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure SEP segment 3 to notify SEP segment 1 of topology changes.
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure LSW4.
NOTE
The topology change notification function is configured on edge devices between SEP segments so
that the upper-layer network can be notified of topology changes on the lower-layer network.
Step 2 Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on the CEs and LSW1 to LSW11.
After completing the preceding configurations, do as follows to verify the configuration. LSW1
is taken as an example.
SEP segment 1
----------------------------------------------------------------
357
----------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname LSW1
#
vlan batch 10 100 200 300
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
block port optimal
preempt delay 30
#
stp disable
#
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 10 100 200 300
stp disable
#
return
#
sysname LSW2
#
vlan batch 10 20 100 200
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
sep segment 2
control-vlan 20
block port sysname LSW7 interface Ethernet0/0/1
tc-notify segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
358
#
sysname LSW3
#
vlan batch 10 20 30 100 200
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
sep segment 2
control-vlan 20
tc-notify segment 1
sep segment 3
control-vlan 30
tc-notify segment 1
#
stp disable
#
stp disable
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
sep segment 1 priority 128
#
return
#
sysname LSW4
#
vlan batch 10 30 100 200
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
sep segment 2
control-vlan 30
sep segment 3
control-vlan 30
block port hop 5
tc-notify segment 1
#
stp disable
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
359
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
#
sysname LSW5
#
vlan batch 10 100 200 300
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
#
port hybrid tagged vlan 10 100 200 300
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
#
sysname LSW6
#
vlan batch 20 200
#
sep segment 2
control-vlan 20
#
stp disable
sep segment 2
#
stp disable
sep segment 2
#
return
#
sysname LSW7
#
vlan batch 20 200
#
sep segment 2
control-vlan 20
#
stp disable
sep segment 2
360
#
stp disable
sep segment 2
#
#
return
#
sysname LSW8
#
vlan batch 20 200
#
sep segment 2
control-vlan 20
#
stp disable
sep segment 2
#
stp disable
sep segment 2
#
return
#
sysname LSW9
#
vlan batch 30 100
#
sep segment 3
control-vlan 30
#
stp disable
sep segment 3
#
stp disable
sep segment 3
#
return
#
sysname LSW10
#
vlan batch 30 100
#
sep segment 3
control-vlan 30
#
stp disable
sep segment 3
#
361
stp disable
sep segment 3
#
#
return
#
sysname LSW11
#
vlan batch 30 100
#
sep segment 3
control-vlan 30
#
stp disable
sep segment 3
#
stp disable
sep segment 3
#
return
#
sysname CE1
#
vlan batch 100
#
#
return
#
sysname CE2
#
vlan batch 200
#
#
return
10.7.3 Example for Configuring SEP on a Hybrid-ring Network
In the networking of this configuration example, the two devices where the access layer and the
aggregation layer are intersected do not support SEP. You can configure SEP at the access layer
to implement redundancy protection switching and configure the function of advertising
topology changes on an edge device in a SEP segment. This helps an upper-layer network to
detect topology changes of a lower-layer network in time.
362
NOTE
In this example, devices at the aggregation layer run the MSTP protocol.
As shown in Figure 10-13, multiple Layer 2 switching devices form a ring at the access layer,
and multiple Layer 3 devices form a ring at the aggregation layer, which is connected to the core
layer. In this case, SEP needs to run at the access layer to implement the following functions:
l When there is no faulty link on the ring network, SEP helps to eliminate loops.
l When a link fault occurs on the ring network, SEP helps to rapidly restore the
communication between nodes.
l The function of advertising topology changes should be configured on an edge device in a
SEP segment. This helps an upper-layer network to detect topology changes of a lower-
layer network in time.
After receiving a message indicating topology changes of a lower-layer network, a device on an
upper-layer network sends TC packets locally to instruct the other devices to clear associated
MAC addresses and relearn MAC addresses after the topology of the lower-layer network
changes. This ensures nonstop traffic forwarding.
363
Figure 10-13 Networking diagram of a hybrid-ring SEP network
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
Block Port(SEP)
IP/MPLS Core
A
c
c
e
s
s
SEP
Segment1
MSTP
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
r
e
PE1
PE2
PE4
PE3
No-neighbor Primary EdEth Node
No-neighbor Secondary EdEth
Node
Do not Support SEP
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/3 Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2
VLAN100
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Block Port(MSTP)
CE

(1) Configure SEP segment 1 on LSW1 to LSW3 and configure VLAN 10 as the control
VLAN of SEP segment 1.
(2) Add LSW1 to LSW3 to SEP segment 1 and configure port roles on the edge devices
of the SEP segment, namely, LSW1 and LSW2.
364
NOTE
PE1 and PE2 do not support the SEP protocol; therefore, the ports of LSW1 and LSW2
connected to the PEs must be no-neighbor edge ports.
(3) On the device where the no-neighbor primary edge port is located, specify the port in
the middle of the SEP segment as the port to block.
(4) Configure manual preemption.
(5) Configure the topology change notification function so that the upper-layer network
running MSTP can be notified of topology changes in the SEP segment.
2. Configure basic MSTP functions.
(1) Add PE1 to PE4 to an MST region RG1.
(2) Create VLANs on PE1 to PE4 and add interfaces on the STP ring to the VLANs.
(3) Configure PE3 as the root bridge and PE4 as the backup root bridge.
3. Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on CE1 and LSW1 to LSW3.
Data Preparation
l SEP segment ID
l Preemption mode
l MST region name, MSTI ID, and priorities of the PEs in the region
Procedure
1. Configure SEP segment 1 on LSW1 to LSW5 and configure VLAN 10 as the control VLAN
of SEP segment 1.
# Configure LSW1.
# Configure LSW2.
# Configure LSW3.
365
NOTE
2. Add LSW1 to LSW3 to SEP segment 1 and configure port roles.
# Configure LSW1.
[LSW1-Ethernet0/0/1] sep segment 1 edge no-neighbor primary
# Configure LSW2.
[LSW2-Ethernet0/0/1] sep segment 1 edge no-neighbor secondary
# Configure LSW3.
3. Specify the port to block.
# On LSW1 where the no-neighbor primary edge port of SEP segment 1 is located, specify
the port in the middle of the SEP segment as the port to block.
[LSW1-sep-segment1] block port middle
[LSW1-sep-segment1] preempt maunal
5. Configure the topology change notification function.
# Configure SEP segment 1 to notify the MSTP network of topology changes.
# Configure LSW1.
[LSW1-sep-segment1] tc-notify stp
# Configure LSW2.
[LSW2-sep-segment1] tc-notify stp
After completing the preceding configurations, do as follows to verify the configuration. LSW1
is taken as an example.
l Run the display sep topology command on LSW1 to view detailed topology information of
the SEP segment.
366
The topology information shows that Eth0/0/2 of LSW3 is in Discarding state, and the other
ports are in Forwarding state.
<LSW1> display sep topology
SEP segment 1
----------------------------------------------------------------
System Name Port Name Port Role Port Status
----------------------------------------------------------------
LSW1 Eth0/0/1 *primary forwarding
LSW1 Eth0/0/2 common forwarding
LSW3 Eth0/0/2 common discarding
LSW2 Eth0/0/2 *secondary forwarding
Step 2 Configure basic MSTP functions.
1. Configure an MST region
# Configure PE1.
[Quidway] sysname PE1
[PE1] stp region-configuration
[PE1-mst-region] region-name RG1
[PE1-mst-region] active region-configuration
[PE1-mst-region] quit
# Configure PE2.
# Configure PE3.
# Configure PE4.
2. Create VLANs and add interfaces to VLANs.
# On PE1, create VLAN 100 and add Eth0/0/1, Eth0/0/2, and Eth0/0/3 to VLAN 100.
[PE1] vlan 100
[PE1-vlan100] quit
[PE1] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid tagged vlan 100
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
# On PE2, PE3, and PE4, create VLAN 100 and add Eth0/0/1, Eth0/0/2, and Eth0/0/3 to
VLAN 100.
367
The configurations of PE2, PE3, and PE3 are similar to the configuration of PE1, and are
not mentioned here. For details about the configuration, see the configuration files.
3. Enable MSTP.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] stp enable
# Configure PE2.
[PE2] stp enable
# Configure PE3.
[PE3] stp enable
# Configure PE4.
[PE4] stp enable
4. Configure PE3 as the root bridge and PE4 as the backup root bridge.
# Set the priority of PE3 to 0 in MSTI0 to ensure that PE3 functions as the root bridge.
[PE3] stp instance 0 priority 0
[PE3] stp root primary
# Set the priority of PE4 to 4096 in MSTI0 to ensure that PE4 functions as the backup root
bridge.
[PE4] stp instance 0 priority 4096
[PE4] stp root secondary
After the configuration, run the display stp brief command on PE2 to check whether Eth0/0/3
is blocked.
<PE4> display stp brief
Step 3 Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on the CE and LSW1 to LSW3.
After the configurations are complete and network become stable, run the following commands
to verify the configuration. LSW1 is taken as an example.
SEP segment 1
----------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname LSW1
#
vlan batch 10 100
368
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
block port middle
tc-notify stp
#
stp disable
sep segment 1 no-neighbor edge primary
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
#
sysname LSW2
#
vlan batch 10 100
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
tc-notify stp
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1 no-neighbor edge secondary
#
return
#
sysname LSW3
#
vlan batch 10 100
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
port hybrid tagged vlan vlan 100
#
return
l Configuration file of PE1
#
sysname PE1
369
#
vlan batch 100
#
stp enable
#
region-name RG1
#
#
#
#
return
#
sysname PE2
#
vlan batch 100
#
stp enable
#
region-name RG1
#
#
#
#
return
#
sysname PE3
#
vlan batch 100 200
#
stp instance 0 root primary
stp enable
#
region-name RG1
#
#
#
#
return
370
#
sysname PE4
#
vlan batch 100 200
#
stp instance 0 root secondary
stp enable
#
region-name RG1
#
#
#
#
return
#
sysname CE1
#
vlan batch 100
#
#
return
10.7.4 Example for Configuring a Hybrid SEP+RRPP Ring Network
(Reporting the Topology Changes of a Lower-Layer Network)
In the networking of this configuration example, you can configure SEP at the access layer to
implement redundancy protection switching and configure the function of advertising topology
changes on an edge device in a SEP segment. This helps an upper-layer network to detect
topology changes of a lower-layer network in time.
371
Figure 10-14 Networking diagram for hybrid rings running SEP+RRPP
LSW1
LSW2
LSW3
Block Port(SEP)
NPE1 NPE2
Network
A
c
c
e
s
s
SEP
Segment1
RRPP
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
PE1 PE2
PE4
PE3
Primary Edge Node
Secondary Edge Node
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2 Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/3 Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/2
VLAN100
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Block Port(RRPP)
CE

As shown in Figure 10-14, Multiple Layer 2 switching devices at the access layer and
aggregation layer form a ring network to access the core layer. RRPP has been configured at the
aggregation layer to eliminate loops. In this case, SEP needs to run at the access layer to
implement the following functions:
l When there is no faulty link on the ring network, SEP helps to eliminate loops.
l When a link fault occurs on the ring network, SEP helps to rapidly restore the
communication between nodes.
l The function of advertising topology changes should be configured on an edge device in a
SEP segment. This helps an upper-layer network to detect topology changes of a lower-
layer network in time.
372
After receiving a message indicating topology changes of a lower-layer network, a device
on an upper-layer network sends TC packets locally to instruct the other devices to clear
associated MAC addresses and relearn MAC addresses after the topology of the lower-
layer network changes. This ensures nonstop traffic forwarding.
(1) Configure the segment with the ID of 1 and the control VLAN with the ID of 10 on
PE1, PE2 and LSW1 to LSW3.
(2) Add PE1, PE2 and LSW1 to LSW3 to a SEP segment, and configure the roles of the
interfaces that reside on PE1 and PE2 and are added to SEP segment.
(3) Set an interface blocking mode on a primary edge interface to specify an interface to
block.
(4) Configure the SEP preemption mode to ensure that the user-defined blocked interface
takes effect when a fault is cleared.
(5) Configure the function of advertising the topology change of a SEP segment so that
the topology change of the local SEP segment can be advertised to the upper-layer
network where RRPP is enabled.
2. Configure basic RRPP functions.
(1) Add PE1 to PE4 to a rrpp domain with the ID of 1, create a control VLAN with the
ID of 5 on PE1 to PE4, and configure a protected VLAN.
(2) Configure PE1 as the master node and PE2 to PE4 as the transmit node of the major
ring, and configure the primary interface and secondary interface of the nodes.
(3) Create a VLAN on PE1 to PE4, and then add the interfaces on the RRPP ring network
to the VLAN.
3. Configure a VLAN on PE3 and PE4 to transmit VRRP packets and BFD packets.
Data Preparation
To complete the configuration, you need the following data.
l SEP segment ID, control VLAN ID, roles of interfaces added to the SEP segment, interface
blocking mode, and SEP preemption mode.
l RRPP domain ID, RRPP ring ID and control VLAN ID.
Procedure
1. Configure a SEP segment with the ID being 1 and a control VLAN with the ID being 10.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] sep segment 1
[PE1-sep-segment1] control-vlan 10
[PE1-sep-segment1] protected-instance all
[PE1-sep-segment1] quit
# Configure PE2.
373
[PE2] sep segment 1
[PE2-sep-segment1] control-vlan 10
[PE2-sep-segment1] protected-instance all
# Configure LSW1.
# Configure LSW2.
# Configure LSW3.
2. Add PE1, PE2 and LSW1 to LSW3 to Segment1 and configure roles of interfaces.
NOTE
By default, STP is enabled on a interface. Before adding an interface to a SEP segment, disable STP
on the interface.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] stp disable
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] sep segment 1 edge primary
# Configure LSW1.
[LSW1-Ethernet0/0/1] sep segment 1 edge no-neighbor primary
# Configure LSW2.
[LSW2-Ethernet0/0/1] sep segment 1 edge no-neighbor secondary
# Configure LSW3.
374
# Configure PE2.
[PE2-Ethernet0/0/1] sep segment 1 edge secondary
After completing the preceding configurations, run the display sep topology command on
PE1 to view the topology of the SEP segment. You can see that the blocked interface is
one of the last two interfaces that complete neighbor negotiation.
[PE1] display sep topology
SEP segment 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------
PE1 Eth0/0/1 primary forwarding
PE2 Eth0/0/1 secondary discarding
3. Set an interface blocking mode.
# In Segment1, block the interface in the middle of the SEP segment on PE1 where the
primary edge interface resides.
[PE1] sep segment 1
[PE1-sep-segment1] block port middle
4. Set the preemption mode.
# In Segment1, set the preemption mode on PE1 where the primary edge interface resides
to manual preemption.
[PE1-sep-segment1] preempt maunal
5. Advertise SEP topology changes.
# In Segment1, advertise the topology change to RRPP.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1-sep-segment1] tc-notify rrpp
# Configure PE2.
[PE2] sep segment 1
[PE2-sep-segment1] tc-notify rrpp
After the preceding configurations are successful, perform the following operations to verify the
configurations. Take PE1 as an example.
l Run the display sep topology command on PE1 to view the information about the topology
of the SEP segment.
The command output shows that the forwarding status of Eth 0/0/2 on LSW3 is
discarding and the forwarding status of the other interfaces is forwarding.
[PE1] display sep topology
SEP segment 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------
PE1 Eth0/0/1 primary forwarding
375
PE2 Eth0/0/1 secondary forwarding
l Run the display sep interface verbose command on PE1 to view the detailed information
about the interfaces added to the SEP segment.
[PE1] display sep interface verbose
SEP segment 1
Control-vlan :10
Preempt Delay Timer :0
TC-Notify Propagate to :rrpp
----------------------------------------------------------------
Interface :Eth0/0/1
Port Role :Config = primary / Active = primary
Port Priority :64
Port Status :forwarding
Neighbor Status :up
Neighbor Port :LSW1 - Eth0/0/1 (00e0-0829-7c00.0000)
NBR TLV rx :2124 tx :2126
LSP INFO TLV rx :2939 tx :135
LSP ACK TLV rx :113 tx :768
PREEMPT REQ TLV rx :0 tx :3
PREEMPT ACK TLV rx :3 tx :0
TC Notify rx :5 tx :3
EPA rx :363 tx :397
Step 2 Configure basic RRPP functions.
1. Add PE1 to PE4 to a rrpp domain with the ID of 1, create a control VLAN with the ID of
5 on PE1 to PE4, and configure a protected VLAN.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] rrpp domain 1
[PE1-rrpp-domain-region1] control-vlan 100
[PE1-rrpp-domain-region1] protected-vlan reference-instance all
# Configure PE2.
[PE2] rrpp domain 1
# Configure PE3.
[PE3] rrpp domain 1
# Configure PE4.
[PE4] rrpp domain 1
2. Create a VLAN and add interfaces on the ring network to the VLAN.
# Create VLAN 100 on PE1, and then add Eth 0/0/1, Eth 0/0/2, and Eth 0/0/3 to VLAN
100.
[PE1] vlan 100
[PE1-vlan100] quit
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] port link-type trunk
376
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] port trunk allow-pass vlan 100
# Create VLAN 100 on PE2, and then add Eth 0/0/1, Eth 0/0/2, and Eth 0/0/3 to VLAN
100.
[PE2] vlan 100
[PE2-vlan100] quit
# Create VLAN 100 on PE3, and then add Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to VLAN 100.
[PE3] vlan 100
[PE3-vlan100] quit
# Create VLAN 100 on PE4, and then add Eth 0/0/1 and Eth 0/0/2 to VLAN 100.
[PE4] vlan 100
[PE4-vlan100] quit
3. Configure PE1 as the master node and PE2 to PE4 as the transmit node of the major ring,
and configure the primary interface and secondary interface of the nodes.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] rrpp domain 1
[PE1-rrpp-domain-region1] ring 1 node-mode master primary-port
gigabitEthernet0/0/2 secondary-port gigabitEthernet0/0/3 level 0
[PE1-rrpp-domain-region1] ring 1 enable
377
# Configure PE2.
[PE2] rrpp domain 1
[PE2-rrpp-domain-region1] ring 1 node-mode transit primary-port
# Configure PE3.
[PE3] rrpp domain 1
# Configure PE4.
[PE4] rrpp domain 1
4. Enable RRPP.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] rrpp enable
# Configure PE2.
[PE2] rrpp enable
# Configure PE3.
[PE3] rrpp enable
# Configure PE4.
[PE4] rrpp enable
After completing the preceding configurations, run the display rrpp brief or display rrpp
verbose domain command on PE1 to check the RRPP configuration.
[PE1] display rrpp brief
Abbreviations for Switch Node Mode :
M - Master , T - Transit , E - Edge , A - Assistant-Edge
RRPP Protocol Status: Enable
RRPP Working Mode: HW
RRPP Linkup Delay Timer: 0 sec (0 sec default)
Number of RRPP Domains: 1
Domain Index : 1
Control VLAN : major 5 sub 6
Protected VLAN : Reference Instance 1
Hello Timer : 1 sec(default is 1 sec) Fail Timer : 6 sec(default is 6 sec)
Ring Ring Node Primary/Common Secondary/Edge Is
ID Level Mode Port Port Enabled
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 M Ethernet0/0/2 Ethernet0/0/3 Yes
You can view that RRPP is enabled on PE1. In domain 1, VLAN 5 is the major control VLAN,
VLAN 6 is the sub-control VLAN, Instance1 is the protected VLAN, and PE1 is the master node
in major ring 1 with the primary interface and secondary interface respectively as Ethernet 0/0/2
and Ethernet 0/0/3.
[PE1] display rrpp verbose domain 1
Domain Index : 1
Control VLAN : major 5 sub 6
Protected VLAN : Reference Instance 1
Hello Timer : 1 sec(default is 1 sec) Fail Timer : 6 sec(default is 6 sec)
RRPP Ring : 1
Ring Level : 0
Node Mode : Master
Ring State : Complete
378
Is Enabled : Enable Is Active: Yes
Primary port : Ethernet0/0/2 Port status: UP
Secondary port : Ethernet0/0/3 Port status: BLOCKED
You can view that in domain 1, VLAN 5 is the major control VLAN, VLAN 6 is the sub-control
VLAN, Instance1 is the protected VLAN, and PE1 is the master node in major ring 1 with the
primary interface and secondary interface respectively as Ethernet 0/0/2 and Ethernet 0/0/3, and
the node status is Complete.
Step 3 Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on the CE, LSW1 to LSW3 and PE1 to PE4.
The configuration details are not mentioned here. For details, see configuration files in this
example.
After the previous configurations, run the following commands to verify the configuration after
the network is stable. Take LSW1 as an example.
l Run the shutdown command on Eth 0/0/1 on LSW2 to simulate an interface fault, and then
run the display sep interface command on LSW3 to check whether the status of Eth 0/0/2
changes from blocked to forwarding.
[LSW3] display sep interface ethernet 0/0/2
SEP segment 1
----------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname LSW1
#
vlan batch 10 100
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
#
sysname LSW2
#
379
vlan batch 10 100
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
return
#
sysname LSW3
#
vlan batch 10 100
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
#

#
return
#
sysname PE1
#
vlan batch 5 to 6 100
#
rrpp enable
#
instance 1 vlan 5 to 6 100
#
380
rrpp domain 1
control-vlan 5
protected-vlan reference-instance 1
ring 1 node-mode master primary-port Ethernet 0/0/2 secondary-port Ethernet
0/0/3 level 0
ring 1 enable
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
block port middle
tc-notify rrpp
#
stp disable
#
port trunk allow-pass vlan 5 to 6 100
stp disable
#
stp disable
#
return
#
sysname PE2
#
vlan batch 5 to 6 100
#
rrpp enable
#
#
rrpp domain 1
control-vlan 5
ring 1 node-mode transit primary-port Ethernet 0/0/2 secondary-port Ethernet
0/0/3 level 0
ring 1 enable
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
tc-notify rrpp
#
stp disable
#
381
stp disable
#
stp disable
#
return
#
sysname PE3
#
vlan batch 5 to 6 100 200
#
rrpp enable
#
#
rrpp domain 1
control-vlan 5
0/0/2 level 0
ring 1 enable
#
stp disable
#
port trunk allow-pass vlan 5 to 6 100 200
stp disable
#
#
return
#
sysname PE4
#
vlan batch 5 to 6 100 200
#
rrpp enable
#
#
rrpp domain 1
control-vlan 5
382
0/0/2 level 0
ring 1 enable
#
stp disable
#
port trunk allow-pass vlan 5 to 6 100 200
stp disable
#
#
return
#
sysname CE1
#
vlan batch 100
#
#
return
10.7.5 Example for Configuring SEP Multi-Instance on a Closed
Ring Network
On a closed ring network, two SEP segments are configured to process different VLAN services,
implement load balancing, and provide link backup.
In common SEP networking, a physical ring can be configured with only one SEP segment in
which only one interface can be blocked. If an interface in the SEP segment in the complete state
is blocked, all user data is transmitted only along the path where the primary edge interface is
located. The path where the secondary edge interface is located is idle, which leads to a waste
of bandwidth.
To solve the problem of bandwidth waste and to implement traffic load balancing, Huawei
develops SEP multi-instance.
383
Figure 10-15 Networking diagram for configuring SEP multi-instance on a closed ring network
A
c
c
e
s
s
A
g
g
r
e
g
a
t
i
o
n
C
o
r
e
IP/MPLS Core
Eth0/0/2
NPE1
NPE2
Eth0/0/2
LSW1
LSW2 LSW3
LSW4
SEP Segment2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
E
t
h
0
/
0
/
2
Eth0/0/1
E
t
h
0
/
0
/
2
E
t
h
0
/
0
/
3 E
th
0
/0
/3
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Block Port
Primary EdEth Node
Secondary EdEth Node
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
P1 P2
Instance1:
VLAN 100~300
Instance2:
VLAN 301~500
CE1 CE2
SEP Segment1

As shown in Figure 10-15, a ring network comprising Layer 2 switches LSW1 to LSW5 is
connected to a core network. SEP runs at the aggregation layer. SEP multi-instance is configured
on LSW1 to LSW4. This allows two SEP segments to solve the problem of bandwidth waste,
implement load balancing, and provide link backup.
384
1. Create two SEP segments and one control VLAN on LSW1 to LSW4.
Different SEP segments can use the same control VLAN.
2. Configure SEP protected instances, and set mappings between SEP protected instances and
user VLANs to ensure that topology changes affect only corresponding VLANs.
3. Add all the devices on the ring network to the SEP segments, and configure Eth 0/0/1 as
the primary edge interface and Eth 0/0/3 as the secondary edge interface on LSW1.
4. Enable the function of specifying an interface to block on the device where the primary
edge interface resides.
5. Configure the SEP preemption mode to ensure that the specified blocked interface takes
effect when a fault is rectified.
6. Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on CE1, CE2, and LSW1 to LSW4.
Data Preparation
l ID of each SEP segment
l ID of a control VLAN
l role of each interface added to each SEP segment
l mode of blocking an interface
l preemption mode
l ID of each SEP protection instance
Procedure
l Configure a SEP segment with the ID of 1 and a control VLAN with the ID of 10.
# Configure LSW1.
# Configure LSW2.
[LSW2] sep segment1
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure LSW4.
l Configure a SEP segment with the ID of 2 and a control VLAN with the ID of 10.
# Configure LSW1.
385
# Configure LSW2.
[LSW2] sep segment2
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure LSW4.
NOTE
l The control VLAN must be a new one.
l The command used to create a common VLAN is automatically displayed in a configuration file.
l Each SEP segment must be configured with a control VLAN. After being added to a SEP segment
configured with a control VLAN, an interface is added to the control VLAN automatically.
Step 2 Configure SEP protected instances, and then configure mappings between SEP protected
instances and user VLANs.
# Configure LSW1.
[LSW1] vlan batch 100 to 500
[LSW1-sep-segment1] protected-instance 1
[LSW1-sep-segment2] protected-instance 2
[LSW1] stp region-configuration
[LSW1-mst-region] instance 1 vlan 100 to 300
[LSW1-mst-region] instance 2 vlan 301 to 500
[LSW1-mst-region] active region-configuration
[LSW1-mst-region] quit
The configurations of LSW2 to LSW4 are similar to those of LSW1, and are not provided here.
For details, see configuration files in this configuration example.
Step 3 Add all the devices on the ring network to the SEP segments and configure interface roles.
NOTE
By default, STP is enabled on a Layer 2 interface. Before adding an interface to a SEP segment, disable
STP on the interface.
# On LSW1, configure Eth 0/0/1 as the primary edge interface and Eth 0/0/3 as the secondary
edge interface.
# Configure LSW2.
386
# Configure LSW3.
# Configure LSW4.
After completing the preceding configurations, run the display sep topology command on
LSW1 to view the topology of each SEP segment. You can see that the blocked interface is one
of the last two interfaces that complete neighbor negotiation.
[LSW1] display sep topology
SEP segment 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------
LSW1 Eth0/0/1 primary forwarding
LSW1 Eth0/0/3 secondary discarding
SEP segment 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------
LSW1 Eth0/0/3 secondary discarding
Step 4 Specify an interface to block.
387
# Configure delayed preemption and the mode of blocking an interface to be based on the device
name and interface name on LSW1 where the primary edge interface is located.
NOTE
l In this configuration example, an interface fault needs to be simulated and then rectified to implement
delayed preemption. To ensure that delayed preemption takes effect on the two SEP segments, simulate
an interface fault in the two SEP segment. For example:
l In SEP segment 1, run the shutdown command on Eth 0/0/1 of LSW2 to simulate an interface
fault. Then, run the undo shutdown command on Eth 0/0/1 to simulate interface fault recovery.
l In SEP segment 2, run the shutdown command on Eth 0/0/1 of LSW3 to simulate an interface
fault. Then, run the undo shutdown command on Eth 0/0/1 to simulate interface fault recovery.
After completing the preceding operations, view SEP topologies. Use the display on LSW1 as
an example.
Run the display sep topology command on LSW1. You can view information about the topology
of each SEP segment.
[LSW1] display sep topology
SEP segment 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------
LSW1 Eth0/0/3 secondary forwarding
SEP segment 2
-----------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------------------
LSW1 Eth0/0/3 secondary forwarding
From the preceding command output, you can see:
l On LSW3 in SEP segment 1, Eth 0/0/1 is in the discarding state, and the other interfaces
are in the forwarding state.
l On LSW2 in SEP segment 2, Eth 0/0/1 is in the discarding state, and the other interfaces
are in the forwarding state.
Step 5 Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on CE1, CE2, and LSW1 to LSW4.
The configuration details are not provided here. For details, see configuration files in this
example.
388
Simulate a fault, and then check whether the status of the blocked interface changes from blocked
to forwarding.
Run the shutdown command on Eth 0/0/1 of LSW2 to simulate an interface fault.
Run the display sep interface command on LSW3 to check whether the status of Eth0/0/1 in
SEP segment 1 changes from blocked to forwarding.
[LSW3] display sep interface ethernet 0/0/1
SEP segment 1
----------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------
SEP segment 2
----------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------
The preceding command output shows that the status of Eth 0/0/1 changes from blocked to
forwarding and the forwarding path change in SEP segment 1 does not affect the forwarding
path in SEP segment 2.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname LSW1
#
#
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
preempt delay 15
protected-instance 1
sep segment 2
control-vlan 10
preempt delay 15
#
port trunk allow-pass vlan 10 100 to 500
stp disable
#
stp disable
389
#
return
#
sysname LSW2
#
#
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
sep segment 2
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
sep segment 2
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
sep segment 2
#
#
return
#
sysname LSW3
#
#
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
sep segment 2
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
sep segment 2
#
stp disable
390
sep segment 1
sep segment 2
#
#
return
#
sysname LSW4
#
vlan batch 10 60 100 to 500
#
#
sep segment 1
control-vlan 10
sep segment 2
control-vlan 10
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
sep segment 2
#
stp disable
sep segment 1
sep segment 2
#
return
#
sysname CE1
#
#
#
return
#
sysname CE2
#
#
#
return
391
11 Layer 2 Protocol Transparent
Transmission Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the concept, configuration procedure, and configuration examples of
Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission.
11.1 Overview of Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
This section describes the concept of Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission.
11.2 Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission Features Supported by the S3700
This section describes the Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission features supported by the
S3700.
11.3 Configuring Interface-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
When each interface of a device on the backbone network is connected to only one user network
and Layer 2 protocol packets sent from the user network do not need VLAN tags, you can
configure interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission so that Layer 2 protocol
packets can be transparently transmitted on the backbone network.
11.4 Configuring VLAN-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
When each interface of devices on the backbone network is connected to multiple user networks
and Layer 2 protocol packets sent from user network contain VLAN tags, you can configure
VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission so that Layer 2 protocol packets are
transparently transmitted on the backbone network.
11.5 Configuring QinQ-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission so that Layer 2 protocol packets can be
transparently transmitted on the backbone network and that VLAN IDs of the carrier can be
saved.
11.6 Maintaining Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
This section describes how to debug Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 11 Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission Configuration
392
This section provides examples for configuring interface, VLAN, and QinQ based Layer 2
protocol transparent transmission.
393
11.1 Overview of Layer 2 Protocol Transparent
Transmission
This section describes the concept of Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission.
Background
In certain network environments, packets of Layer 2 protocols such as MSTP, HGMP, and LACP
need to be transmitted between user networks across the backbone network to complete
calculation of the protocols.
As shown in Figure 11-1, user network 1 and user network 2 run Layer 2 protocols, for example,
MSTP. Layer 2 protocol packets of user network 1 must traverse the backbone network to reach
user network 2 so that the spanning tree can be calculated. Packets of a Layer 2 protocol usually
use the same destination MAC address. For example, MSTP packets are BPDUs that use 0180-
C200-0000 as the destination MAC address. Therefore, when the BPDUs reach a PE on the
backbone network, the PE cannot identify whether the BPDUs are sent from a user network or
the backbone network. As a result, the PE sends the BPDUs to the CPU for spanning tree
calculation.
In this case, the spanning tree is calculated between the devices of user network 1 and PE1, and
the devices of user network 2 are not involved in the calculation. Therefore, BPDUs of user
network 1 cannot be sent to user network 2 through the backbone network.
Figure 11-1 Transparent transmission of Layer 2 protocol packets on an ISP network
ISP
network
User
network1
User
network2
CE1
CE2
PE1 PE2

Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission can solve this problem.
To transparently transmit Layer 2 protocol packets on the backbone network, the following
requirements must be met:
394
l Each site on a user network can receive Layer 2 protocol packets from other sites.
l Layer 2 protocol packets sent from a user network are not processed by CPUs of devices
on the backbone network.
l Layer 2 protocol packets of different user networks are separated from each other.
A Layer 2 protocol packet is transparently transmitted as follows:
l A user-side device on the backbone network replaces the multicast destination MAC
address of Layer 2 protocol packets with a specified multicast MAC address.
l Devices on the backbone network determine whether to add an outer VLAN tag to the
packet according to the transparent transmission mode.
l The egress device on the backbone network restores the original multicast destination MAC
address of the packet according to the mappings between multicast destination MAC
addresses and Layer 2 protocols. The egress device also determines whether to remove the
outer VLAN tag, and then forwards the packet to the user network.
11.2 Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission Features
Supported by the S3700
This section describes the Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission features supported by the
S3700.
Based on application scenarios, the S3700 supports the following Layer 2 protocol transparent
transmission features:
l Interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
l VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
l QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
Currently, the S3700 can transparently transmit packets of the following Layer 2 protocols:
l Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
l Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
l Ethernet Operation, Administration, and Maintenance 802.3ah (EOAM3ah)
l Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
l Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)
l Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
l HUAWEI Group Management Protocol (HGMP)
l VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP)
l Unidirectional Link Detection (UDLD)
l Port Aggregation Protocol (PAGP)
l Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP)
l Per VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)
l Shared Spanning Tree Protocol (SSTP)
l Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP)
l User-defined protocols
395
Interface-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
Figure 11-2 Networking of interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
LAN-B
MSTP
ISP Network
PE1
PE3
PE2
Port based
VLAN 200
Port based
VLAN 300
Port based
VLAN 200
Port based
VLAN 300
Port based
VLAN 200
LAN-A
MSTP
LAN-B
MSTP
LAN-B
MSTP
LAN-A
MSTP
BPDU Tunnel 200
BPDU Tunnel 300

As shown in Figure 11-2, each interface of a PE is connected to one user network. The user
networks connected to the same PE belong to different LANs, namely, LAN-A and LAN-B.
BPDUs sent from user networks are not tagged, but the PE needs to identify the LAN that each
BPDU belongs to. BPDUs of a user network on LAN-A must be forwarded to other user networks
on LAN-A, but cannot be forwarded to user networks on LAN-B. In addition, BPDUs cannot
be processed by network devices of the ISP.
The following methods can be used to meet the proceeding requirements:
l Replace the default multicast MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets that can be
identified by PEs on the backbone network with another multicast MAC address.
1. Configure all PEs as providers. Then the multicast destination MAC address of
BPDUs sent from the backbone network is changed from 01-80-C2-00-00-00 to
01-80-C2-00-00-08.
2. Configure all devices on user networks as customers. Then the multicast destination
MAC address of BPDUs sent from user networks is 01-80-C2-00-00-00.
3. On PEs, add the interfaces connected to the same user network to the same VLAN.
Then PEs add VLAN tags to received BPDUs according to default VLANs of the
interfaces.
4. PEs (providers) do not consider these packets as Layer 2 protocol BPDUs and do not
send them to the CPU. Instead, PEs select a Layer 2 tunnel to forward the packets
according to the default VLANs of interfaces.
5. Internal nodes on the backbone network forward the packets across the backbone
network as common Layer 2 packets.
396
6. The egress device on the backbone network forwards the packets to user networks
without modifying the packets.
NOTE
l This method is applicable only to STP, RSTP, and MSTP. To configure a device as the provider,
run the bpdu-tunnel stp bridge role provider command.
l The S3700HI does not support this method.
l Replace the original multicast MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets from user networks
with a specified multicast MAC address.
NOTE
This method is applicable to all Layer 2 protocols.
1. PEs identify the type (such as STP) of the Layer 2 protocol packets sent from user
networks and tag the packets with corresponding VLAN IDs according to default
VLANs of interfaces.
2. PEs replace the standard multicast destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol
packets with a specified multicast MAC address according to the mappings between
multicast destination MAC addresses and Layer 2 protocols.
4. The egress device of the backbone network restores the original destination MAC
address of the packets according to the mappings between multicast destination MAC
addresses and Layer 2 protocols, and then forwards the packets to user networks.
397
VLAN-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
Figure 11-3 Networking of VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
CE-VLAN 200
CE-VLAN 100
LAN-B
MSTP
ISP Network
PE 1
PE 3
PE 2
LAN-A
MSTP
LAN-B
MSTP
LAN-B
MSTP
LAN-A
MSTP
CE-VLAN 100
BPDU Tunnel
CE-VLAN 200
CE-VLAN 100
Trunk
100-200
Trunk
100-200

A PE generally functions as an aggregation device. As shown in Figure 11-3, the aggregation
interface on PE1 can receive BPDUs from LAN-A and LAN-B. To differentiate BPDUs from
the two LANs, BPDUs sent from CEs to PEs must have VLAN tags. In Figure 11-3, packets
sent from LAN-A contain VLAN 200 and packets sent from LAN-B contain VLAN 100.
Packets of certain Layer 2 protocols such as STP, RSTP, and MSTP are untagged. When
receiving Layer 2 protocol packets with VLAN tags, PEs consider the packets invalid and discard
them. In this case, you can configure VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
on PEs so that Layer 2 protocol packets can traverse the backbone network through Layer 2
tunnels.
Similar to interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, you can use either of the
following methods to implement VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission:
l Replace the default multicast MAC address of the Layer 2 protocol that can be identified
by PEs with another multicast MAC address.
1. Configure all PEs as providers. Then the multicast destination MAC address of
BPDUs sent from the backbone network is changed from 01-80-C2-00-00-00 to
01-80-C2-00-00-08.
2. Configure all devices on user networks as customers. Then the multicast destination
MAC address of BPDUs sent from user networks is 01-80-C2-00-00-00.
398
3. Configure devices on user networks to send Layer 2 protocol packets with the specified
VLAN IDs to the backbone network.
4. Enable PEs to identify Layer 2 protocol packets with the specified VLAN IDs and
allow these packets to pass.
5. PEs (providers) do not consider these packets as Layer 2 protocol BPDUs and do not
send them to the CPU. Instead, PEs select a Layer 2 tunnel to forward the packets
according to the default VLANs of interfaces.
7. The egress device on the backbone network forwards the packets to user networks
without modifying the packets.
NOTE
l This method is applicable only to STP, RSTP, and MSTP. To configure a device as the provider,
run the bpdu-tunnel stp bridge role provider command.
NOTE
2. Enable PEs to identify Layer 2 protocol packets with the specified VLAN IDs and
allow these packets to pass.
3. PEs replace the standard multicast destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol
packets with a specified multicast MAC address according to the mappings between
multicast destination MAC addresses and Layer 2 protocols.
5. The egress device of the backbone network restores the original destination MAC
address of the packets according to the mappings between multicast destination MAC
addresses and Layer 2 protocols, and then forwards the packets to user networks.
QinQ-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
l QinQ overview
The QinQ protocol is a Layer 2 tunneling protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q. The QinQ
technology improves utilization of VLANs by adding another 802.1Q tag to a packet. In
this manner, services on a private VLAN can be transparently transmitted to the public
network. A packet transmitted on the backbone network is called a QinQ packet because
it has two 802.1Q tags (a public tag and a private tag), that is, 802.1Q-in-802.1Q.
Figure 11-4 shows the format of a QinQ packet. Compared with an 802.1Q packet, a QinQ
packet contains an additional tag following the source address (SA) field. This tag is called
an outer tag or a public tag and contains the VLAN ID of the public network. The inner tag
is known as the private tag and contains the VLAN ID of the private network.
NOTE
The QinQ function configured on a Layer 2 interface is called VLAN stacking.
399
Figure 11-4 802.1Q encapsulation and QinQ encapsulation
DA
ETYPE
2 Bytes
TAG
2 Bytes
LEN/ETYPE
2 Bytes
DATA
46 Byte~1500 Bytes
DA
6 Bytes
SA
6 Bytes
ETYPE
2 Bytes
TAG
2 Bytes
DATA
46 Byte~1500 Bytes
FCS
4 Bytes
ETYPE
2 Bytes
TAG
2 Bytes
CFI VLAN ID 0x8100 Priority
802.1Q Encapsulation
QinQ
Encapsulation
SA
6 Bytes
FCS LEN/ETYPE
2 Bytes 6 Bytes 4 Bytes

l QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
Figure 11-5 Networking of QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
CE-VLAN 200
ISP Network PE 1
PE 2
LAN-A
MSTP
LAN-B
MSTP
LAN-B
MSTP
LAN-A
MSTP
CE-VLAN 100
PE-VLAN20:CE-VLAN 100~199
PE-VLAN30:CE-VLAN 200~299
CE-VLAN 200
CE-VLAN 100
BPDU Tunnel
BPDU Tunnel

When a great number of user networks are connected to the backbone network, considerable
VLAN IDs of the ISP are required if packets are transparently transmitted based on VLANs.
In this case, BPDUs can be forwarded in QinQ mode on the backbone network.
As shown in Figure 11-5, QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission is
configured on aggregation interfaces of PEs. Packets from different user networks are
encapsulated in different outer VLAN tags. QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent
transmission is implemented as follows:
400
2. Enable Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission and QinQ on interfaces of the ingress
device on the backbone network.
3. Configure PEs to add different outer VLAN tags (public VLAN IDs) to packets
according to customer VLAN IDs.
4. PEs select different Layer 2 tunnels according to outer VLAN tags of packets. Then
the Layer 2 protocol packets are forwarded by internal nodes on the backbone network
as common Layer 2 packets.
5. Enable Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission and QinQ on interfaces of the egress
device on the backbone network.
6. The egress device removes outer VLAN tags of the packets and forwards the packets
to user networks according to customer VLAN IDs.
As shown in Figure 11-5, PEs add outer VLAN 20 to Layer 2 protocol packets of VLAN
100 to VLAN 199 and add outer VLAN 30 to Layer 2 protocol packets of VLAN 200 to
VLAN 299, and then forward the packets to other devices on the backbone network. In this
way, Layer 2 protocol packets of different user networks can be transparently transmitted
on the backbone network, and VLAN IDs of the carrier are saved.
11.3 Configuring Interface-based Layer 2 Protocol
Transparent Transmission
configure interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission so that Layer 2 protocol
packets can be transparently transmitted on the backbone network.
configure interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission. In this way, Layer 2
protocol packets from user networks are transmitted to destination user networks through
different Layer 2 tunnels on the backbone network to implement calculation of Layer 2 protocols.
Before configuring interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, complete the
following tasks:
l Connecting interfaces correctly
l Configuring VLANs on Layer 2 interfaces
l Enabling the interfaces to send BPDUs to the CPU by using the bpdu enable command
401
Data Preparation
To configure interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, you need the following
data.
No. Data
1 Name of the user-defined protocol
2 Destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets and multicast MAC address
that replaces the destination MAC address
3 Names of the user-side interfaces on PEs and their default VLANs

11.3.2 (Optional) Defining Characteristic Information About a
Layer 2 Protocol
Context
When non-standard Layer 2 protocol packets with a certain multicast destination address need
to be transparently transmitted on the backbone network, you can define characteristic
information about the Layer 2 protocol.
Do as follows on PEs.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
l2protocol-tunnel user-defined-protocol protocol-name protocol-mac protocol-mac
[ encape-type { { ethernetii | snap } protocol-type protocol-type | llc dsap dsap-
value ssap ssap-value } ] group-mac { group-mac | default-group-mac }
The characteristic information about the Layer 2 protocol is defined, including the protocol
name, Ethernet encapsulation format and destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets,
and MAC address that replaces the destination MAC address.
When defining characteristic information about a Layer 2 protocol, do not use the following
multicast MAC addresses to replace the destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets:
l Destination MAC addresses of BPDUs: 0180-C200-0000 to 0180-C200-002F
l Destination MAC address of Smart Link packets: 010F-E200-0004
l Special multicast MAC addresses: 0100-0CCC-CCCC and 0100-0CCC-CCCD
l Common multicast MAC addresses that have been used on the device
----End
402
11.3.3 Configuring the Transparent Transmission Mode of Layer 2
Protocol Packets
Context
To implement transparent transmission of Layer 2 protocol packets, replace the default multicast
MAC address of the Layer 2 protocol that can be identified by PEs with another multicast MAC
address or replace the original multicast destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets
from user networks with a specified multicast MAC address.
Use either of the following methods on PEs according to the Layer 2 protocol type and the
required transparent transmission mode.
Procedure
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
bpdu-tunnel stp bridge role provider
The PE is configured as a provider.
NOTE
l This method is applicable only to STP, RSTP, and MSTP.
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
l2protocol-tunnel protocol-type group-mac group-mac
The original multicast destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets is
replaced with a specified multicast MAC address.
NOTE
When configuring Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, do not use the following multicast
MAC addresses to replace the destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets:
----End
403
11.3.4 Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission on an
Interface
Context
Do as follows on PEs according to the type of Layer 2 protocol packets to be transparently
transmitted.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
The user-side interface view is displayed.
Step 3 Run:
port hybrid pvid vlan vlan-id
The default VLAN of the interface is configured.
Step 4 Run:
port hybrid untagged vlan vlan-id
The interface is added to the default VLAN in untagged mode.
Step 5 Run:
port hybrid tagged vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
The interface is added to the specified VLANs in tagged mode.
NOTE
The range of VLAN IDs specified in this step must include VLAN IDs of Layer 2 protocol packets from
user networks.
Step 6 Run:
l2protocol-tunnel { all | protocol-type | user-defined-protocol protocol-name }
enable
Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission is enabled on the interface.
NOTE
l For details on how to add an interface to VLANs, see the VLAN configuration in the S3700
Configuration Guide- Ethernet.
l Before specifying a user-defined protocol in the l2protocol-tunnel command, run the l2protocol-
tunnel user-defined-protocol command to define characteristic information about the Layer 2
protocol. STP packets have a default MAC address for replacing the original destination MAC address.
For packets of other Layer 2 protocols, you need to configure a global MAC address to replace the
destination MAC address. For details, see l2protocol-tunnel group-mac.
l The l2protocol-tunnel and l2protocol-tunnel vlan commands cannot specify the same protocol type
on the same interface; otherwise, the configurations conflict.
----End
404
11.3.5 Checking Configuration
Context
Configurations of interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission are complete.
Procedure
l Run the display l2protocol-tunnel group-mac { all | protocol-type | user-defined-
protocol protocol-name } command to check information about transparent transmission
of specified or all Layer 2 protocol packets.
----End
11.4 Configuring VLAN-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent
Transmission
VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission so that Layer 2 protocol packets are
transparently transmitted on the backbone network.
and Layer 2 protocol packets sent from user networks contain VLAN tags, you can configure
VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission. In this way, Layer 2 protocol packets
from user networks are transmitted to destination user networks through different Layer 2 tunnels
on the backbone network to implement calculation of Layer 2 protocols.
Before configuring VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, complete the
following tasks:
Data Preparation
To configure VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, you need the following
data.
No. Data
405
No. Data
2 Destination MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets and multicast MAC address
that replaces the destination MAC address
3 Names of user-side interfaces on PEs and VLANs allowed by user-side interfaces

Layer 2 Protocol
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
----End
Protocol Packets
Context
406
Procedure
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
NOTE
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
NOTE
----End
11.4.4 Enabling VLAN-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent
Transmission on an Interface
Context
transmitted.
407
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
port hybrid tagged vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
The interface is added to the specified VLANs in tagged mode.
NOTE
The range of VLAN IDs specified in this step must include VLAN IDs of Layer 2 protocol packets from
user networks.
Step 4 Run:
{ vlan low-id [ to high-id ] } &<1-10>
VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission is enabled on the interface.
NOTE
l For details on how to add an interface to VLANs in tagged mode, see the VLAN configuration in the
S3700 Configuration Guide- Ethernet.
l Before specifying a user-defined protocol in the l2protocol-tunnel vlan command, run the l2protocol-
l The l2protocol-tunnel vlan and l2protocol-tunnel commands cannot specify the same protocol type
----End
Context
Configurations of Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission are complete.
Procedure
----End
408
11.5 Configuring QinQ-based Layer 2 Protocol Transparent
Transmission
QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission so that Layer 2 protocol packets can be
transparently transmitted on the backbone network and that VLAN IDs of the carrier can be
saved.
and Layer 2 protocol packets sent from user networks contain VLAN tags, you can configure
QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission to save VLAN IDs of the carrier. In this
way, devices on the backbone network select tunnels for Layer 2 protocol packets according to
outer VLAN IDs of packets so that Layer 2 protocol packets of different VLANs are transmitted
across the backbone network through different tunnels.
Before configuring QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, complete the
following tasks:
Data Preparation
To configure QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, you need the following
data.
No. Data
2 Destination MAC address and group MAC address of Layer 2 protocol packets
3 Names of user-side interfaces on PEs, default VLAN IDs, and VLANs allowed by
user-side interfaces
4 Outer VLAN IDs added to Layer 2 protocol packets

Layer 2 Protocol
409
Context
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
----End
Protocol Packets
Context
Procedure
1. Run:
system-view
410
2. Run:
NOTE
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
NOTE
----End
11.5.4 Enabling QinQ-based Layer 2 Transparent Transmission on
an Interface
Context
transmitted.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
411
port hybrid untagged vlan { { vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] } &<1-10> | all }
The interface is added to the specified VLANs in untagged mode.
Step 4 Run:
Step 5 Run:
port vlan-stacking vlan vlan-id1 [ to vlan-id2 ] stack-vlan vlan-id3
The interface is configured to add an outer VLAN tag to the Layer 2 protocol packets.
Step 6 Run:
{ vlan low-id [ to high-id ] } &<1-10>
VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission is enabled on the interface.
NOTE
l The outer VLAN tag (vlan-id3) specified in step 5 must be included in the VLAN range specified in
step 6.
l For details on how to add an interface to VLANs in untagged mode, see the VLAN configuration in
the S3700 Configuration Guide- Ethernet.
l Before specifying a user-defined protocol in the l2protocol-tunnel vlan command, run the l2protocol-
l The l2protocol-tunnel vlan and l2protocol-tunnel commands cannot specify the same protocol type
----End
Context
Configurations of Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission are complete.
Procedure
----End
11.6 Maintaining Layer 2 Protocol Transparent
Transmission
This section describes how to debug Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission.
412
11.6.1 Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Transparent Transmission
Context
CAUTION
When a fault occurs during Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission, run the following
debugging command in the user view to locate the fault.
Procedure
l Run the debugging l2protocol-tunnel [ msg | error | event ] command in the user view
to enable Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission.
----End
This section provides examples for configuring interface, VLAN, and QinQ based Layer 2
protocol transparent transmission.
11.7.1 Example for Configuring Interface-based Layer 2 Protocol
As shown in Figure 11-6, CEs on user networks communicate with each other through PEs and
STP runs on user networks; therefore, STP packets sent from CEs must be transmitted through
the backbone network between PEs. Each PE interface is connected to only one CE and receives
STP packets from the CE. In this scenario, configure interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent
transmission.
In this example, PEs on the backbone network transparently transmit STP packets sent from CEs
by replacing the original multicast destination MAC address of STP packets with a specified
MAC address. By default, the destination MAC address of STP packets is 0180-C200-0000.
413
Figure 11-6 Networking of interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
CE4
CE1
CE3
CE2
Eth 0/0/1
PE1
PE2
Eth 0/0/2
Eth 0/0/1
Eth 0/0/2
VLAN100
Eth 0/0/1
Eth 0/0/1
Eth 0/0/1
Eth 0/0/1
Eth 0/0/3
Eth 0/0/3
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN200

1. Configure STP on CEs.
2. Add user-side interfaces of PEs to the specified VLANs.
3. Configure interface-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission on PEs.
4. Configure network-side interfaces of PEs to allow packets of VLAN 100 and VLAN 200
to pass.
Data Preparation
l IDs of VLANs that user-side interfaces of PEs belong to
l IDs of VLANs allowed by network-side interfaces of PEs
Procedure
Step 1 Enable STP on CEs and PEs.
# Configure CE1.
[Quidway] sysname CE1
[CE1] vlan 100
[CE1-vlan100] quit
[CE1] stp enable
[CE1] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[CE1-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 100
[CE1-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 100
414
[CE1-Ethernet0/0/1] bpdu enable
# Configure CE2.
[CE2] vlan 100
[CE2-vlan100] quit
[CE2] stp enable
# Configure CE3.
[CE3] vlan 200
[CE3-vlan200] quit
[CE3] stp enable
# Configure CE4.
[CE4] vlan 200
[CE4-vlan200] quit
[CE4] stp enable
# Configure PE1.
[PE1]
# Configure PE2.
[PE2]
Step 2 On PE1 and PE2, add Eth 0/0/1 to VLAN 100, add Eth 0/0/2 to VLAN 200, and enable Layer
2 protocol transparent transmission.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] vlan 100
[PE1-vlan100] quit
[PE1] interface Ethernet 0/0/1
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid pvid vlan 100
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid untagged vlan 100
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] l2protocol-tunnel stp enable
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/1] bpdu enable
[PE1] vlan 200
[PE1-vlan200] quit
415
# Configure PE2.
[PE2] vlan 100
[PE2-vlan100] quit
[PE2] vlan 200
[PE2-vlan200] quit
Step 3 Configure PEs to replace the destination MAC address of STP packets received from CEs.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] l2protocol-tunnel stp group-mac 0100-5e00-0011
# Configure PE2.
Step 4 On PE1 and PE2, configure network-side interface Eth 0/0/3 to allow packets of VLAN 100 and
VLAN 200 to pass.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/3] port hybrid tagged vlan 100 200
# Configure PE2.
After the configuration, run the display l2protocol-tunnel group-mac command, and you can
view the protocol type or name, original destination MAC address, new destination MAC
address, and priority of Layer 2 protocol packets to be transparently transmitted.
Take the display on PE1 as an example.
<PE1> display l2protocol-tunnel group-mac stp
Protocol EncapeType ProtocolType Protocol-MAC Group-MAC Pri
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
stp llc dsap 0x42 0180-c200-0000 0100-5e00-0011 0
ssap 0x42
Run the display stp command on CE1 and CE2 to view the root in the MST region. You can
find that a spanning tree is calculated between CE1 and CE2. Eth 0/0/1 of CE1 is a root port,
and CE 0/0/1 of CE2 is a designated port.
<CE1> display stp
-------[CIST Global Info] [Mode MSTP] -------
CIST Bridge :32768.00e0-fc9f-3257
416
Bridge Times :Hello 2s MaxAge 20s FwDly 15s MaxHop 20
CIST Root/ERPC :32768.00e0-fc9a-4315 / 199999
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.00e0-fc9f-3257 / 0
CIST RootPortId :128.82
BPDU-Protection :disabled
TC or TCN received :6
TC count per hello :6
STP Converge Mode :Normal
Share region-configuration :enabled
Time since last TC received :0 days 2h:24m:36s
----[Port1(Ethernet0/0/1)] [FORWARDING] ----
Port Protocol :enabled
Port Role :Root Port
Port Priority :128
Port Cost(Dot1T ) :Config=auto / Active=200000000
Desg. Bridge/Port :32768.00e0-fc9a-4315 / 128.82
Port Edged :Config=disabled / Active=disabled
Point-to-point :Config=auto / Active=true
Transit Limit :147 packets/hello-time
Protection Type :None
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
Port Protocol Type :Config=auto / Active= dot1s
BPDU Encapsulation :Config=stp / Active=stp
PortTimes :Hello 2s MaxAge 20s FwDly 15s RemHop 20
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :6
TCN: 0, Config: 0, RST: 0, MST: 6
BPDU Received :4351
<CE2> display stp
-------[CIST Global Info] [Mode MSTP] -------
CIST Bridge :32768.00e0-fc9a-4315
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.00e0-fc9a-4315 / 0
----[Port1(Ethernet0/0/1)] [FORWARDING] ----
Port Role :Designated Port
Port Priority :128
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :4534
BPDU Received :6
<CE3> display stp
417
-------[CIST Global Info][Mode MSTP]-------
CIST Bridge :32768.000b-0967-58a0
CIST Root/ERPC :32768.000b-0952-f13e / 199999
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.000b-0967-58a0 / 0
----[Port1(Ethernet0/0/1)][FORWARDING]----
Port Priority :128
Desg. Bridge/Port :32768.000b-0952-f13e / 128.82
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :114
BPDU Received :885
<CE4> display stp
CIST Bridge :32768.000b-0952-f13e
CIST Root/ERPC :32768.000b-0952-f13e / 0
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.000b-0952-f13e / 0
Port Priority :128
Desg. Bridge/Port :32768.000b-0952-f13e / 128.82
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :1834
BPDU Received :1
----End
418
Configuration Files
#
sysname CE1
#
vlan batch 100
#
#
return
#
sysname CE2
#
vlan batch 100
#
#
return
#
sysname CE3
#
vlan batch 200
#
#
return
#
sysname CE4
#
vlan batch 200
#
#
return
#
sysname PE1
#
vlan batch 100 200
#
l2protocol-tunnel stp group-mac 0100-5e00-0011
#
l2protocol-tunnel stp enable
#
#
419
#
return
#
sysname PE2
#
vlan batch 100 200
#
#
#
#
#
return
11.7.2 Example for Configuring VLAN-based Layer 2 Protocol
As shown in Figure 11-7, CEs on user networks communicate with each other through PEs and
STP runs on user networks; therefore, STP packets sent from CEs must be transmitted through
the backbone network between PEs. Each PE interface is an aggregation interface. PEs identify
STP packets from different user networks according to VLAN tags of STP packets. In this
scenario, configure VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission to ensure that:
l All the devices in VLAN 100 participate in calculation of a spanning tree.
In this example, PEs transparently transmit STP packets sent from user networks by replacing
the original multicast destination MAC address of STP packets with a specified multicast MAC
address. By default, the destination MAC address of STP packets is 0180-C200-0000.
Figure 11-7 Networking of VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
VLAN 100 VLAN 200
Eth0/0/1
CE1
CE2
Eth0/0/1
VLAN 100 VLAN 200
CE3
CE4
PE1
PE2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
P
Eth0/0/1 Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/3
420

1. Enable STP on the CEs.
2. Configure CEs to send STP packets with specified VLAN tags to PEs.
3. Configure VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission on PEs.
4. Configure network-side interfaces of PEs to allow packets of VLAN 100 and VLAN 200
to pass.
5. Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on the P device so that packets sent from PEs
can be transmitted on the backbone network.
Data Preparation
l VLAN tags in STP packets sent from CEs to PEs
l IDs of the VLANs that interfaces of PEs and CEs belong to
Procedure
# Configure CE1.
[CE1] stp enable
# Configure CE2.
[CE2] stp enable
# Configure CE3.
[CE3] stp enable
# Configure CE4.
[CE4] stp enable
Step 2 Configure CE1 and CE2 to send STP packets with VLAN tag 100 to PEs and configure CE3
and CE4 to send STP packets with VLAN tag 200 to PEs.
# Configure CE1.
[CE1] vlan 100
[CE1-vlan100] quit
[CE1-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid tagged vlan 100
[CE1-Ethernet0/0/1] stp bpdu vlan 100
# Configure CE2.
[CE2] vlan 100
[CE2-vlan100] quit
421
# Configure CE3.
[CE3] vlan 200
[CE3-vlan200] quit
# Configure CE4.
[CE4] vlan 200
[CE4-vlan200] quit
Step 3 Configure PE interfaces to transparently transmit STP packets of CEs to the P device.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] vlan 100
[PE1-vlan100] quit
[PE1] vlan 200
[PE1-vlan200] quit
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/2] l2protocol-tunnel stp vlan 100
# Configure PE2.
[PE2] vlan 100
[PE2-vlan100] quit
[PE2] vlan 200
[PE2-vlan200] quit
# Configure PE1.
# Configure PE2.
422
Step 5 Configure the Layer 2 forwarding function on the P device and configure it to allow packets of
VLAN 100 and VLAN 200 to pass.
[P] vlan 100
[P-vlan100] quit
[P] vlan 200
[P-vlan200] quit
[P] interface ethernet 0/0/1
[P-Ethernet0/0/1] port hybrid tagged vlan 100 200
[P-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
[P] interface ethernet 0/0/2
[P-Ethernet0/0/2] port hybrid tagged vlan 100 200
[P-Ethernet0/0/2] quit
After the configuration, run the display l2protocol-tunnel group-mac command. You can view
the protocol type or name, original destination MAC address, new destination MAC address,
and priority of Layer 2 protocol packets to be transparently transmitted.
Take the ouput on PE1 as an example.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
stp llc dsap 0x42 0180-c200-0000 0100-5e00-0011 0
ssap 0x42
<CE1> display stp
CIST Bridge :32768.000b-09f0-1b91
CIST Root/ERPC :32768.000b-09d4-b66c / 199999
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.000b-09f0-1b91 / 0
Port Priority :128
Desg. Bridge/Port :32768.000b-09d4-b66c / 128.82
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :237
BPDU Received :9607
<CE2> display stp
CIST Bridge :32768.000b-09d4-b66c
423
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.000b-09d4-b66c / 0
Port Priority :128
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :7095
BPDU Received :2
<CE3> display stp
Port Priority :128
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :238
BPDU Received :9745
<CE4> display stp
424
Port Priority :128
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :7171
BPDU Received :2
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname CE1
#
vlan batch 100
#
stp bpdu vlan 100
#
return
#
sysname CE2
#
vlan batch 100
#
stp bpdu vlan 100
#
return
#
sysname CE3
#
vlan batch 200
#
stp bpdu vlan 200
#
return
425
#
sysname CE4
#
vlan batch 200
#
stp bpdu vlan 200
#
Return
#
sysname PE1
#
vlan batch 100 200
#
#
#
l2protocol-tunnel stp vlan 100
#
#
return
l Configuration file of P
#
sysname P
#
vlan batch 100 200
#
#
#
return
#
sysname PE2
#
vlan batch 100 200
#
#
#
#
#
return
426
11.7.3 Example for Configuring QinQ-based Layer 2 Protocol
As shown in Figure 11-8, CEs on user networks communicate with each other through PEs.
STP runs on user networks. CE1 and CE2 send STP packets with VLAN tag 100 to PEs; CE3
and CE4 send STP packets with VLAN tag 200 to PEs. In this scenario, configure QinQ-based
Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission to ensure that:
To save VLAN IDs on the public network, configure VLAN stacking on PEs to add outer VLAN
tag 10 to STP packets with VLAN tag 100 and VLAN tag 200. Then STP packets contain double
tags and are transparently transmitted on the backbone network.
In this example, PEs transparently transmit STP packets sent from user networks by replacing
the original multicast destination MAC address of STP packets with a specified multicast MAC
address. By default, the destination MAC address of STP packets is 0180-C200-0000.
Figure 11-8 Networking of QinQ-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission
VLAN100
VLAN100
VLAN200
VLAN200
CE1 CE2
CE3 CE4
PE1 PE2
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/2
Eth0/0/3
Eth0/0/1
Eth0/0/1

1. Enable STP on the CEs.
2. Configure CEs to send STP packets with specified VLAN tags to PEs.
3. Configure VLAN-based Layer 2 protocol transparent transmission on PEs.
4. Configure QinQ (VLAN stacking) on PEs so that PEs add outer VLAN tag 10 to STP
packets sent from CEs.
427
Data Preparation
l VLAN tags in STP packets sent from CEs to PEs
l Outer VLAN tag that PEs add to STP packets
l IDs of the VLANs that interfaces of PEs and CEs belong to
Procedure
# Configure CE1.
[CE1] stp enable
# Configure CE2.
[CE2] stp enable
# Configure CE3.
[CE3] stp enable
# Configure CE4.
[CE4] stp enable
Step 2 Configure CE1 and CE2 to send STP packets with VLAN tag 100 to PEs and configure CE3
and CE4 to send STP packets with VLAN tag 200 to PEs.
# Configure CE1.
[CE1] vlan 100
[CE1-vlan100] quit
[CE1-Ethernet0/0/1] quit
# Configure CE2.
[CE2] vlan 100
[CE2-vlan100] quit
# Configure CE3.
[CE3] vlan 200
[CE3-vlan200] quit
# Configure CE4.
[CE4] vlan 200
[CE4-vlan200] quit
428
Step 3 Configure QinQ-based transparent transmission on PEs so that PEs add outer VLAN tag 10 to
STP packets with VLAN tag 100 and VLAN tag 200.
# Configure PE1.
[PE1] vlan 10
[PE1-Vlan10] quit
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/2] qinq vlan-translation enable
[PE1-Ethernet0/0/2] port vlan-stacking vlan 100 stack-vlan 10
# Configure PE2.
[PE2] vlan 10
[PE2-Vlan10] quit
# Configure PE1.
# Configure PE2.
After the configuration, run the display l2protocol-tunnel group-mac command. You can view
the protocol type or name, original destination MAC address, new destination MAC address,
and priority of Layer 2 protocol packets to be transparently transmitted.
Take the output on PE1 as an example.
429
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
stp llc dsap 0x42 0180-c200-0000 0100-5e00-0011 0
ssap 0x42
<CE1> display stp
CIST Bridge :32768.000b-09f0-1b91
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.000b-09f0-1b91 / 0
Port Priority :128
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :237
BPDU Received :9607
<CE2> display stp
CIST Bridge :32768.000b-09d4-b66c
CIST RegRoot/IRPC :32768.000b-09d4-b66c / 0
Port Priority :128
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
430
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :7095
BPDU Received :2
<CE3> display stp
Port Priority :128
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :238
BPDU Received :9745
<CE4> display stp
Port Priority :128
Port Stp Mode :MSTP
431
TC or TCN send :0
BPDU Sent :7171
BPDU Received :2
Run the display vlan command on PEs to view the QinQ configuration.
Take the output on PE1 as an example.
<PE1> display vlan 10 verbose
* : Management-VLAN
---------------------
VLAN ID : 10
VLAN Type : Common
Description : VLAN 0010
Status : Enable
Broadcast : Enable
MAC Learning : Enable
Statistics : Disable
Property : Default
VLAN State : Up
----------------
Tagged Port: Ethernet0/0/1
----------------
QinQ-stack Port: Ethernet0/0/2 Ethernet0/0/3
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname CE1
#
vlan batch 100
#
stp bpdu vlan 100
#
return
#
sysname CE2
#
vlan batch 100
#
stp bpdu vlan 100
#
return
#
sysname CE3
#
vlan batch 200
#
stp bpdu vlan 200
#
return
432
#
sysname CE4
#
vlan batch 200
#
stp bpdu vlan 200
#
return
#
sysname PE1
#
vlan batch 10
#
#
#
#
#
return
#
sysname PE2
#
vlan batch 10
#
#
#
#
#
return
433
12 Loopback Detection Configuration
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the concept and configuration of loopback detection and provides
configuration examples.
12.1 Loopback Detection Overview
This section describes the concept of loopback detection.
12.2 Configuring Loopback Detection
This section describes how to configure the loopback detection function.
This section provides a loopback detection configuration example.
Configuration Guide - Ethernet 12 Loopback Detection Configuration
434
12.1 Loopback Detection Overview
This section describes the concept of loopback detection.
When a loop occurs on a network, broadcast, multicast, and unknown unicast packets are
repeatedly transmitted on the network. This wastes network resources or even causes service
interruption on the entire network. To protect the network, certain actions should be taken on
the interface where the loop occurs, and the administrator need to check the network connection
and configuration to solve the problem soon. Therefore, a mechanism is required on a Layer 2
network to detect loops and notify the administrator.
Loopback detection is such a mechanism. It sends detection packets from an interface at intervals
and checks whether the packets are sent back to the interface. When this occurs, there is a
loopback on the interface. When detecting a loopback, the system sends a trap to the network
management system to notify the administrator. The system also blocks the interface, disables
MAC address learning on the interface, or shuts down the interface to minimize the impact on
the network.
12.2 Configuring Loopback Detection
This section describes how to configure the loopback detection function.
Before configuring loopback detection, familiarize yourself with the applicable environment,
Figure 12-1 and Figure 12-2 show the application of loopback detection.
A loopback occurs on an interface usually because optical fibers are connected incorrectly, the
optical modem fails, or the interface is damaged by high voltage. As shown in Figure 12-1, a
cable is incorrectly connected on the device connected to the Switch. As a result, packets sent
from an interface of the Switch are sent back to the interface. This may cause traffic forwarding
errors or MAC address flapping on the same interface.
Figure 12-1 Loopback detection application 1
Switch
TX RX

435
As shown in Figure 12-2, loops may occur on the network connected to an Switch interface.
When a loop occurs, packets sent from the interface are sent back to this interface.
Figure 12-2 Loopback detection application 2
Switch

You can configure loopback detection on the interface in the preceding scenarios. When a
loopback is detected on the interface, the Switch performs certain actions, for example, blocks
the interface. Only users connected to this interface are affected, and other users can still
communicate. When the Switch detects that the loopback has been removed, it recovers
communication on the interface.
NOTE
l Loopback detection cannot prevent loops on the entire network. It only detects loops on a single node.
l A large number of packets are sent during loopback detection, occupying CPU resources; therefore,
disable loopback detection if it is not required.
Before configuring loopback detection, complete the following task:
physical layer status of the interfaces is Up
Data Preparation
To configure loopback detection, you need the following data.
No. Data
1 Interface number
2 VLAN IDs in detection packets
3 (Optional) Action performed when a loopback is detected
4 (Optional) Interface recovery time after a loop is detected
436
No. Data
5 (Optional) Loopback detection interval for sending detection packets

12.2.2 Enabling Loopback Detection
An interface sends detection packets to detect loopbacks only after loopback detection is enabled
on the interface.
Context
You can enable loopback detection on all interfaces at one time in the system view or enable it
on a single interface in the interface view.
Procedure
l Enabling loopback detection on all interfaces
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
loopback-detect enable
Loopback detection is enabled on all interfaces.
By default, loopback detection is disabled on an interface.
TIP
You can use this method to simplify configuration when most interfaces need to perform
loopback detection.
l Enabling loopback detection on a single interface
1. Run:
system-view
2. Run:
3. Run:
Loopback detection is enabled on the interface.
NOTE
Loopback detection cannot be configured on an Eth-Trunk or its member interfaces.
----End
12.2.3 Specifying VLAN IDs of Loopback Detection Packets
You can specify one or more VLAN IDs for loopback detection packets.
437
Context
By default, the system sends untagged detection packets after loopback detection is enabled on
interface. If the interface has been added to a VLAN in tagged mode, the untagged detection
packets are discarded on the link, and the interface cannot receive loopback packets. To solve
the problem, you can configure the VLAN ID for detection packets.
After VLAN IDs are specified, the interface sends an untagged detection packet and multiple
detection packets with the specified VLAN tags. Each interface can send detection packets with
a maximum of eight VLAN IDs.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
loopback-detect packet vlan vlan-id
A VLAN ID is specified for loopback detection packets.
By default, detection packets do not have a VLAN ID. You can specify a maximum of eight
VLAN IDs for loopback detection packets.
NOTE
Before running the loopback-detect packet vlan vlan-id command, ensure that:
l The specified VLAN exists.
l The interface has been added to the specified VLAN in tagged mode.
----End
12.2.4 (Optional) Configuring an Action to Perform After a
Loopback Is Detected
When a loopback is detected on an interface, the system sets the interface status to loopback and
sends a trap, blocks the interface, disables MAC address learning on the interface, or shuts down
the interface as configured.
Context
After loopback detection is enabled on an interface, the interface periodically sends detection
packets and checks whether loopback packets are received. You can configure the Switch to
take an action to minimize impact on the system and the entire network when a loopback is
detected.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
438
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
loopback-detect action { block | nolearn | shutdown | trap }
The action that will be performed after a loopback is detected on the interface is configured.
The default action is block.
When a loopback is detected on an interface, the system performs any of the following actions:
l block: blocks the interface. After the interface is blocked, it is isolated from other interfaces
and does not forward received data packets to other interfaces.
l nolearn: disables MAC address learning on the interface. When a loopback is detected on
the interface, the interface stops learning MAC addresses.
l shutdown: shuts down the interface.
l trap: only sends a trap.
----End
12.2.5 (Optional) Setting the Interface Recovery Time After a Loop
Is Removed
Context
Perform the following steps on the S3700 that needs to perform loopback detection.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
Step 3 Run:
loopback-detect recovery-time recovery-time
The interface recovery time after a loop is removed is set.
The default recovery time is three times the loopback detection interval.
439
NOTE
l It is recommended that the recovery time be at least three times the interval for sending loopback
detection packets. If the interval for sending loopback detection packets is very short, set the recovery
time to be at least 10 seconds longer than the interval.
l An interface cannot recover automatically after it is shut down. You must manually recover the interface
by using the undo shutdown command.
----End
12.2.6 (Optional) Setting the Interval for Sending Loopback
Detection Packets on an Interface
Context
An interface sends loopback detection packets at intervals to check whether a loopback exists
or whether the existing loopback has been removed.
Procedure
Step 1 Run:
system-view
Step 2 Run:
loopback-detect packet-interval packet-interval-time
The interval for sending loopback detection packets is set.
By default, the interval for sending loopback detection packets is 5s.
----End
Procedure
l Run the display loopback-detect command to check the loopback detection configuration
and status of loopback detection enabled interfaces.
----End
This section provides a loopback detection configuration example.
12.3.1 Example for Configuring Loopback Detection
440
As shown in Figure 12-3, if there is a loop on the network connected to Eth 0/0/1, broadcast
storms will occur on the Switch or even the entire network. To detect loops on the network
quickly, you can enable loopback detection on this interface.
Figure 12-3 Loopback detection network diagram
Switch
Eth0/0/1

1. Enable loopback detection on the interface.
2. Specify the VLAN ID of loopback detection packets.
3. Configure loopback detection parameters.
Data Preparation
l Interface where loopback detection needs to be enabled: Eth 0/0/1
l Interval for sending loopback detection packets: 10s
l VLAN ID of loopback detection packets: 100
l Interface recovery time: 30s
Procedure
Step 1 Enable loopback detection on the interface.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] loopback-detect enable
Step 2 Specify the VLAN ID of loopback detection packets.
441
[Quidway] vlan 100
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] loopback-detect packet vlan 100
Step 3 Configure loopback detection parameters.
# Configure the system to block the interface when a loopback is detected.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] loopback-detect action block
# Set the interface recovery time after a loopback is removed.
[Quidway-Ethernet0/0/1] loopback-detect recovery-time 30
# Set the interval for sending loopback detection packets.
[Quidway] loopback-detect packet-interval 10
When a loop occurs on the network connected to Ethernet 0/0/1, the interface is blocked. The
interface will recover 30s after the loop is removed.
----End
Configuration Files
#
sysname Quidway
#
vlan batch 100
#
loopback-detect packet-interval 10
#
loopback-detect recovery-time 30
loopback-detect packet vlan 100
#
return
442

Configuration Guide - Ethernet (V100R006C01 - 01)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuration Guide - Ethernet (V100R006C01 - 01)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Quidway S3700 Series Ethernet Switches

SwitchD SwitchC SwitchB

Attribute Length Attribute Event Attribute Value

You might also like